Transcript
Order Number: MGCS020301C0 H13
Facsimile
DX-600 / 800
!
WARNING
This service information is designed for experienced repair technicians only and is not intended for use by the general public. It does not contain warnings or cautions to advise non-technical individuals of potential dangers in attempting to service a product. Products powered by electricity should be serviced or repaired only by experienced professional technicians. Any attempt to service or repair the product or products dealt within this service information by anyone else could result in serious injury or death.
© 2002 Matsushita Graphic Communication Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. Unauthorized copying and distribution is a violation of law.
This Product Uses Lead (Pb) Free Solder Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs). Information regarding Lead-Free (PbF) solder; Distinction of PbF PCB: PCBs (manufactured) using lead free solder will have a mark following the PCB part numbers in a label on the PCB. Caution: Pb free solder has a higher melting point than standard solder; typically the melting point is 50 - 70 F (30 - 40 C) higher. Please use a soldering iron with temperature control and adjust it to 700 20 F (370 10 C). Exercise care while using higher temperature soldering irons, do not heat the PCB for too long to prevent solder splash or damage to the PCB. Pb free solder will tend to splash when heated too high (about 1100 F/600 C). ECO SOLDER M705 (available from Senju Metal Industry Co., Ltd.; URL: http://www.senju-m.co.jp) is recommended when repairing PbF PCBs.
The contents of this Service Manual are subject to change without notice. Published in Japan.
2
Table of Contents Specifications Table ................................ 5 1.1.
Fax Function .............................................5
1.2.
Internet Fax Function..............................13
1.3.
Printer Function ......................................15
1.4.
External View..........................................17
1.5.
Control Panel ..........................................19
4.9.
Service Modes ..................................... 154 5.1.
General Disassembly Flowchart .............20
2.2.
Disassembly Instructions ........................21
2.3.
Screw Identification Template.................49
Service Modes (For Facsimile) ............ 154
System Description ............................. 199
Disassembly Instructions ..................... 20 2.1.
Diagnostic Codes (For Facsimile) ........ 147
6.1.
Mechanical Operation ......................... 199
6.2.
Electrical Circuit Explanation................ 208
General Network Information ............. 236
Maintenance, Adjustments and Check Points .......................................... 50
7.1.
Network Protocol.................................. 236
7.2.
Layer Functions and Technology ......... 238
7.3.
Network Layer ...................................... 242
7.4.
Transport Layer .................................... 246
3.1.
Required Tools .......................................50
7.5.
Upper Layer ......................................... 248
3.2.
Periodic Check Points.............................50
7.6.
3.3.
Periodic Maintenance Check List ...........51
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)............ 253
3.4.
Updating the Firmware ...........................52
7.7.
ITU T.37 and RFC2305........................ 254
3.5.
Glossary of Electrical Abbreviations .......56
7.8.
Communication Protocols .................... 260
3.6.
SC PC Board ..........................................60
7.9.
POP (Post Office Protocol Version 3) ........... 263
3.7.
MJR PC Board........................................83
7.10. Troubleshooting from a PC .................. 266
3.8.
Power Supply Unit ..................................84
3.9.
PNL PC Board ........................................86
7.11. Verifying the Configuration and Mail Account Type (SMTP or POP) ............. 267 7.12. Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) - Extended Feature ................. 268
3.10. SNS3 PC Board......................................88 3.11. SNS4 PC Board......................................89
7.13. Message Disposition Notifications (MDN) - Extended Feature ................... 271
3.12. SNS1 PC Board......................................90 3.13. SNS2 PC Board......................................90
7.14. Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) - Extended Feature.................. 275
3.14. CCD PC Board .......................................90 3.15. ILS PC Board..........................................90
7.15. Lightweight Challenge-response Mechanism POP (APOP) - Extended Feature .............................. 275
3.16. ACI PC Board .........................................90 3.17. LANB PC Board......................................91
7.16. SMTP Service Extension for Authentication (SMTP Auth) - Extended Feature .............................. 277
3.18. LANC PC Board......................................91 3.19. CST2 PC Board (Optional) .....................92 3.20. SNS2 PC Board (Optional) .....................92 3.21. SRU PC Board (Optional).......................93
7.17. Direct SMTP Transfer - Extended Feature .............................. 279
Troubleshooting .................................... 94
Installation............................................ 280
4.1.
Initial Troubleshooting Flowchart ............94
8.1.
Function Key ........................................ 280
4.2.
Improper LCD Display ............................95
8.2.
Main Unit and Accessories................... 281
4.3.
Information Codes (INFO. CODES)........96
8.3.
Installing the Accessories..................... 282
4.4.
Printed Copy Quality Problems.............108
8.4.
Installing the Toner Cartridge............... 283
4.5.
Document Feeder (ADF) ......................124
8.5.
Loading the Recording Paper .............. 286
4.6.
Communications ...................................127
8.6.
4.7.
Troubleshooting the LAN Interface .......133
Adjusting the Paper Cassette for the Paper Length ............................ 288
4.8.
Information Codes Table (For Facsimile)......................................141
8.7.
Adjusting the Paper Cassette for the Paper Width .............................. 289
3
Table of Contents 8.8.
Connecting the Telephone Line Cable and Power Cord ................................... 290
8.9.
Setting the Internet Parameters ........... 291
8.10. Programming or Retrieving Parameters via Email........................... 294 8.11. Customizing Your Machine .................. 311
Options and Supplies.......................... 319 9.1
Options and Supplies........................... 319
9.2
Installing Optional 250 Sheet Paper Cassette (UE-409070) ......................... 320
9.3
Installing Handset Kit (UE-403176)...... 322
Schematic Diagram ............................. 323 10.1. General Circuit Diagram ...................... 323 10.2. SC PC Board ....................................... 325 10.3. PNL1 PC Board ................................... 339 10.4. MJR PC Board ..................................... 341 10.5. SNS1 PC Board ................................... 342 10.6. SNS2 PC Board ................................... 343 10.7. SNS3 PC Board ................................... 344 10.8. SNS4 PC Board ................................... 345 10.9. CCD PC Board..................................... 346 10.10.ILS PC Board ....................................... 347 10.11.ACI PC Board ...................................... 348 10.12.Power Supply Unit ............................... 349 10.13.LANB PC Board ................................... 354 10.14.LANC PC Board................................... 356
4
DX-600/800
1 Specifications Table 1.1.
Fax Function
Items
Description UF-590/790 DX-600/800 (Reference)
Remarks
Main Specifications 1 Compatibility 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
G3
PSTN Line Port Leased Line Port V.24 Line Port Modem Speed Coding Scheme ECM Short Protocol
Yes No No 33.6 - 2.4 kbps MMR / MR / MH Yes Yes (B, D)
9 Transmission Speed
Approx. 3 sec
10
Transmission Std 8 x 3.85 Fine 8 x 7.7 S-Fine 8 x 15.4 16 x 15.4* Reception Std 8 x 3.85 Fine 8 x 7.7 S-Fine 8 x 15.4 16 x 15.4
Communication Resolution (pels / mm x lines / mm)
Scanner Mechanism 1 Scanning Device 2 Scanning Speed
2.8 sec 3.0 sec 5.0 sec 5.3 sec
Fine S-Fine
4 Document Size (Max.) 5 Document Size (Min.)
With Automatic Fallback Conforms to ITU-T ITU-T Image No. 1 (A4, Std. Resolution)
* Interpolated 16 pels/mm
CCD
Std.
Scanning Resolution 3 (pel / mm x lines / mm)
ITU-T Std. & Non-Std. (MGCS)
Std. Fine S-Fine
10.1 sec 10.6 sec 8 x 3.85 8 x 7.7 8 x 15.4 16 x 15.4* 10.1 x 78.7 in (257 x 2000 mm) 5.8 x 5.0 in (148 x 128 mm) 8.3 in (212 mm)
6 Effective Scanning Width 8.2 in (208 mm) 7 Reduction XMT
Letter size document A4 size document Letter size document A4 size document Letter size document A4 size document
* Interpolated 16 pels/mm
Letter size for USA and Canada A4 size for Other Destinations
No 5
Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
Items
Description UF-590/790 DX-600/800 (Reference)
50 sheets*
8 ADF Capacity
30 sheets*
20 sheets 9 Collation Stack Printer Mechanism 1 Recording Method 2 Recording Speed 3 Recording Resolution Copy, Fax PC Printing Data 4 Recording Paper Size
*For USA and Canada only, documents must be inserted by staggered feed (stairs-shape). Face Down, A4 / Letter; 0.0024 - 0.0039 in, 12 - 16 lb Bond (0.06 - 0.10 mm, 45 - 60 g/m2) Operating Environment 68°F (20°C), 50%RH *For Other Destinations Face Down, A4 / Letter; 0.0024 - 0.0039 in, 12 - 16 lb Bond (0.06 - 0.10 mm, 45 - 60 g/m2) Face Down, A4 / Letter; 0.0024 - 0.0039 in, 12 - 16 lb Bond (0.06 - 0.10 mm, 45 - 60 g/m2)
Yes (Face Down) LP 6.5 ppm 6.2 ppm
Letter size paper A4 size paper
406 x 391 dpi 600 x 600 dpi 300 x 300 dpi Letter / A4 / Legal 8.2 in (208 mm)
5 Effective Printing Width 8.0 in (202 mm) 6 Recording Paper Capacity
Remarks
250 sheets
7 Collation Stack
Yes
8 Consumables
Letter size for USA and Canada A4 size for Other Destinations A4 / Letter / Legal (20 lb / 75 g/m2) Memory Collation The Tray capacity is up to 100 sheets See Options and Supplies Section
Memory / Clock 1 Standard Memory
4 MB (240 pages)
2 MB (120 pages)
2 Memory Backup 3 Document Memory type
Yes Flash ROM
4 Clock Backup
30 minutes
ITU-T Image No. 1 (A4, Std. Resolution)
By means of a Gold Capacitor
6 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
Items
Description UF-590/790 DX-600/800 (Reference)
Remarks
Copy Quality 1 Halftone (Tx) Super Fine (Tx & Rx) 2 dpi x lpi (pels / mm x lines / mm) Original Contrast Selection 3 (Tx) 4 Smoothing (Rx) Fax, Copy PC Printing Data Power Supply 1 Power Requirement 2 Power Consumption Standby Sleep Mode ES=On ES=Off Transmission Reception Copy Maximum Standby Sleep Mode ES=On ES=Off Transmission Reception Copy Maximum Environment 1 Temperature Operation Storage Transport (Max. 72 hours) 2 Relative Humidity Operation Storage Transport (Max. 480 hours)
64-Level Error Diffusion * Halftone (S-Fine) only with the Resolution key
Yes* 406 x 391* (16 x 15.4)
* Interpolated 16 pels/mm
Yes
3-Levels With Auto Picture / Text Recognition
Yes No 108 - 132 VAC, 47 - 63 Hz, Single Phase 198 - 255 VAC, 47 - 63 Hz, Single Phase
No 8 Wh 23 Wh 19 W 470 W 470 W 470 W
1.2 Wh 6 Wh 21 Wh 17 W 460 W 470 W 470 W
No 8 Wh 25 Wh 19 W 480 W 480 W 490 W
2.4 Wh 6.5 Wh 22 Wh 17 W 480 W 480 W 490 W
100 VAC Power Supply 200 VAC Power Supply
100 VAC Power Supply (ES = Energy Saver)
200 VAC Power Supply (ES = Energy Saver)
50 to 95°F ( 10 to 35°C) -4 to 104°F (-20 to 40°C) -4 to 122°F (-20 to 50°C) 15 to 70% RH 5 to 85% RH 15 to 85% RH
7 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
Items
Description UF-590/790 DX-600/800 (Reference)
Remarks
Standards 1 PSTN 2 Safety 3 EMI
FCC Part 68 Industry Canada No. CS-03 UL1950 (UL60950 3rd edition) CSA C22.2 No.950 Class A Class B computing device computing device in FCC Part 15 in FCC Part 15
Construction 1 Dimensions (W x D x H)
2 Weight (Excluding paper) Attachment & Accessories Toner Cartridge Operating Instructions CD-ROM Power Cord Tel Line Cable Doc. Tray (Rx) Consumables 1 Process Type Yield (3% Black, ITU-T 2 Image No. 1 Chart) 3 Low Toner Warning Options Cassette & Deck 1 250 sheets 2 Document Memory 3 Page Memory 4 Battery Backup 72 hours G3 Optional 5 Communication Port
14.6 x 18.0 x 9.8 in (370 x 457 x 250 mm) 14.6 x 18.7 x 9.8 in (370 x 474 x 250 mm) 20 lb (9.0 kg) Yes (1) Yes (1) Yes (1) (PDMS) Yes (1) Yes (1) Yes (1)
Excluding projections LTR Excluding projections A4 Excluding consumable supplies and options UG-5510 for DX-800 / UF-790
Toner Cartridge Approx. 7,500 pages Yes
Yes Yes 2 / 4 / 8 MB No No
Multi Copy Mode Operation Environment 68°F (20°C), 50% RH, using Letter/A4 paper. Magnetic Sensor A4 / Letter / Legal (20 lb / 75 g/m2) Flash Memory D-RAM
No
6 Handset
Yes
7 V.24/Encryption Interface 8 PDL
No No
Specific Destinations only. New Option for DX-600 / 800 / UF-590 / 790.
8 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
Items Parallel Port Interface LAN (Network) Printer Interface (GDI) Scanner Interface (TWAIN) Class 2 Fax Modem 9 Interface PC Fax Interface (MGCS) PC Fax Interface (LaserFAX) Document Manager MFP Utilities Languages Control Panel Function Label LCD Display Printouts Operating Instructions Multi-Task Operation 1 Multi Task Operation 2 Direct XMT Reserve 3 Memory XMT Reserve Number of Memory Job 4 Files Dialing/Telephone Features 1 One-Touch Keys 2 One-Touch / Program Keys 3 One-Touch Auto Dialers 4 Abbr. Auto Dialers 5 Total Auto Dialers 6 Max. Tel Number Digits Max. Station Name 7 Characters 8 Directory Search Dialing Full Number Dialing 9 (Buffered Dialing)
Description UF-590/790 DX-600/800 (Reference) No Standard Standard*
No
Standard No
Standard Standard
No
Standard
No
Standard
No*
No*
Standard Standard
Standard Standard English English English English English
Remarks
*Ethernet 10Base-T / 100Base-Tx
*HydraFax / LaserFAX Not Supported
English, C-French, Spanish can be selected for USA, Canada. Determined by the Destination.
Yes Yes Yes 70 files
10 files
28 4 32 100 132 36 15 Yes
With Directory Search key
Yes
Max. 12 stations
Direct Dialing (Monitor Dialing)
Yes
Voice mode (Monitor Dialing Mode) Requires to press START to start fax communication. Automatic Redialing is not available.
11 Automatic Redialing 12 Manual Redialing
Yes Yes
13 Chain Dialing (Hybrid Dial)
Yes
14 Line Monitor Speaker
Yes
10
On Monitor Dialing mode only
9 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
Items 15 Pulse / Tone Dialing 16 Pulse to Tone Change 17 Flash Key
Description UF-590/790 DX-600/800 (Reference) Yes Yes Yes
18 External Telephone Jack Transmission Features 1 Direct Transmission 2 Memory Transmission Quick Memory 3 Transmission Multi-Station Transmission 4 (Sequential Broadcasting) Direct Deferred 5 Transmission Deferred Memory 6 Transmission Deferred Multi-Station 7 Transmission Priority Direct 8 Transmission Priority Memory 9 Transmission 10 Batch Transmission Reception Features 1 Substitute Reception
Yes Yes Yes
No
Yes (Max.144)
Yes (Max.112)
ADF Transmission Page Retransmission Dialing after 1st page stored
Yes
ADF Deferred Transmission
Yes
Max. 10 timers
Yes (Max.144)
Max. 10 timers
Yes
Priority ADF Transmission
No No Yes Yes
3 Auto Reduction
Yes
4 Overlap Printing
Yes
LTR / A4: 70 - 100%, LGL: 80 -100% (in 1% Steps), Top & Center Alignment LTR / A4: 70 - 100%, LGL: 80 -100% (in 1% Steps), Top & Center Alignment Page End Approx. 0.39 in (10 mm)
Yes
5 Receive to Memory Distinctive Ring Detector 6 (DRD) Receive Control 1 Fax / Tel Auto Switch
3 External TAM Interface 4 Remote Reception
10 pps / DTMF
Handset or External Telephone
1
2 Fixed Reduction
2 Silent Reception
Remarks
Yes
Specific Destinations only
Yes
Specific Destinations only
No (PSTN) Yes (LAN)
No (PSTN)
Yes Yes (DTMF)
Specific Destinations only Specific Destinations only
10 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
Items Polling 1 Polling 2 Turnaround Polling 3 Multi-Station Polling 4 Deferred Polling Deferred Multi-Station 5 Polling 6 Direct Polling Tx 7 Memory Polling Tx 8 Preset Polling Password Temporary Polling 9 Password 10 Continuous Polling Convenience 1 Panel Display 2 Voice Contact 3 Edit File Mode 4 Incomplete File Save 5 Automatic Cover Sheet Copy Features 1 Single Copy 2 Multiple Copy 3 Reduction Copy Copying Resolution 4 dpi x lpi (pels / mm x lines / mm) Certainty 1 Verification Stamp 2 Header / Total Page Print
Description UF-590/790 DX-600/800 (Reference)
Remarks
Yes No Yes (Max.144) Yes
Max. 10 timers
Yes (Max.144)
Max. 10 timers
No Yes Yes
1 File
Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 406 x 391* (16 x 15.4)
20 x 2 Alphanumeric LCD With View Mode With View Mode
Multi Sort Copy only
* Interpolated 16 pels/mm
Yes Yes
3 Transaction Journal
Yes
4 Comm. Journal 5 Last Ind. XMT Journal 6 Power Failure Report List Printouts 1 One-Touch List 2 ABBR. No. List 3 Program List 4 Directory Search List 5 Fax Parameter List 6 File List 7 Ind. XMT Journal 8 Directory Sheet 9 Character Code List
Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No
32 Transactions / with View Mode With Image
With View Mode
11 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
Items
Description UF-590/790 DX-600/800 (Reference)
Identifications 1 Logo 2 Multiple Logo 3 Character ID 4 Numeric ID Special Communications 1 Password XMT / RCV 2 Selective Reception 3 Relay XMT Request 4 Relay XMT Center 5 Confidential XMT / Polling 6 Confidential Center 7 Mailbox XMT / Polling 8 Mailbox Center 9 File XMT 10 Fax Forward
Yes No Yes Yes
Yes
12 Sub-Address XMT 13 Sub-Address RCV 14 OMR-XMT Others 1 Access Code
Yes No No
16 Characters 20 Digits Closed Network TSI Check Network (Via a Center Station)
Received File Transfer NYSE Feature Specific Destinations only T. Routing T. Routing with PC interface
Yes
2 PIN Code Access
Yes
3 Intelligent Redial (AI) 4 Department Code 5 Energy Saver Mode
Yes No Yes
6 Daylight Saving Time
Yes
7 Self Diagnostic Function Remote Diagnostic 8 Function 9 Check & Call Function Firmware Update / Download 1 Remote Update 2 Local Update Memory Card (FROM) Parallel Port 3 Download to FROM Card
25 Characters
Yes Yes No No No No Yes 10 Boxes No Yes
11 Auto Fax Archive
Remarks
For USA, Canada and Hong Kong only PBX Access Code 2 Files
USA, Canada and Germany only
Yes Specific Destinations only
Yes Yes Yes
Using G3 Protocol
Yes No
Yes Yes
12 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
1.2.
Internet Fax Function Items
Main Specifications 1 Communication Protocols 2 Coding Scheme 3 Line Interface Scanner Mechanism 1 Max. Document Size Scanning Resolution 2 (pel/mm x lines/mm)
Description DX-600/800 TCP / IP MH / MMR RJ-45 (Ethernet) A4, Letter, Legal 8 x 3.85 8 x 7.7 8 x 15.4 16 x 15.4*
Remarks
SMTP / MIME Ethernet LAN
LAN:16 x 15.4 Scanning Resolution is available with Parameter setting. * Interpolated 16 pels/mm.
Transmission Features 1 Multi-Task Operation
Yes
2 Memory Transmission Sequential Multi-Station 3 Transmission Simultaneous Multi-Station 4 Transmission 5 Sender Selection G3 / Email Mixed 6 Broadcasting 7 Deferred Transmission
Yes
Yes
8 Fax Forward
Yes
9 Sub-address RCV
Yes
10 Mail Header Email Header Print Selection Subject Line LAN Features
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Random Entry
1 Internet Fax Communication
Yes
2 Internet Mail Reception 3 Internet Fax Server Features Internet Fax Relay XMT Email Relay MXT Received Fax / Email Forward PC to FAX Transmission
Yes
Inbound Routing Phone Book Registration from PC 4 I-Fax Parameters Registration via Email 5 Internet Delivery Confirmation
Simultaneous operation of G3 Fax and LAN is available.
Received File Transfer, only with I-FAX Option Inbound Routing, only with I-FAX Option All or From / To / Subject only
A3 Communication is available with Parameter setting.
Yes Yes
iFAX → iFAX → G3FAX PC → iFAX → G3FAX
Yes
Local print available
No Yes
Using Sub-Address. Local print available
Yes
Via Email
Yes Yes
With MDN
13 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
Items 6 Network Scanning 7 Network Printing LPR / LPD GDI PDL 8 Secondary DNS 9 DHCP Client
Description DX-600/800 Yes (400 dpi*) Yes (600 dpi) Yes No Yes Yes
Remarks * Interpolated Win 98 / Me
Yes
Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (Directory Services)
1 Comm. Journal (w / Image)
Yes
Email from RCV side to Panasonic I-Fax’s only.
1 Email Address
Yes
10 LDAP Certainty
ID
14 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
1.3.
Printer Function
Items Interface Centronics Parallel I/F 1 (IEEE-1284) 2 LAN (Network) 3 USB Port 4 IEEE-1394 Printer Function 1 Printing Size 2 Bypass 3 Stapling 4 Printing Resolution 5 OS 6 GDI 7 PDL (PCL6) 8 PDL (PostScript 2) 9 Duplex Printing 10 Collation Stack
Description UF-590/790 DX-600/800 (Reference) No
Standard*
Standard*
No
Remarks
*ECP Mode *Ethernet 10Base-T / 100Base-Tx
No No Letter / A4 / Legal No No 600 dpi Win 9x / Me / Win 9x / Me / NT 4.0 / 2000/ XP NT 4.0 / 2000 Yes No No No Yes
11 Status Monitor
No
Yes
12 Network Printing 13 Network Status Monitor 14 Smoothing 15 Applicable PC 16 Multi-Task Operation Printing while Fax-XMT from Memory Printing while Fax-RCV into Memory Fax-XMT from Memory while Printing Fax-RCV into Memory while Printing Output to Separate Tray for 17 Printing, Fax, Copy 18 Font 19 Security Print
Yes
No
Yes* No IBM PC, AT or Compatible
MH Coding
Printer Driver setting Win 9x / Me / NT 4.0 / 2000 : Local Connection *From June Production
Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No
15 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
Items
Description UF-590/790 DX-600/800 (Reference)
Remarks
Yes
64 Level Error Diffusion Letter size for USA and Canada A4 size for Other Destinations * Interpolated *Via Email
Scanning Function 1 Halftone
8.3 in (212 mm)
2 Scanning Width 3 4 5 6
Scanning Resolution Network Scanning Driver 2-Sided Scanning
8.2 in (208 mm) 400 dpi* Yes* -
No TWAIN No
16 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
1.4.
External View
(For USA only) Product complies with DHHS Rules 21 CFR Subchapter J in effect at date of manufacture.
Manufacturer's name and address Factory ID
3 inch (75 mm)
14.6 inch (370 mm)
16.9 inch (430 mm) 9.8 inch (250 mm)
7 inch (177 mm)
LTR : 4.8 inch (121 mm) A4 : 5.4 inch (138 mm) LTR : 28.5 inch (725 mm)
13.2 inch (336 mm)
3.6 inch (91 mm)
A4 : 29.2 inch (742 mm)
17 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
1.4.1.
Serial Number Contents
The contents of the 11-digit Serial Number is as follows: 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Sequential Production Number 5-Digit Sequential Production Number 00001 ~ 99999 = 1 ~ 99,999 units A0001 ~ Y9999 = 100,000 ~ 329,976 units (Letters “I” and “O” are skipped)
Model Number and Destination Code (Main Unit) 3-Digit number or alphanumeric representation (Except Letters “I” and “O”) For Example: 2MT = DX-600-EB 2MS = DX-800-AU
Production Facility
Production Year Starting with Year 2001, the last 2-digits of the year is represented as: A ~ T A B C D E F G H I J
: : : : : : : : : :
01 (2001) 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 (2010)
K L M N O P Q R S T
: : : : : : : : : :
11 (2011) 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 (2020)
G H I J K L
: : : : : :
July August September October November December
Production Month A B C D E F
: : : : : :
January February March April May June
18 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
1.5.
Control Panel
For USA and Canada
DX-800
TEL NO. 01
Q
02
12
22
W
A
SHIFT
03
13
23
E
S
04
14
R
D
05
15
T
F
06
16
07
Y
G
17
U
H
08
18
I
J
09
19
O
K
10
20
P
L
SYMBOL
11
@
21
Z
24
X
25
C
26
V
27
B
28
N
P1
M
P2
.
P3
-
P4
W
03
E
04
R
05
T
06
Y
07
U
08
I
09
O
10
P
11
SPACE
For Other Destinations
DX-600
01
Q
02
12
22
A
23
13
S
Z
24
14
D
X
25
15
F
C
26
16
G
V
17
27
H
28
B
18
J
N
P1
19
K
M
P2
20
L
.
P3
@
21
-
P4
6
19 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
Edition 1.0
Feed Roller (302) 2.2.9
Scanning Glass (308) 2.2.4
ADF Roller (331) 2.2.8
Scanner Block (321) 2.2.8
A4 LED Array (329) 2.2.9
Stamp Solenoid (327) 2.2.5
(1001) 2.2.10
SC PC Board
(1036) 2.2.10
SNS4 PC Board (1007) 2.2.10
SNS3 PC Board (1009) 2.2.18
Laser Unit (512) 2.2.18 Eject Roller (303) 2.2.6
Transmit Guide (301) Assy 2.2.4
ILS PC Board (1006) 2.2.10
Transmit Motor (324) 2.2.7
Toner Sensor (513) 2.2.18
SNS1 PC Board (1008) 2.2.16
LANC NCU PC PCBoard Board (1037) (402) 2.2.13 2.14
Printer Motor (626) 2.2.12
Fuser Lamp (732) 2.2.15 Exit Roller (719) 2.2.15 Fuser Roller (709) 2.2.15
Rear Chassis (505) Assy 2.2.16 Transfer Guide (601) 2.2.17 Feed Roller (526) 2.2.17
Pressure Roller (706) 2.2.15
Fuser Unit (701) 2.2.14
PNL1 PC Board (1005) 2.2.3
NCU MJR PC Board (1003) (402) 2.2.13 2.14
Bias Transfer Roller (604) 2.2.19
Rear Cover (105) 2.2.12
Open Control Panel Unit
Control Panel Chassis (201) 2.2.3
Rear Cover Open Open Printer Printer Control Cover Cover Panel (XXX) (106) Unit 2.2.12 X.X
SNS2 PC Board (1010) 2.2.20
Front Cover (104) 2.2.2
Recording Paper Tray Assy (1107) 2.2.1
Thermistor Assy (728) 2.2.14
Power Supply Unit (1002) 2.2.13
Printer Grease Points 2.2.21
Paper Feed Roller (518) 2.2.11
Clutch Gear Assy 2.2.11
(531) 2.2.11
Paper Feed Solenoid
Right Cover (102) 2.2.2
2.1.
LANB PC Board
Left Cover (103) 2.2.2
Paper Cassette 2.2.1
DX-600/800
2 Disassembly Instructions General Disassembly Flowchart
20
APR 2002
DX-600/800
2.2.
Disassembly Instructions Power Cord (1108), Telephone Line Cable (1109), LAN Cable, Recording Paper Tray Assembly (1107), Paper Cassette
2.2.1.
(1) Disconnect the Power Cord (1108). (2) Disconnect the Telephone Line Cable (1109). (3) Disconnect the LAN Cable. (1)
(2)
(3)
(4) Remove the Recording Paper Tray Assembly (1107). (4)
(5) Remove the Paper Cassette.
(5)
21 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
2.2.2.
Left Cover (103), Right Cover (102), Front Cover (104), Speaker (117), Separation Rubber (207) (1) Open the Printer Cover (106). (2) Open the Control Panel Unit. (3) Remove 3 Silver Screws (B1).
(1) (2)
(3)
(4) Remove the Left Cover (103). (5) Disconnect Connector CN9 on the SC PC Board (1001).
(5)
(4)
(6) Remove 2 Screws (C2) and 1 Screw (1Y). (7) Remove the Speaker (117).
(6)
(7)
(8) Remove 2 Silver Screws (B1). (9) Remove the SNT Cover (131).
(8) (9)
22 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
(11)
(10) Remove 2 Silver Screws (B1). (11) Remove the Right Cover (102).
(10)
(12) Release 3 Latch Hooks. (13) Remove the Front Cover (104).
(12)
(13)
(1) Open the Control Panel Unit. (2) Open the Printer Cover (106). (3) Remove the Separation Rubber Holder Assy (202). (4) Clean the Separation Rubber (207) with a soft cloth, saturated with isopropyl alcohol or replace with a new one.
(4)
23 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
2.2.3.
Control Panel Unit, PNL1 PC Board (1004) (1) Open the Printer Cover (106) (2) Slightly open the Control Panel Unit.
(1) (2)
(5)
(3) Remove the Left Cover (103) and the Right Cover (102). (Refer to 2.2.2.) (4) Disconnect Connector CN14 on the SC PC Board. (5) Release the Stopper Latch (210) and open the Control Panel Unit. (6) Remove the Control Panel Unit.
(6)
(4)
(7)
(8)
(12)
(9)
(7) Remove 2 Screws (19). (8) Remove the Control Panel Chassis (201) Assembly. Note: If noise occurs while scanning, clean the Roller Shaft 2 (235) and the Feed Pinch Roller (236) shaft hole with isopropyl alcohol.
(9) Remove 15 Screws (7B). (10) Disconnect Connector CN50 on the PNL1 PC Board. (11) Release 1 Latch Hook. (12) Remove the PNL1 PC Board (1004).
(10) (11)
24 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
2.2.4.
Transmit Guide (301) Assembly, Scanning Glass (308) (1) Remove the Left Cover (103), Right Cover (102), and Front Cover (104) (Refer to 2.2.2.). (2) Remove the Control Panel Unit (Refer to 2.2.3.). (3) Release the Harnesses from the clamps. (4) Remove 4 Screws (19). (5) Disconnect 4 Connectors (CN1, 3, 5 and 7) on the SC PC Board. (6) Remove the Transmit Guide (301) Assembly.
(4)x4
(6)
(5) (3)
(7) Carefully release the Latch Hook using a Blade-tip Screwdriver. (8) Remove the Scanning Glass (308).
(8)
(7)
(1)
(1) Open the Control Panel Unit. (2) Clean the Scanning Glass (308) with a soft cloth, soaked with isopropyl alcohol.
(2)
(1)
(1) Open the Control Panel Unit. (2) Clean the Feed Roller (302), Eject Roller (303) and ADF Roller (331) with a soft cloth, soaked with isopropyl alcohol.
(2)
(2)
(2)
25 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
2.2.5.
Stamp Assembly, Stamp Solenoid (327) (1) Remove the Transmit Guide (301) Assembly (Refer to 2.2.4.). (2) Remove the Stamp Assembly (325, 326).
(2)
(3) Remove 1 Screw (19). (4) Remove the Stamp Solenoid (327).
(3) (4)
26 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
2.2.6.
Eject Roller (303) (1) Remove the Transmit Guide (301) Assembly (Refer to 2.2.4.). (2) Remove the Stamp Assembly (325, 326) (Refer to 2.2.5.). (3) Release 2 Latch Hooks. (4) Remove the Ground Plate (317).
(3)
(4)
(3)
(5) Release the Latch Hook by using a small Bladetip Screwdriver. (6) Remove 2 D25F Drive Gears (332). (7) Remove D17 Gear (313) and D50 Gear (314). (5)
(7)
(6)
(8) Remove 2 P6C Bushings (342). (9) Remove the Roller Wire Spring (343).
(8)
(9)
Roller Spring
Caution: Reinstall the Roller Wire Spring (343) as illustrated.
27 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
(10)
(10) Remove 2 P6A Bushings (316). (11) Remove the Eject Roller (303).
(11)
28 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
2.2.7.
Transmit Motor (324)
(3) (4)
(5)
(6)
(1) Remove the Transmit Guide (301) Assembly (Refer to 2.2.4.). (2) Remove the Stamp Assembly (325, 326) (Refer to 2.2.5.). (3) Disconnect the Connector (1020) from the Transmit Motor (324). (4) Remove the ADF Gear (305) and ADF Angular Shaft (338). Caution: When removing the ADF Gear, rotate the Transmit Motor Gear by hand until the Gear Latch Hook can be seen from the inside, under the Transmit Motor. Push down on the Latch Hook to release the ADF Gear. (5) Remove 2 Screws (19). (6) Remove the Transmit Motor (324). Caution: Reinstall the Transmit Motor (324) as illustrated.
Caution: Before reassembling, apply EM-50L Grease to the Gear Posts as illustrated.
29 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
2.2.8.
Scanner Block (321), Mirror 1 (334), Mirror 2 (335), Mirror 3 (336), ADF Roller (331) (1) Remove the Transmit Guide (301) Assembly (Refer to 2.2.4.). (2) Remove the Stamp Assembly (325, 326) (Refer to 2.2.5.). (3) Remove 1 Screw (19). (4) Remove the Harnesses from the hook. (5) Remove the Scanner Block (321).
(3)
(5) (4)
(6)
(6) Remove P10 and P6B Bushings (315, 318) by using Blade-tip Screwdriver. (7) Remove the ADF Roller (331).
(7)
Mirror 3
Clean the Mirror 1 (334), Mirror 2 (335) and Mirror 3 (336) with a soft cloth, soaked with isopropyl alcohol.
Mirror 2 Mirror 1
30 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
2.2.9.
LED Array (329), Feed Roller (302) (1) Remove the Scanner Block (321) (Refer to 2.2.8.). (2) Remove the Ground Plate (317). (3) Remove 4 Screws (19). (4) Release the Harness from the hook. (5) Remove the LED Bracket (306) Assembly.
(3) (2)
(4) (5)
(6)
(6) Remove 3 LED Clips (307). (7) Remove the LED Array (329). Caution: When reinstalling the LED Array, position the 3 LED Clips at the appropriate locations.
(7)
(9)
(8) Remove the Gears, Bushings and the Roller Wire Spring (Refer to 2.2.6.). (9) Remove 2 P6A Bushings (316). (10) Remove the Feed Roller (302).
(10)
31 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
2.2.10. LANB PC Board (1036), SC PC Board (1001), ILS PC Board (1006), SNS4 PC Board (1007) (1) Remove the Left Cover (Refer to 2.2.2.). (2) Remove 1 Screw (19). (3) Release 2 Locking Spacers (431) and remove the LANB PC Board (1036). (4) Disconnect the LANB-LANC Harness (1838) on the LANB PC Board (CN97).
(3) (4) (2)
(5) Remove 2 Locking Spacers (431). (6) Disconnect all Connectors on SC PC Board. (7) Remove 7 Screws (19). (8) Remove the LANB Bracket (430). (9) Remove the SC PC Board (1001). (6) (5) (7)x7 (8)
(10) Move all Harnesses away from the front of the Door Sensor. (11) Release the Latch Hook and remove the ILS PC Board (1006). (12) Disconnect Connector CN73 on the ILS PC Board (1006).
(11)
(12)
(13) Disconnect Connectors CN85 and 87 on the SNS4 PC Board. (14) Remove 1 Screw (19). (15) Lift up the Paper Exit Actuator (730) and remove the SNS4 PC Board (1007).
(14) (15)
(13)
32 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
2.2.11.
Paper Feed Solenoid (531), Clutch Gear Assembly, Paper Feed Roller (518) (1) Remove the Right Cover (102) (Refer to 2.2.2.). (2) Remove 1 Screw (19). (3) Remove the Paper Feed Solenoid (531). Note: If the Paper Feed Solenoid does not work properly due to dust, etc. Remove the spring to disassemble and clean the magnet and plate as illustrated. (2)
(3)
(4) Remove 1 Screw (19). (5) Remove the Feed Roller Ground Spring (628). (6) Remove the Snap Ring (B9). (7) Remove the Clutch Gear Assembly.
(7) (6) (5) (4)
(8) Place the machine on its Rear side. (9) Remove 2 Screws (19). (10) Remove the Feed Roller Assembly.
(9) (10)
Clean the Paper Feed Rollers (518) with a soft cloth, soaked with isopropyl alcohol.
33 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
(11)
(11) Remove 2 Screws (4N). (12) Remove the Paper Feed Rollers (518).
(12)
34 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
2.2.12. Printer Cover (106), Rear Cover (105), Printer Motor (626) (1) Remove the Left Cover and the Right Cover (Refer to 2.2.2.). (2) Release the hooks and remove the Printer Cover (106).
(2)
(3) Remove 2 Silver Screws (B1). (4) Remove the Rear Cover (105).
(3)
(4)
(8)x5
(5)
(6) (7)
(9)
(5) Remove 1 Screw (19). (6) Remove the Ground Wire (542). (7) Disconnect the Connector from the Printer Motor. (8) Remove 5 Screws (19). (9) Remove the Printer Motor Bracket (616) Assembly. Caution: The Gears underneath may dislodge when the Motor Bracket is removed. (10) Remove 2 Screws (4N). (11) Remove the Printer Motor (626).
(10) (11)
35 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
2.2.13. LANC PC Board (1037), MJR PC Board (1003), Power Supply Unit (1002) (1) Remove 2 Screws (19). (2) Remove the LANC PC Board (1037) Assembly.
(2) (1)
(3) Disconnect the LANB-LANC Harness (1038). (3) (3)
(4) Remove 2 Screws (C8). (5) Remove the LANC PC Board (1037).
(4)
(5)
(7) (9) (10)
(8)
Caution: Make sure the Power Cord (1108) is unplugged. Note: If removing only the Power Supply Unit, skip steps (8), (9) and (10). (6) Remove the Rear Cover (105) (Refer to 2.2.12.). (7) Disconnect the Connectors (CN28 and 29) on the MJR PC Board. (8) Remove 2 Screws (19). (9) Release the Latch Hook of Locking Card Spacer (405). (10) Remove the MJR PC Board (1003).
36 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
(11) Remove 5 Screws (19). (12) Remove the L Power Plate (401).
(11)x5 (12) (13) (15) (16)
(14)x4
(13) Disconnect the Connectors (CN101, 102, 103, 201 and 202) on the Power Supply Unit (1002). (14) Remove 4 Screws (19). (15) Remove 1 Screw (19) and 1 Washer (G8). (16) Remove the Power Supply Unit (1002).
(13)
37 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
2.2.14. Fuser Unit, Thermistor Assembly (728) (1) Remove the Rear Cover (Refer to 2.2.12.). (2) Remove 1 Screw (19). (3) Remove the Fuser Top Cover (733). (4) Disconnect the Connectors CN85 and CN87 on the SNS4 PC Board (1007).
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5) Disconnect the Connector CN102 on the Power Supply Unit (423). (6) Remove 1 Screw (4N). (7) Remove the FG1 Harness (629).
(7)
(6) (5)
(8) Remove 4 Screws (19). (9) Remove the Fuser Unit.
(8)
(9)
(10) Remove 1 Screw (1Q). (11) Remove the Thermistor Assembly (728).
(10)
(11)
38 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
2.2.15. Fuser Lamp (732), Exit Roller (719), Fuser Roller (709), Pressure Roller (706) (1) Remove the Rear Cover (Refer to 2.2.12.) and the Fuser Unit (Refer to 2.2.14.). (2) Remove 1 Screw (4N). (3) Remove the PSU-Fuser Harness (1028) and Fuser Lamp Terminal B (731). (4) Remove the Fuser Lamp (732). Caution: When reinstalling the Fuser Lamp, make sure that the Fuser Lamp is inserted into the Fuser Unit as illustrated. Do not touch the glass portion of the Fuser Lamp with bare hands. Grease from fingerprints will shorten its life cycle, use isopropyl alcohol to clean fingerprints.
(2)
(3)
(4)
Caution: When reinstalling the Fuser Lamp, make sure that both ends of the Fuser Lamp fit into the projected area of the Fuser Lamp Terminal A (724) and the Fuser Lamp Terminal B (731).
(6)
Black (7)
(5) Remove the E22 Gear (722). Caution: You may need to use force to pull out the Gear. (6) Remove the Right and Left P3.5L11.2 Bushings (720 and 721). (7) Remove the Exit Roller (719).
White
(5)
(8) Remove 2 Screws (4N). (9) Remove the Fuser Cover (723).
(8)
(9)
39 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
(10) Remove 2 Pressure Springs (708).
(10)
(11) Remove the E14 Gear (714). Caution: You may need to use force to pull out the Gear. (14)
(12)
(12) Remove the 2 E18 Gears (713). (13) Remove 2 C-Rings (712). (14) Remove the E24 Drive Gear (711). (15) Remove 2 P17L6.8 Bushings (710).
(15) (11) (13)
(16) Remove the Fuser Roller (709). Caution: Do not scratch the surface of the Fuser Roller when removing or reinstalling it.
(16)
(17) (18)
(17) Remove 1 Screw (4N). (18) Remove the Lower Paper Exit Guide (703).
40 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
(19) Remove 2 P6L5.5 Bushings (707). (20) Remove the Pressure Roller (706). Caution: Do not scratch the surface of the Pressure Roller when removing or reinstalling it. (20)
(19)
41 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
2.2.16. Rear Chassis (505), SNS1 PC Board (1008) (1) Remove the Power Supply Unit (Refer to 2.2.12.). (2) Remove the SC PC Board (Refer to 2.2.12.). (3) Remove the Fuser Unit (Refer to 2.2.14.). (4) Remove 6 Screws (19). (5) Remove the Bracket (403). (6) Remove the Rear Chassis (505).
(4)
(6) (5)
(4)
(7) Disconnect Connectors CN80 and CN81 on the SNS1 PC Board (1008). (8) Remove 1 Screw (19). (9) Remove the SNS1 PC Board (1008). (7)
(8)
(9)
42 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
2.2.17. Transfer Guide (601) Assembly, Feed Roller (526) (1) Remove the Rear Chassis (Refer to 2.2.16.). (2) Remove 2 Screws (C8). (3) Disconnect Connector CN80 on the SNS1 PC Board (1008). (4) Remove the Transfer Guide (601) Assembly.
(2)
(3) (4)
(5) Remove the 2 Snap Rings. (B9). (6) Remove the Feed Roller (526).
(6)
(5)
(7) Remove the Roller Gear (529). (8) Remove 2 P6L5 Bushings (527, 528).
(8) (7) White Black
43 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
2.2.18. Toner Sensor (513), Laser Unit [LSU] (512), SNS3 PC Board (1009) (1) Remove the Transmit Guide Assembly (Refer to 2.2.4.). (2) Remove 2 Screws (19). (3) Remove Ground Wire (542). (4) Remove the CCD Shield Plate (533).
(2)
(4)
(3)
(5) Remove 1 Screw (19). (6) Disconnect Connector CN84 on the SNS3 PC Board (1009). (7) Remove the Toner Sensor Spring Plate (506) Assembly.
(5) (7)
(6)
Note: When reinstalling, make sure that the Toner Sensor Spring Plate is inserted into the 2 notches in the main frame as shown in the illustration. DX-600
(8) Remove the Toner Sensor (513). (9) Disconnect the Connector on the Toner Sensor.
DX-800
(8) DX-600
(9) (9) (8)
44 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
(11)x4
(12) (11)
(10) Disconnect 2 Connectors on the Laser Unit (512). (11) Remove 4 Screws (1Y). (12) Remove the Laser Unit (512).
(10)
(13) (14)
(13) Disconnect Connectors CN83 and CN84 on the SNS3 PC Board (1009). (14) Remove 1 Screw (19). (15) Lift up the No Paper Actuator (525) and Remove the SNS3 PC Board (1009).
(13)
(15) (14)
45 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
2.2.19. Bias Transfer Roller (604) (1) Remove the CCD Shield Plate (Refer to 2.2.18.). (2) Remove 2 Screws (19). (3) Remove the BTR Guide (602).
(2)
(3)
Black
White
(4)
(4) Release the Latch Hook on the Transfer Guide (601) Assembly as illustrated and remove the Bias Transfer Roller (604). Caution: • Do not touch the surface of the Bias Transfer Roller. Clean the Bias Transfer Roller only with a dry cloth. • When cleaning or replacing the Bias Transfer Roller, clean both sides of the Transfer Guide with isopropyl alcohol.
46 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
2.2.20. SNS2 PC Board (1010) (1) Place the machine on its rear side. (2) Remove 1 Screw (19). (3) Remove the Plate A (507). (3)
(2)
(4) Remove 1 Screw (19). (5) Disconnect Connector CN82 (538) on the SNS2 PC Board (1010). (6) Remove the SNS2 PC Board (1010).
(5)
(4) (6)
47 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
2.2.21. Printer Grease Points Before reassembling, apply EM-50L Grease as described below. (1) B83D22 Gear G (622) : Gear surface (2) D60D20 Gear B (621) : Rib surface (3) D55 Gear F (619) : Gear surface (4) D55 Gear F (619) : Gear Side surface
(3)
(2)
(4)
(1)
48 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
2.3.
Screw Identification Template Ref No.
Part No.
Figure
Remark
19
XTB3+8J
Screw
23
XYN3+F8
Screw
24
XYN4+F8
Screw
1Q
XYN3+F10
Screw
1Y
XTB3+10J
Screw
4N
XSN3+W8FC
Screw
7B
XTB26+6J
Screw
A9
DZPA000001
Screw
B1
DZPB000007
Silver Screw
B4
XTB3+8JK
Screw
B5
XSB4+10BN
Screw
B9
DZJM000171
Snap Ring
C2
DZPB000020
Screw
C8
XTW3+8SFC
Screw
49 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
3 Maintenance, Adjustments and Check Points 3.1.
Required Tools No. 1 2 3 4 5
3.2.
Tool Soft Cloth Isopropyl Alcohol Phillips Screwdriver (#2) Stubby Phillips Screwdriver (#2) Blade-tip Screwdriver (3/32 in)
No. 6 7 8 9 10
Tool Tweezer Pliers Cotton Swab Brush Molykote EM-50L Grease (Available from Dow Corning, URL: http://www.dowcorning.com)
Periodic Check Points
50 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
3.3.
Periodic Maintenance Check List
The chart outlined below is a general guideline for maintenance. The example list is for an average usage of 50 transmitted and received documents per day. Needless to say, the environmental conditions and actual use will vary these factors. The chart below is for reference only.
Mechanical Parts Printer Motor
Ref. No. 626
Toner Cartridge Paper Feed Roller
518
Feed Roller
526 904 Receiver Bias Transfer Roller 604 Unit Fuser Unit
701
Fuser Roller
709
Pressure Roller
706
Roller Shaft 2
235
Feed Pinch Roller * Shaft Hole ADF Roller
236 331
Separation Rubber 207 Feed Roller
302
Transmitter Eject Roller Unit
303
Scanning Glass
308
Mirrors
Transmit Motor
334 335 336 324
"x" Stamp Head
325
Cleaning Replacement/Adjustment Cycle Procedure Cycle Procedure 100,000 documents Refer to Ch 2.2.12. approx 7,500 pages (See Note) 12 months or 10,000 Refer to 30,000 documents Refer to documents Ch 2.2.11. Ch 2.2.11. 12 months or 10,000 Refer to Refer to documents Ch 2.2.17. Ch 2.2.17. 12 months or 10,000 Refer to 30,000 documents Refer to documents Ch 2.2.19. Ch 2.2.19. When replacing Print Cleaning 50,000 documents Refer to Cartridge chart Ch 2.2.14. When the Recording Refer to (Included as part of Refer to Paper wraps itself Ch 2.2.15. the Fuser Unit) Ch 2.2.15. around the roller. When the Recording Refer to (Included as part of Refer to Paper wraps itself Ch 2.2.15. the Fuser Unit) Ch 2.2.15. around the roller. 30,000 documents Refer to Ch 2.2.3. 30,000 documents Refer to Ch 2.2.3. 12 months or 10,000 Refer to 30,000 documents Refer to documents Ch 2.2.4. Ch 2.2.8. 12 months or 10,000 Refer to 30,000 documents Refer to documents Ch 2.2.2. Ch 2.2.2. 12 months or 10,000 Refer to 30,000 documents Refer to documents Ch 2.2.4. Ch 2.2.9. 12 months or 10,000 Refer to 30,000 documents Refer to documents Ch 2.2.4. Ch 2.2.6. 12 months or 10,000 Refer to documents Ch 2.2.4. 12 months or 10,000 Refer to documents Ch 2.2.8. -
-
100,000 documents
-
-
5,000 documents
Refer to Ch 2.2.7. Refer to Ch 2.2.5.
Note The number of pages is based on the ITU-T Image No. 1 Test Chart using Multi-Copy mode. Operation environment 68°F (20°C), 50% RH, using A4 paper.
51 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
3.4.
Updating the Firmware
Unlike other machines with removable EPROM (Erasable Programmable ROM), this machine is equipped with a F-ROM (Flash ROM) as standard. The F-ROM offers the flexibility of quick and easy firmware updates. The firmware of the machine can be updated with the removable F-ROM Card. (Refer to Section 5.1.9) The following is the basic procedure to update the firmware of the machine. The details are described in the Firmware Update Tool Operating Instructions.
3.4.1.
Creating a Master Firmware Card A.Utilizing the Firmware Update Tool 1. Install the Firmware Update Tool. 2. Install a Flash Memory Card (2 MB x 2, 4 MB or higher) into the machine. 3. Follow the instructions included in the Firmware Update Tool Operating Instructions. B.Copy the Firmware from an Existing Machine 1. Unplug the Power Cord to turn the machine OFF. 2. Install a Flash Memory Card (2 MB x 2, 4 MB or higher) into the machine with the Panasonic Logo facing outwards. 3. Plug in the Power Cord to turn the machine ON. 4. Perform the Service Mode 9-2 (Firmware Backup). 5. The firmware is copied into the Flash Memory Card. 6. After the backup is completed, press "STOP" to return to standby. 7. Unplug the Power Cord to turn the machine OFF. 8. Remove the Master Firmware Card that you just created from the machine. 9. Plug in the Power Cord to turn the machine ON. 10. Use this Master Firmware Card to update the firmware on other machines.
3.4.2
Updating the Firmware using the Master Firmware Card 1. Before starting, print the Fax and Function Parameter Lists. 2. Unplug the Power Cord to turn the machine OFF. 3. Install the appropriate Master Firmware Card into the machine with the Panasonic Logo facing outwards. 4. Plug in the Power Cord to turn the machine ON. 5. Perform the Service Mode 9-1-1 (Firmware Update). 6. The firmware is copied into the machine. 7. After the update is completed, the machine reboots itself and returns to standby. 8. Perform the Service Mode 6 (Parameter Initialization). 9. Unplug the Power Cord to turn the machine OFF. 10. Remove the Master Firmware Card from the machine. 11. Plug in the Power Cord to turn the machine ON. 12. Reprogram the Fax and/or Function Parameters according to the lists printed in Step 1 above if the settings are other than factory default.
52 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
3.4.3.
Erasing the Master Firmware Card 1. Unplug the Power Cord to turn the machine OFF. 2. Install the Master Firmware Card into the machine with the Panasonic Logo facing outwards. 3. Plug in the Power Cord to turn the machine ON. 4. Perform the Service Mode 9-5 (Erace Flash Card). 5. The firmware is erased from the card and return to Service Mode default display. 6. Press "STOP" twice to return to standby. 7. Unplug the Power Cord to turn the machine OFF. 8. Remove the blank Flash Memory Card from the machine. 9. Plug in the Power Cord to turn the machine ON.
3.4.4.
Firmware Version
HOST
: DX-800 A A V1.xxxx AU
Destination Code (Fax) AU : USA / Canada Firmware Version (V1.xxxx) Language Code A : US English, C-French & Spanish B : US English, Spanish & Portuguese b : English, French & Spanish g : German, French & Italian Firmware Type A : Standard B : Optional Model Number
53 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
HOST
: DX-600 A A V1.xxxx AB
Destination Code (Fax) AB : UK Firmware Version (V1.xxxx) Language Code A : US English, C-French & Spanish B : US English, Spanish & Portuguese b : English, French & Spanish g : German, French & Italian Firmware Type A : Standard B : Optional Model Number
3.4.5.
Updating the DX-800 Firmware (2)
(1) Unplug the Power Cord. (2) Open the Printer Cover. (3) Remove the Memory Card Cover.
Printer Cover
Memory Card Cover (3)
(4) Insert the Flash Memory Card gently into the card slot with the Panasonic logo facing to the outside of the machine. Caution: Installing the Flash Memory Card in the wrong direction may damage the connecting pins inside the machine.
Memory Card (4)
54 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
Control Panel Unit (5)
(6)
(5) Open the Control Panel Unit. (6) Activate the Read Point Sensor with your finger and plug in the Power Cord. (7) Wait approximately 10 seconds, release the Read Point Sensor, close the Control Panel Unit (ADF) and the Printer Cover. (8) Allow the unit to complete the Firmware Update (approx. 1-minute). When completed, the unit will reboot and progress to the Standby Mode. (9) Unplug the Power Cord. (10) Remove the Flash Memory Card. (11) Re-install the Memory Card Cover. (12) Plug in the Power Cord. (13) Perform Parameter Initialization.
55 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
3.5.
Glossary of Electrical Abbreviations
Signal Name +24V +24VD +24VM +3.3V +5V +5VP -5V A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 ACTIVITY AGND Black (L) Charge D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Glossary of Electrical Abbreviations Description +24 VDC Power Supply +24 VDC Power Supply +24 VDC Power Supply (Motors) +3.3 VDC Power Supply +5 VDC Power Supply +5 VDC Pilot Power Supply (Sleep Mode) -5 VDC Power Supply Address Signal Address Signal Address Signal Address Signal Address Signal Address Signal Address Signal Address Signal Address Signal Address Signal Address Signal Address Signal Address Signal Address Signal Address Signal Address Signal Address Signal Address Signal Address Signal Address Signal Address Signal Address Signal LANB PCB / LANC PCB Activity Signal Ground AC Power Supply Charge Current: 200 µA (AC 300 Hz Sine Wave) & DC Charge Voltage Data Signal Data Signal Data Signal Data Signal Data Signal Data Signal Data Signal Data Signal Data Signal Data Signal 56
Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
Signal Name D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 DB0 DB1 DB2 DB3 DB4 DB5 DB6 DB7 Development DOS E FCK1 FCK2 FG FR FSG GLED GND HLIN1 HLIN2 ID0 ID1 ID2 L+5V L1 (R) L2 (T) LDRE LDSC1 LDSP1 LINK MGND MIC (-) MIC (+) MMnA MMnB MMpA MMpB MTnA MTnB
Glossary of Electrical Abbreviations Description Data Signal Data Signal Data Signal Data Signal Data Signal Data Signal Data Signal Data Signal Data Signal Data Signal Data Signal Data Signal Data Signal Data Signal Development Voltage (AC 1.65 kHz Square Wave) & DC Voltage Output Signal Data Read/Write Enable Signal Shift Register Clock Shift Register Clock Ground Reset Signal Data Transfer Enable Signal GND for LED Ground Line Signal for the Fax Handset Line Signal for the Fax Handset Flash Memory Card ID Flash Memory Card ID Flash Memory Card ID Laser Circuit +5 VDC Power Supply Line Signal Line Signal Timing Sensor and No Cassette Sensor LED Drive Current No Cassette Sensor LED Drive Current No Paper Sensor LED Drive Current LANB PCB/ LANC PCB Link Signal Ground Handset Microphone Handset Microphone Motor Drive Signal Motor Drive Signal Motor Drive Signal Motor Drive Signal Stepping Signal Stepping Signal
57 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
Signal Name MTpA MTpB nADF1 nADF2 nBPNT nCCHK1 nCCHK2 nCD nCE1 nCE2 nCR1 nCRCK nDRCK nESEN nFAULT nFAULT nHSYNC nINIT nLDON nLEDON nMB4 nMPOFF nOE nOP nPCHK1 nPCHK2 nPMCK nPMON nPMRY nPWSAVE nRSEN nSSR nSTAMPON nS/H nTR0 nVIDEO nWEH nWEL OS pADF2 pBZCLK pPNLRD pPNLRST pPNLSD
Glossary of Electrical Abbreviations Description Stepping Signal Stepping Signal Paper Feed Roller Solenoid Control Signal Paper Feed Roller Solenoid Control Signal Read Point Detection Signal No Cassette Detection Signal No Cassette Detection Signal (2nd Cassette) Flash Memory Card Detection Signal +5 VDC Power Supply Low Enable Charge Control DC Output Charge Control DC Output Development +AC Clock Paper Exit Signal Data Available / Error Condition (Peripheral→Host) Fan Ready Signal Horizontal Synchronous Signal Reserve Request / Initialize (Host→Peripheral) Laser Control LED Enable Signal Flash Memory Size Energy Saver Mode Control Signal Read Signal - Low Enable 2nd Feeder Unit Detection Signal No Paper Sensor Detection Signal No Paper Detection Signal (2nd Cassette) Tetragon Motor Clock Tetragon Motor Control Signal Tetragon Motor Ready Signal Energy Saver Mode Transport Signal Timing Sensor Detection Signal Fuser Lamp Control Signal Stamp Control Signal Sample Hold Signal Transfer Control Cleaning Output Laser Control Write H Signal - Low Enable Write L Signal - Low Enable Output Signal Feed Roller Drive Clutch Control Signal (2nd Cassette) Buzzer Signal Reception Signal Panel Reset Signal Transmission Signal
58 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
Signal Name pCMLD pCTON pHKOF pSPKOT R/W RCV (-) RCV (+) RDY / nBSY RS RSV RXRX+ SNCMN TGND TH1 TH2 TONER Transfer TXTX+ 5V nWAKUP White (N)
Glossary of Electrical Abbreviations Description Line Switching Relay Drive Signal Ring Detection Signal External Phone Off-Hook Detection Signal Line Signal, Key Tone, Ringer Data Read/Write Select Signal Handset Receiver Handset Receiver Not Used Register Select Signal Not Used Reception Data "-" Signal Reception Data "+" Signal +2 VDC Power Supply Ground Thermistor Output Signal Thermistor Output Signal Remaining Toner Level Signal Transfer Current: (+3 µA) & Cleaning Voltage: (-1500 V) Transmission Data "-" Signal Transmission Data "+" Signal +5 VDC Power Supply Energy Saver Mode Enable AC Power Supply
59 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
3.6.
SC PC Board
CN1 SC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN1-1 +24V LED Array
CN1-2
nLEDON
LED Array
Signal Waveform
+24V
+24 VDC Power Supply
LED Enable Signal
Approx.+13V(H) LED On
Function
LED Off 0V(L)
CN3 SC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN3-1 +24V Stamp Solenoid
CN3-2
N.C.
CN3-3
nSTAMPON
Signal Waveform
+24V
Function +24 VDC Power Supply
Not Used
Stamp Solenoid
Stamp Off 0V
+24V
Stamp Control Signal
Stamp On
CN5 SC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN5-1 MTnB Transmit Motor
Signal Waveform
+24V
Function Stepping Signal
0V CN5-2
MTpB
Transmit Motor
+24V
Stepping Signal
0V CN5-3
MTnA
Transmit Motor
+24V
Stepping Signal
0V CN5-4
MTpA
Transmit Motor
+24V
Stepping Signal
0V
60 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
CN6 SC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN6-1 +24V POWER SUPPLY UNIT CN103-1 CN6-2
+24V
POWER SUPPLY UNIT CN103-2
CN6-3
GND
POWER SUPPLY UNIT CN103-3
CN6-4
CN6-5
GND
GND
Signal Waveform
Function
+24V
+24 VDC Power Supply
+24V
+24 VDC Power Supply
Ground
0V
POWER SUPPLY UNIT CN103-4
Ground
0V
POWER SUPPLY UNIT CN103-5
CN6-6
+3.3V
POWER SUPPLY UNIT CN103-6
CN6-7
+5V
POWER SUPPLY UNIT CN103-7
CN6-8
-5V
POWER SUPPLY UNIT CN103-8
CN6-9
+5VP
POWER SUPPLY UNIT CN103-9
CN6-10
nMPOFF
POWER SUPPLY UNIT CN103-10
Ground
0V +3.3V
+5V
nSSR
+5 VDC Power Supply
-5 VDC Power Supply
-5V
+5V
+6
(Energy Saver Mode) CN6-11
+3.3 VDC Power Supply
POWER SUPPLY UNIT CN103-11
7V
+5 VDC Pilot Power Supply, that provides power to the active components during the Sleep Mode. Energy Saver Mode Control Signal
0V Fuser Lamp Control Signal
Fuser Lamp ON
61 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
CN7 SC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN7-1 FR CCD PCB CN30-1
Signal Waveform
Function
+5V(H)
Reset Signal
0V(L) 1 s CN7-2
FCK1
CCD PCB CN30-2
Shift Register Clock
1 s1 s
+5V(H) 0V(H)
CN7-3
FCK2
CCD PCB CN30-3
Shift Register Clock
1 s1 s +5V(H) 0V(H)
CN7-4
FSG
CCD PCB CN30-4
+5V(H)
Data Transfer Enable Signal
0V(L) 1 s CN7-5
AGND
2.4ms
CCD PCB CN30-5
Ground
0V CN7-6
+5V
CCD PCB CN30-6
CN7-7
DOS
CCD PCB CN30-7
CN7-8
OS
CCD PCB CN30-8
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
Output Signal
+3.0V
4.5V
Output Signal
2.4ms
3.5V 4.5V
Max.1.0V
CN9 SC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN9-1 pSPKOT SPEAKER
CN9-2
GND
Signal Waveform
Function
+2V (Max) -2V (Min)
SPEAKER
Line Signal, Key Tone, Ringer
Ground
0V
62 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
CN12 SC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN12-1 GND Flash Memory Card
Signal Waveform
Function Ground
0V CN12-2
D3
Flash Memory Card
Data Signal
+5V(H) 0V(L)
CN12-3
D4
Flash Memory Card
Data Signal
+5V(H) 0V(L)
CN12-4
D5
Flash Memory Card
Data Signal
+5V(H) 0V(L)
CN12-5
D6
Flash Memory Card
Data Signal
+5V(H) 0V(L)
CN12-6
D7
Flash Memory Card
Data Signal
+5V(H) 0V(L)
CN12-7
nCE1
Flash Memory Card
CN12-8
A11
Flash Memory Card
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
Address Signal
+5V(H) 0V(L)
CN12-9
nOE
Flash Memory Card
Read Signal - Low Enable
+5V(H) 0V(L)
CN12-10
A12
Flash Memory Card
+5V(H)
Address Signal
0V(L) CN12-11
A10
Flash Memory Card
+5V(H)
Address Signal
0V(L)
63 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
SC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN12-12 A9 Flash Memory Card
Signal Waveform
Function Address Signal
+5V(H) 0V(L)
CN12-13
A14
Flash Memory Card
Address Signal
+5V(H) 0V(L)
CN12-14
A15
Flash Memory Card
Address Signal
+5V(H) 0V(L)
CN12-15
nWEL
Flash Memory Card
Write L Signal - Low Enable
+5V(H) 0V(L)
CN12-16
RDY / nBSY Flash Memory Card
CN12-17
+5V
Flash Memory Card
CN12-18
N.C.
Flash Memory Card
CN12-19
A17
Flash Memory Card
Not Used
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
Not Used
+5V(H)
Address Signal
0V(L) CN12-20
A16
Flash Memory Card
+5V(H)
Address Signal
0V(L) CN12-21
A13
Flash Memory Card
+5V(H)
Address Signal
0V(L) CN12-22
A8
Flash Memory Card
+5V(H)
Address Signal
0V(L)
64 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
SC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN12-23 A7 Flash Memory Card
Signal Waveform
Function Address Signal
+5V(H) 0V(L)
CN12-24
A6
Flash Memory Card
Address Signal
+5V(H) 0V(L)
CN12-25
A5
Flash Memory Card
Address Signal
+5V(H) 0V(L)
CN12-26
A4
Flash Memory Card
Address Signal
+5V(H) 0V(L)
CN12-27
A3
Flash Memory Card
Address Signal
+5V(H) 0V(L)
CN12-28
A2
Flash Memory Card
Address Signal
+5V(H) 0V(L)
CN12-29
A1
Flash Memory Card
Address Signal
+5V(H) 0V(L)
CN12-30
D0
Flash Memory Card
Data Signal
+5V(H) 0V(L)
CN12-31
D1
Flash Memory Card
Data Signal
+5V(H) 0V(L)
CN12-32
D2
Flash Memory Card
Data Signal
+5V(H) 0V(L)
CN12-33
nWEH
Flash Memory Card
Write H Signal - Low Enable
+5V(H) 0V(L)
65 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
SC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN12-34 GND Flash Memory Card
Signal Waveform
Function Ground
0V CN12-35
GND
Flash Memory Card
Ground
0V CN12-36
nCD
Flash Memory Card
CN12-37
D11
Flash Memory Card
5V(H) Flash Memory Card Detection Signal H: Card Not Installed 0V(L) L: Card Installed Data Signal
+5V(H) 0V(L)
CN12-38
D12
Flash Memory Card
Data Signal
+5V(H) 0V(L)
CN12-39
D13
Flash Memory Card
Data Signal
+5V(H) 0V(L)
CN12-40
D14
Flash Memory Card
Data Signal
+5V(H) 0V(L)
CN12-41
D15
Flash Memory Card
Data Signal
+5V(H) 0V(L)
CN12-42
nCE2
Flash Memory Card
Low Enable
+5V(H) 0V(L)
CN12-43
N.C.
CN12-44
RSV
Not Used
Flash Memory Card
Not Used
66 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
SC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN12-45 RSV Flash Memory Card
CN12-46
A18
Flash Memory Card
Signal Waveform
Function Not Used
Address Signal
+5V(H) 0V(L)
CN12-47
A19
Flash Memory Card
Address Signal
+5V(H) 0V(L)
CN12-48
A20
Flash Memory Card
Address Signal
+5V(H) 0V(L)
CN12-49
A21
Flash Memory Card
Address Signal
+5V(H) 0V(L)
CN12-50
A22
Flash Memory Card
Address Signal
+5V(H) 0V(L)
CN12-51
+5V
Flash Memory Card
CN12-52
N.C.
Flash Memory Card
Not Used
CN12-53
GND
Flash Memory Card
Ground
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
0V CN12-5456
N.C.
Flash Memory Card
Not Used
CN12-57
RSV
Flash Memory Card
Not Used
CN12-58
N.C.
Flash Memory Card
Not Used
67 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
SC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN12-59 nMB4 Flash Memory Card
Signal Waveform
or
Function
Flash Memory Size +5V(H) H: 8MB L: Others 0V(L)
CN12-60
RSV
Flash Memory Card
Not Used
CN12-61
N.C.
Flash Memory Card
Not Used
CN12-62
ID2
Flash Memory Card
+5V(H)
Flash Memory Card ID
or 0V(L)
CN12-63
ID1
Flash Memory Card
+5V(H)
Flash Memory Card ID
or 0V(L)
CN12-64
D8
Flash Memory Card
Data Signal
+5V(H) 0V(L)
CN12-65
D9
Flash Memory Card
Data Signal
+5V(H) 0V(L)
CN12-66
D10
Flash Memory Card
Data Signal
+5V(H) 0V(L)
CN12-67
ID0
Flash Memory Card
+5V(H)
Flash Memory Card ID
or 0V(L)
CN12-68
GND
Flash Memory Card
Ground
0V
68 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
CN14 SC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN14-1 GND PNL PCB CN50-1
Signal Waveform
Function Ground
0V CN14-2
+5V
PNL PCB CN50-2
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
CN14-3
+5VP
PNL PCB CN50-3
+5V
+5 VDC Pilot Power Supply, that provides power to the active components during the Sleep Mode.
CN14-4
GND
PNL PCB CN50-4
Ground
0V CN14-5
pPNLSD
PNL PCB CN50-5
+5V
Transmission Signal
0V CN14-6
pPNLRD
PNL PCB CN50-6
+5V
Reception Signal
0V CN14-7
nPWSAVE
PNL PCB CN50-7
Energy Saver Mode +5V Standby
CN14-8
nWAKUP
0V
PNL PCB CN50-8
+5V 0V
CN14-9
pPNLRST
PNL PCB CN50-9
+5V 0V
CN4-10
pBZCLK
Energy Saver Mode Transport Signal
PNL PCB CN50-10
+5V
Energy Saver Mode Enable H: Enable L: Disable Panel Reset Signal H: Reset L: Not Reset Buzzer Signal
0V CN4-11
nBPNT
PNL PCB CN50-11
+3.3V
Read Point Detection Signal L: Detect
ON
69 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
CN18 SC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN18-1 L2 (T) MJR PCB CN28-1
CN18-3
L1 (R)
Signal Waveform
Function Line Transformer Input Signal
MJR PCB CN28-3
Ground
0V CN18-6
+24V
MJR PCB CN29-1
+24V
+24 VDC Power Supply
CN18-7
+5VP
MJR PCB CN29-2
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
CN18-8
GND
MJR PCB CN29-3
Ground
0V CN18-9
pCMLD
MJR PCB CN29-4
Line Switching Relay Drive Signal H : CML On L : CML Off
+5V(H) 0V(L)
CN18-10
pCTON
MJR PCB CN29-5
CN18-11
pHKOF
MJR PCB CN29-6
Ring Detection Signal above +3V(H) Ring Detected H : Ring Detected L : Ring Not Detected 0V External Phone Off-Hook Detection Signal (Phone Line must be connected) H : Off Hook L : On Hook
+5V(H) 0V(L)
CN52 SC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN52-1 TH1 Thermistor Assembly
Signal Waveform
Function
5V
Thermistor Output Signal
0V CN52-2
TH2
Thermistor Assembly
5V
Thermistor Output Signal
0V
70 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
CN53 SC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN53-1 +24VM POWER SUPPLY UNIT CN103-12 CN53-2
nDRCK
POWER SUPPLY UNIT CN103-13
Signal Waveform
Function
+24V
+24 VDC Power Supply
Development +AC Clock
+24V 0V
CN53-3
nCRCK
POWER SUPPLY UNIT CN103-14
+24V
Charge Control DC Output
0V CN53-4
nCR1
POWER SUPPLY UNIT CN103-15
+24V
Charge Control DC Output
0V CN53-5
nTR0
POWER SUPPLY UNIT CN103-16
+24V
Transfer Control Cleaning Output
0V CN54 SC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN54-1 MMpA Main Motor CN118-1
Signal Waveform
Function
+24V
Motor Drive Signal
0V CN54-2
+24VM
Main Motor CN118-2
+24V
CN54-3
MMnA
Main Motor CN118-3
+24V
+24 VDC Power Supply
Motor Drive Signal
0V CN54-4
MMpB
Main Motor CN118-4
+24V
Motor Drive Signal
0V CN54-5
+24VM
Main Motor CN118-5
+24V
+24 VDC Power Supply
71 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
SC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN54-6 MMnB Main Motor CN118-6
Signal Waveform
Function
+24V
Motor Drive Signal
0V CN56 SC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN56-1 +24VM Paper Feed Solenoid
CN56-2
nADF1
Signal Waveform
Function
+24V
Paper Feed Solenoid
ON
+24V (H)
+24 VDC Power Supply
Paper Feed Roller Solenoid Control Signal
0V (L) CN57 SC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN57-1 +24V ILS PCB CN73-1
CN57-2
N.C.
CN57-3
+24VD
Signal Waveform
Function
+24V
+24 VDC Power Supply
Not Used
ILS PCB CN73-3
Cover Open 0V (L)
Printer Cover Detection +24V (H) Signal Cover Closed
CN58 SC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN58-1 nCCHK1 SNS4 PCB CN87-1
Signal Waveform
Function No Cassette Detection Signal L: No Cassette
+5V(H) 0V(L)
CN58-2
GND
SNS4 PCB CN87-2
Ground
0V CN58-3
nRSEN
SNS4 PCB CN87-3
+5V(H)
Timing Sensor Detection Signal L: Detect
0V(L)
72 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
SC PCB Signal Name Pin No. CN58-4 N.C.
Destination
Signal Waveform
Function Not Used
CN58-5
+5V
SNS4 PCB CN87-5
CN58-6
nESEN
SNS4 PCB CN87-6
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
Paper Exit Sensor Detection Signal L: Detect
+5V(H) 0V(L)
CN59 SC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN59-1 nPCHK1 SNS3 PCB CN83-1
Signal Waveform
Function No Paper Sensor Detection Signal H: No Paper
+5V(H) 0V(L)
CN59-2
CN59-3
LDSP1
GND
SNS3 PCB CN83-2
No Paper Sensor LED Drive Current
Approx. +1 VDC
SNS3 PCB CN83-3
Ground
0V CN59-4
CN59-5
TONER
+5V
SNS3 PCB CN83-4
Remaining Toner Level Signal
Approx. +2 VDC
SNS3 PCB CN83-5
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
CN66 SC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN66-1 +24VM CST2 PCB CN70-1
CN66-2
GND
Signal Waveform
Function
+24V
CST2 PCB CN70-2
+24 VDC Power Supply
Ground
0V
73 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
SC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN66-3 +5V CST2 PCB CN70-3
CN66-4
nPCHK2
CST2 PCB CN70-4
Signal Waveform
Function
+5V
No Paper Detection Signal (2nd Cassette) H: No Paper L: Paper
+5V(H) 0V(L)
CN66-5
CN66-6
pADF2
nCCHK2
CST2 PCB CN70-5
CST2 PCB CN70-6
+5V (H) ON
+5 VDC Power Supply
0V (L)
Feed Roller Drive Clutch Control Signal (2nd Cassette) No Cassette Detection Signal (2nd Cassette) L: No Cassette
+5V(H) 0V(L)
CN66-7
nOP
CST2 PCB CN70-7
2nd Feeder Unit Detection Signal H: No Feeder Unit
+5V(H) 0V(L)
CN68 SC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. LSU CN68-1 nS/H CN1-1
Signal Waveform
Function Laser Power Sample/Hold Timing Signal L : Sampling H : Holding
+5V(H) 0V(L)
CN68-2
nHSYNC
LSU CN1-2
Horizontal Synchronous Signal 2.136 ms (400 dpi) 1.393 ms (600 dpi)
+5V(H) 0V(L)
CN68-3
L+5V
LSU CN1-3
CN68-4
GND
LSU CN1-4
+5V
Laser Circuit +5 VDC Power Supply (Supplied only while the LP is operating) Ground
0V CN68-5
nLDON
LSU CN1-5
+5V(H)
Laser Control
0V(L) CN68-6
nVIDEO
LSU CN1-6
+5V(H)
Video Data L: Black H: White
0V(L) 74 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
SC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. LSU CN68-7 GND CN1-7
Signal Waveform
Function Ground
0V CN69 SC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN69-1 nPMCK LSU CN15-1
CN69-2
nPMRY
LSU CN15-2
Signal Waveform
Function
Tetragon Motor Clock +5V(H) 0.702 kHz (400 dpi) 1.076 kHz (600 dpi) 0V(H) Tetragon Motor Ready Signal H: Not Ready L: Ready
+5V(H) 0V(L)
CN69-3
nPMON
LSU CN15-3
Tetragon Motor Control Signal H: OFF L: ON
+5V(H) 0V(L)
CN69-4
MGND
LSU CN15-4
Ground
0V CN69-5
+24VM
LSU CN15-5
+24V
+24 VDC Power Supply
75 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
CN93
SC PCB Pin No. CN93-1
LEDV
LANB PCB CN95-1
+5V
+5V Power Supply for LED
CN93-2
LEDV
LANB PCB CN95-2
+5V
+5V Power Supply for LED
CN93-3
GND
LANB PCB CN95-3
Signal Name
Destination
Signal Waveform
Function
Ground 0V
CN93-4
A16
LANB PCB CN95-4
Not Used
CN93-5
A15
LANB PCB CN95-5
Not Used
CN93-6
A14
LANB PCB CN95-6
Not Used
CN93-7
A13
LANB PCB CN95-7
Not Used
CN93-8
A12
LANB PCB CN95-8
Not Used
CN93-9
A11
LANB PCB CN95-9
Not Used
CN93-10
A10
LANB PCB CN95-10
Not Used
CN93-11
A9
LANB PCB CN95-11
Not Used
CN93-12
A21
LANB PCB CN95-12
Not Used
CN93-13
*WE
LANB PCB CN95-13
Not Used
CN93-14
*RESET
LANB PCB CN95-14
Not Used
CN93-15
A20
LANB PCB CN95-15
Not Used
CN93-16
A19
LANB PCB CN95-16
Not Used
76 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
SC PCB Pin No.
Signal Name
Destination
Signal Waveform
Function
1CN93-17
A18
LANB PCB CN95-17
Not Used
CN93-18
A17
LANB PCB CN95-18
Not Used
CN93-19
A8
LANB PCB CN95-19
Not Used
CN93-20
A7
LANB PCB CN95-20
Not Used
CN93-21
A6
LANB PCB CN95-21
Not Used
CN93-22
A5
LANB PCB CN95-22
Not Used
CN93-23
A4
LANB PCB CN95-23
Not Used
CN93-24
A3
LANB PCB CN95-24
Not Used
CN93-25
A2
LANB PCB CN95-25
Not Used
CN93-26
A1
LANB PCB CN95-26
Not Used
CN93-27
Vdd
LANB PCB CN95-27
+3.3V
+3.3VDC Power Supply
CN93-28
Vdd
LANB PCB CN95-28
+3.3V
+3.3VDC Power Supply
CN93-29
*CE
LANB PCB CN95-29
CN93-30
DD0
LANB PCB CN95-30
+3.3V(H)
LANB PCB CN95-31
+3.3V(H)
LANB PCB CN95-32
+3.3V(H)
Not Used
Data Signal
0V(L)
CN93-31
DD1
Data Signal
0V(L)
CN93-32
DD2
Data Signal
0V(L)
77 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
SC PCB Pin No. CN93-33
CN93-34
CN93-35
CN93-36
CN93-37
CN93-38
CN93-39
CN93-40
CN93-41
CN93-42
CN93-43
CN93-44
CN93-45
CN93-46
CN93-47
CN93-48
Signal Name DD3
DD4
DD5
DD6
DD7
DD8
DD9
DD10
DD11
DD12
DD13
DD14
DD15
*WR
*RD
RESET
Destination
Signal Waveform
LANB PCB CN95-33
LANB PCB CN95-34
LANB PCB CN95-35
LANB PCB CN95-36
LANB PCB CN95-37
LANB PCB CN95-38
LANB PCB CN95-39
LANB PCB CN95-40
LANB PCB CN95-41
LANB PCB CN95-42
LANB PCB CN95-43
LANB PCB CN95-44
LANB PCB CN95-45
LANB PCB CN95-46
LANB PCB CN95-47
LANB PCB CN95-48
+3.3V(H)
0V(L) +3.3V(H)
0V(L) +3.3V(H)
0V(L) +3.3V(H)
0V(L) +3.3V(H)
0V(L) +3.3V(H)
0V(L) +3.3V(H)
0V(L) +3.3V(H)
0V(L) +3.3V(H)
0V(L) +3.3V(H)
0V(L) +3.3V(H)
0V(L) +3.3V(H)
0V(L) +3.3V(H)
0V(L) +3.3V(H)
0V(L) +3.3V(H)
0V(L) +3.3V(H)
0V(L)
Function Data Signal
Data Signal
Data Signal
Data Signal
Data Signal
Data Signal
Data Signal
Data Signal
Data Signal
Data Signal
Data Signal
Data Signal
Data Signal
Write Signal - Low Enable
Read Signal - Low Enable
LAN Reset Signal H: Reset L: Not Reset
78 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
SC PCB Pin No. CN93-49
Signal Name INTR0
Destination
Signal Waveform
LANB PCB CN95-49
+3.3V(H)
Function High Enable
0V(L)
CN93-50
GND
LANB PCB CN95-50
Ground 0V
CN93-51
*LAN
LANB PCB CN95-51
+3.3V(H) 0V (L)
CN93-52
GND
LANB PCB CN95-52
LANB PCB Connected Detection Signal H: LANB PCB not connect Ground
0V
CN93-53
GND
LANB PCB CN95-53
Ground 0V
CN93-54
GND
LANB PCB CN95-54
Ground 0V
CN93-55
D11
LANB PCB CN95-55
Not Used
CN93-56
D7
LANB PCB CN95-56
Not Used
CN93-57
D14
LANB PCB CN95-57
Not Used
CN93-58
D6
LANB PCB CN95-58
Not Used
CN93-59
D13
LANB PCB CN95-59
Not Used
CN93-60
D5
LANB PCB CN95-60
Not Used
CN93-61
D12
LANB PCB CN95-61
Not Used
CN93-62
D4
LANB PCB CN95-62
Not Used
CN93-63
Vcc
LANB PCB CN95-63
+3.3V
+3.3VDC Power Supply
CN93-64
Vcc
LANB PCB CN95-64
+3.3V
+3.3VDC Power Supply
79 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
SC PCB Pin No.
Signal Name
Destination
Signal Waveform
Function
CN93-65
D11
LANB PCB CN95-65
Not Used
CN93-66
D3
LANB PCB CN95-66
Not Used
CN93-67
D10
LANB PCB CN95-67
Not Used
CN93-68
D2
LANB PCB CN95-68
Not Used
CN93-69
D9
LANB PCB CN95-69
Not Used
CN93-70
D1
LANB PCB CN95-70
Not Used
CN93-71
D8
LANB PCB CN95-71
Not Used
CN93-72
D0
LANB PCB CN95-72
Not Used
CN93-73
*OE
LANB PCB CN95-73
Not Used
CN93-74
GND
LANB PCB CN95-74
Ground 0V
CN93-75
GND
LANB PCB CN95-75
Ground 0V
CN93-76
Vdd
LANB PCB CN95-76
+3.3V
+3.3VDC Power Supply
CN93-77
Vdd
LANB PCB CN95-77
+3.3V
+3.3VDC Power Supply
CN93-78
AD15
LANB PCB CN95-78
+3.3V(H)
Address Signal
0V(L)
CN93-79
AD14
LANB PCB CN95-79
+3.3V(H)
Address Signal
0V(L)
CN93-80
AD13
LANB PCB CN95-80
+3.3V(H)
Address Signal
0V(L)
80 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
SC PCB Pin No. CN93-81
Signal Name AD12
Destination
Signal Waveform
LANB PCB CN95-81
Function Address Signal
+3.3V(H) 0V(L)
CN93-82
AD11
LANB PCB CN95-82
Address Signal
+3.3V(H) 0V(L)
CN93-83
AD10
LANB PCB CN95-83
Address Signal
+3.3V(H) 0V(L)
CN93-84
AD9
LANB PCB CN95-84
Address Signal
+3.3V(H) 0V(L)
CN93-85
AD8
LANB PCB CN95-85
Address Signal
+3.3V(H) 0V(L)
CN93-86
AD7
LANB PCB CN95-86
Address Signal
+3.3V(H) 0V(L)
CN93-87
AD6
LANB PCB CN95-87
Address Signal
+3.3V(H) 0V(L)
CN93-88
AD5
LANB PCB CN95-88
Address Signal
+3.3V(H) 0V(L)
CN93-89
AD4
LANB PCB CN95-89
Address Signal
+3.3V(H) 0V(L)
CN93-90
AD3
LANB PCB CN95-90
Address Signal
+3.3V(H) 0V(L)
CN93-91
AD2
LANB PCB CN95-91
Address Signal
+3.3V(H) 0V(L)
CN93-92
AD1
LANB PCB CN95-92
Address Signal
+3.3V(H) 0V(L)
CN93-93
Vdd
LANB PCB CN95-93
+3.3V
+3.3VDC Power Supply
CN93-94
Vdd
LANB PCB CN95-94
+3.3V
+3.3VDC Power Supply
CN93-95
AEN
LANB PCB CN95-95
+3.3V(H)
Low Enable
0V(L)
CN93-96
ARDY
LANB PCB CN95-96
+3.3V(H)
Low Enable
0V(L)
81 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
SC PCB Pin No. CN93-97
Signal Name GND
Destination
Signal Waveform
LANB PCB CN95-97
Function Ground
0V
CN93-98
GND
LANB PCB CN95-98
Ground 0V
CN93-99
GND
LANB PCB CN95-99
Ground 0V
CN93-100
GND
LANB PCB CN95-100
Ground 0V
82 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
3.7.
MJR PC Board
CN20 MJR PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN20-3 LT2(T) Telephone Line
CN20-4
LT1(R)
Signal Waveform
Function Line Signal
Telephone Line
Line Signal
CN23 MJR PCB Signal Name Pin No. CN23-1 N.C.
Destination
Signal Waveform
Function Not Used
CN23-2
N.C.
Not Used
CN23-3
HLIN1
SRU PCB CN90-1
Line Signal for the Fax Handset
CN23-4
HLIN2
SRU PCB CN90-2
Line Signal for the Fax Handset
CN23-5
N.C.
Not Used
CN28 and CN29 Refer to SC PC Board CN18.
83 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
3.8.
Power Supply Unit
CN101 PS Unit Pin No. CN101-1
Signal Name Black (L)
Destination
Signal Waveform
ACI PC Board
Function AC Power Supply
AC100V CN101-2
N.C.
CN101-3
White (N)
Not Used
ACI PC Board
AC Power Supply
AC100V CN102 PS Unit Pin No. CN102-1
Signal Name Black (L)
Destination
Signal Waveform
Fuser Lamp
Function AC Power Supply
AC100V CN102-2
N.C.
CN102-3
White (N)
Not Used
Thermostat Thermal Fuse
AC Power Supply
AC100V CN103 Refer to SC PC Board CN6 and CN53.
84 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
CN201 PS Unit Pin No. CN201-1
Signal Name
Destination
Development Development Roller
Signal Waveform
Development Voltage (AC 1.65 kHz Square Wave) & DC Voltage
0V -300V
Function
1650Vp-p
CN201-2
N.C.
Not Used
CN201-3
N.C.
Not Used
CN201-4
N.C.
Not Used
CN201-5
Charge
Bias Charge Roller
Charge Current: 200 µA (AC 300 Hz Sine Wave) & DC Charge Voltage
0V -650V 200 A
CN202 PS Unit Pin No. CN202
Signal Name Transfer
Destination
Signal Waveform
Bias Transfer Roller
+3 A 0V
Function (1)Transfer Current: (+3 µA) (2)Cleaning Voltage: (-1500 V)
-1500V
85 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
3.9.
PNL PC Board
CN50 Refer to SC PC Board CN14. LCD PNL PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. LCD-1 RS LCD Module-1
Signal Waveform
Function Register Select Signal H: Data Register L: Instruction Register
+5V 0V LCD-2
R/W
LCD Module-2
Data Read/Write Select Signal H: Read 0V L: Write
+5V
LCD-3
E
LCD Module-3
Data Read/Write Enable Signal H: Enable 0V L: Disable
+5V
LCD-4
DB0
LCD Module-4
Data Signal
+5V 0V LCD-5
DB1
LCD Module-5
Data Signal
+5V 0V LCD-6
DB2
LCD Module-6
Data Signal
+5V 0V LCD-7
DB3
LCD Module-7
Data Signal
+5V 0V LCD-8
DB4
LCD Module-8
Data Signal
+5V 0V LCD-9
DB5
LCD Module-9
Data Signal
+5V 0V LCD-10
DB6
LCD Module-10
Data Signal
+5V 0V
86 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
PNL PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. LCD-11 DB7 LCD Module-11
Signal Waveform
Function Data Signal
+5V 0V LCD-12
GND
LCD Module-12
Ground
0V LCD-13
+5V
LCD Module-13
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
LCD-14
+5V
LCD Module-14
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
LCD-15
V5
LCD Module-15
LCD-16
GND
LCD Module-16
+4.8V(Max)
Power Supply for LCD
Ground
0V
87 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
3.10. SNS3 PC Board CN83 Refer to SC PC Board CN59. CN84 SNS3 PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN84-1 GND Toner Sensor
Signal Waveform
Function Ground
0V CN84-2
TONER
Toner Sensor
Remaining Toner Level Signal
Approx. +2 VDC
CN84-3
+5V
Toner Sensor
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
88 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
3.11. SNS4 PC Board CN85 SNS3 PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. SNS1 PCB CN85-1 nCCHK1 CN81-1
Signal Waveform
Function No Cassette Detection Signal L: No Cassette
+5V(H) 0V(L)
CN85-2
GND
SNS1 PCB CN81-2
Ground
0V CN85-3
nRSEN
SNS1 PCB CN81-3
+5V(H)
Timing Sensor Detection Signal L: Detect
0V(L) CN85-4
LDRE
SNS1 PCB CN81-4
Approx. +2 VDC
Timing Sensor and No Cassette Sensor LED Drive Current
CN87 Refer to SC PC Board CN58.
89 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
3.12. SNS1 PC Board CN80 SNS1 PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. SNS2 PCB CN80-1 nCCHK1 CN82-1
Signal Waveform
Function No Cassette Detection Signal L: No Cassette
+5V(H) 0V(L)
CN80-2
GND
SNS2 PCB CN82-2
Ground
0V CN80-3
LDSC1
SNS2 PCB CN82-3
Approx. +1 VDC
No Cassette Sensor LED Drive Current
CN81 Refer to SNS4 PC Board CN85.
3.13. SNS2 PC Board CN82 Refer to SNS1 PC Board CN80.
3.14. CCD PC Board CN30 Refer to SC PC Board CN7.
3.15. ILS PC Board CN73 Refer to SC PC Board CN57.
3.16. ACI PC Board Refer to Power Supply Unit CN101.
90 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
3.17. LANB PC Board CN96 Refer to SC PC Board CN93. CN97 LANB PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN97-1 ACTIVITY LANC PCB CN202-1
Signal Waveform
Function LANB PCB / LANC PCB Activity Signal
+5V 0V
CN97-2
+5V
LANC PCB CN202-2
CN97-3
LINK
LANC PCB CN202-3
+5V
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
LANB PCB/ LANC PCB Link Signal
0V CN97-4
N.C.
Not Used
CN97-5
RX-
LANC PCB CN200-1
Reception Data "-" Signal
CN97-6
RX+
LANC PCB CN200-2
Reception Data "+" Signal
CN97-7
TX-
LANC PCB CN200-3
Transmission Data "-" Signal
CN97-8
TX+
LANC PCB CN200-4
Transmission Data "+" Signal
3.18. LANC PC Board CN200 Refer to LANB PC Board CN97. CN202 Refer to LANB PC Board CN97.
91 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
3.19. CST2 PC Board (Optional) CN70 Refer to SC PC Board CN66. CN71 CST2 PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN71-1 +24VM Paper Feed Solenoid
CN70-2
nADF2
Signal Waveform
Function
+24V
Paper Feed Solenoid
ON
+24V (H)
+24 VDC Power Supply
Paper Feed Roller Solenoid Control Signal
0V (L) CN74 CST2 PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN74-1 SNS2 PCB nCCHK2 (Optional) CN82-1
Signal Waveform
Function No Cassette Detection Signal (2nd Cassette) L: No Cassette
+5V(H) 0V(L)
CN74-2
CN74-3
GND
SNCMN
SNS2 PCB (Optional) CN82-2
Ground
0V
SNS2 PCB (Optional) CN82-3
+2V
+2 VDC Power Supply
3.20. SNS2 PC Board (Optional) CN82 Refer to CST2 PC Board CN74.
92 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
3.21. SRU PC Board (Optional) CN90 Refer to MJR PC Board CN23. CN91 SRU PCB Signal Name Pin No. CN91-1 N.C.
Destination
Signal Waveform
Function Not Used
CN91-2
MIC (+)
Telephone Handset CN
Handset Microphone
CN91-3
RCV (+)
Telephone Handset CN
Handset Receiver
CN91-4
RCV (-)
Telephone Handset CN
Handset Receiver
CN91-5
MIC (-)
Telephone Handset CN
Handset Microphone
CN91-6
TGND
Ground
0V
93 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
4 Troubleshooting 4.1.
Initial Troubleshooting Flowchart START
Plug-in the Power Cord to turn the machine ON.
Does the unit power up normally?
No Does the LCD display and function correctly?
Yes
No
Yes
Troubleshoot Improper LCD Display (Sect. 4.2).
Troubleshoot any 3-digit INFO. CODE displayed (Sect. 4.3).
Does the unit produce normal copies?
No
Yes
Does the original document No feed through correctly? Troubleshoot the Yes Document Feeder (Sect. 4.5) Does the recording paper No exit the unit? Yes
Troubleshoot communication problems (transmission, reception, dialing, polling, information codes, or diagnostic codes.) (Sect. 4.6)
Check for recording paper path problems.
Troubleshoot printed copy quality problems (Sect. 4.4).
94 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
4.2.
Improper LCD Display START
Check connectors: CN14 (SC PCB) and CN50 (PNL1 PCB).
When pressing any key, do you hear the 'Pi-' sound from the Speaker? Yes
No Does CN14, pin 2 and pin 3 on the SC PCB measure +5VDC?
No
Yes Replace the PNL1 PCB.
Replace the SC PCB. Reinstall the firmware.
END
95 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
4.3.
Information Codes (INFO. CODES)
The 3-digit information codes display to show the unit’s status. These codes also print on the journal. The following table indicates appropriate sections for troubleshooting. Code 001, 002, 007 010 030 031 400 401, 402 403 404, 405, 407 408, 409 411, 414 415 416 417, 418 420 422 434 459, 494, 495 490 630 634 711 - 731 800 - 870
Explanation Recording paper jam No recording paper Document misfeeding Document too long Transmission error Transmission error Polling reception error Transmission error Transmission error Polling reception error Remote side mis-operation Reception error Reception error Reception error Transmission error Signal noise level too high Reception error Reception error Remote unit Busy No busy tone detected LAN communication error Advanced Communication error
Phase C, D B, C B C B B B B D B B D C B B B C C B B LAN --
Section 4.3.8. 4.3.9. 4.3.10. 4.3.10. 4.3.1. 4.3.2. 4.3.12. 4.3.3. 4.3.5. 4.3.12. 4.3.12. 4.3.4. 4.3.5. 4.3.1. 4.3.2. 4.3.6. 4.3.7. 4.3.5. 4.3.11. ----
Phase Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
Phase D
Phase E
Message Transmission Facsimile Communication Procedure Facsimile Call
Phase A Phase B Phase C Phase D Phase E
: : : : :
Call establishment Pre-message procedure Message transmission Post-message procedure Call release
96 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
4.3.1.
Information Codes: 400, 420 400 START
420 START
Enable the monitor speaker. (Refer to Sect. 5.1 Parameter No. 008)
Perform a transmission test to the remote unit in question.
Does the remote unit send the CED and 300 bps Fax signal ?
No
Is reception from a reference unit successful? Yes
No
Check the line connection from the wall jack to the "Line" on the MJR PCB.
1. Misdialed call. 2. Check the remote unit. (Remote unit is defective) 3. Refer to Sect. 4.6.
Replace the SC PCB.
END
Yes Does the remote unit repeat the 300 bps signal every 3 sec.? Yes
No
No Is transmission to the reference unit successful? Yes
1. Check the remote unit. (Remote unit is defective) 2. Check the telephone number to the remote unit.
1. Replace the MJR PCB. 2. Replace the SC PCB.
Does the trouble still occur?
No
Yes 1. Refer to Sect. 4.6. 2. Check the remote unit. (Remote unit is defective)
END
END
97 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
4.3.2.
Information Codes: 401, 402, 422 402, 422 START
Is Communication with the reference unit successful?
No
Yes Replace the SC PCB. Check the remote unit in question. (Remote unit is defective)
401 START
Is the ID Number programmed into your machine?
END
No
Yes
Is the Receiving unit set up for Selective Receive?
Program the ID Number.
Yes
No
Is the Receiving unit set up for Password Reception?
Check the Selective Receive settings at the receiving unit.
Yes
No
Are you sending a Confidential Mail?
Program the Receive Password to match the receiving unit. (Fax Parameter No. 44) Yes
No
Are you sending a document by Relayed Transmission? No
Check with the receiving end, the mailboxes may be full.
Yes Check the Relayed Transmission settings at the Relay Station.
END
98 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
4.3.3.
Information Codes: 404, 405, 407 START
Is communication with reference unit successful?
No 1. Replace the MJR PCB. 2. Replace the SC PCB.
Yes
Change Function Parameter #010: Reduce Tx Attenuation Level Does the problem still occur?
No
Yes No
Does the problem still occur? Yes
Check the telephone line condition.
END
Change Function Parameter #017: Reduce Tx Modem Speed
No
Check the remote unit. (Recording paper may have run out or paper may have jammed.)
Does the problem still occur? Yes
Change Funciotn Parameter #014: Increase G3 Tx Equalization
No
Does the problem still occur? Yes
Change Function Parameter #025: Communication Startup to 2nd
Does the problem still occur?
No
Yes
Does the problem still occur?
Yes
Refer to Sect. 4.6.
No
END
99 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
4.3.4.
Information Code: 416 START
Is communication with the reference unit successful? Yes
No 1. Replace the MJR PCB. 2. Replace the SC PCB.
Change Function Parameter #011: Reduce Rx Sensitivity Level
Does the problem still occur?
No
Yes No
Does the problem still occur? Yes
Check the telephone line condition. END
Change Function Parameter #023: Increase Training Check Period
No
Does the problem still occur? Yes
Change Function Parameter #013: Increase G3 Rx Equalization
No
Does the problem still occur?
Yes Refer to Sect. 4.6.
END
100 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
4.3.5.
Information Codes: 408, 409, 417, 418, 490 START
Is communication with the reference unit successful? Yes
No
Is the unit transmitting or receiving?
Transmitting
1. Replace the MJR PCB. 2. Replace the SC PCB.
Does the problem still occur?
Receiving Change Function Parameter #071: Increase Error Tolerance
Change Function Parameter #010: Reduce Tx Attenuation Level
Does the problem still occur?
No Does the problem still occur? Yes
No
Yes Check the telephone line condition. No
END
Yes
Change Function Parameter #011: Reduce Rx Sensitivity Level
Change Function Parameter #017: Reduce Tx Modem Speed Does the problem still occur?
No Does the problem still occur? Yes
No
Yes Change Function Parameter #014: Increase G3 Tx Equalization
Change Function Parameter #018: Reduce Rx Modem Speed
Does the problem still occur?
No Does the problem still occur? Yes
No
Yes
Change Function Parameter #013: Increase G3 Rx Equalization No Does the problem still occur?
Yes The telephone line may have a high level of white noise and/or frequent impulse noise. Ask the telephone company to check the line.
END
101 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
4.3.6.
Information Code: 434 START
Is communication with the reference unit successful?
No
Yes
Replace the SC PCB.
No Does the trouble occur regardless of the remote unit? Yes
The telephone line may have a high level of white noise and/or frequent impulse noise. Ask the telephone company to check the line.
Can the transmitter in question transmit to the other units? No
Yes
Check the remote unit in question. (Remote unit is defective)
Change the parameter in Service Mode 1. (Refer to Sect. 5.1.2.) for transmitter: #010: Increase Tx Level for receiver : #011: Reduce Rx Sensitivity Level
END
102 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
4.3.7.
Information Codes: 459, 494, 495 START Check the line connection between the telephone jack on the wall and the MJR PCB.
Is communication with the reference unit successful? Yes
No 1. Replace the MJR PCB. 2. Replace the SC PCB.
Does the problem still occur?
No
Yes
Check the telephone line condition.
END Does the trouble occur regardless of the remote unit? Yes
No 1. Check the remote unit in question. (Remote unit is defective) 2. Refer to Sect. 4.6.
If the telephone line frequently disconnects at the beginning of each communication, ask the telephone company to check the line.
END
103 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
4.3.8.
Information Codes: 001, 002, 007 (Recording Paper Jam) START
Is the recording paper size and thickness within specification?
No Replace with correct paper.
Yes
Is the recording paper loaded in the Cassette properly? Yes
No Load the paper correctly.
No Is the paper cassette functional? Yes
Replace the paper cassette.
Check the Paper Feed Roller Assembly.
Check all Sensors and Actuators (No Paper Sensor, Timing Sensor, Paper Exit Sensor).
Check the Paper Feed Solenoid.
END
104 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
4.3.9.
Information Code: 010 (No Recording Paper) START
Is the Paper Cassette seated properly
No Reseat the cassette.
Yes
Is the recording paper loaded in the cassette? Yes
Is the No Paper Actuator operational? Yes
Is the No Paper Sensor operational? Yes
No Load the paper.
No Replace the Actuator.
No Replace the No Paper Sensor.
No Does the Paper Feed Roller turn? Overhaul the Clutch Gear Assembly.
Yes
END
105 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
4.3.10. Information Codes: 030, 031 (Document Jam) START
Yes Is the document path blocked? Remove the blockage.
No
No Does the Tx Motor rotate? 1. Replace the Tx Motor. 2. Replace the SC PCB.
Yes
Does the document feed into the unit? Yes
Does the voltage on A-Point and B-Point Sensor Pin 2 of PNL1 PCB, vary between 0 and +5V when a document is set and removed?
No Check all gears and rollers.
No
Replace the PNL1 PCB.
Yes
END
4.3.11.
Information Code: 630 (Dialing Error) START
Is there a dial tone when MONITOR button is pressed? Yes
No 1. Connect the telephone line correctly. 2. Check the telephone line. No
Is the remote machine busy? Yes
Can the unit dial the reference unit? Yes
No 1. Check all connectors. 2. Replace the SC PCB.
Press the REDIAL button to retry connection. 1. The remote machine is defective. 2. Telephone line quality is poor. (Refer to Sect. 4.6.) END
END
106 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
4.3.12. Information Codes: 403, 411, 414, 415 (Polling Operator Trouble) 415
403, 411, 414
START
START
Inform the remote side (receiving side) that their machine does not have polling transmission capability.
Review the polling operation referring to the Operating Instructions.
Does the remote side have polling transmission capability? Yes
No
Is the remote side set to polling transmission (Polled) Mode?
No
END
END
Yes
Ask the remote side to set their unit for polling operation.
Check the password between the two units to ensure it matches.
END
Polling communication with 4-digit password is not an ITU-T Standard feature. If the transmitter and receiver are of different manufacturers, polling communication with password may not be possible.
107 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
4.4.
Black Copy Paper Travel
4.4.1.
Printed Copy Quality Problems
START
Is the printout in Service Mode 3 normal?
Yes Check the Scanner mechanism.
No
Is the Toner Cartridge operational? Yes
Is the Power Supply Unit normal?
No Replace the Toner Cartridge.
No 1. Check all connectors and voltages on the Power Supply Unit. 2. Check the contacts between PSU and Toner Cartridge. 3. Replace the PSU.
Yes
Is the SC PCB normal?
No
Yes
1. Check all connectors and voltages on the SC PCB. 2. Replace the SC PCB.
END
108 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
Blank Copy Paper Travel
4.4.2.
START
Is the printout in Service Mode 3 normal?
Yes
No
Is the Toner Cartridge operational?
Check the Scanner mechanism.
No Replace the Toner Cartridge .
Yes Are there any foreign particles or stains on the BTR? No
Yes
Is the Power Supply Unit normal?
No
1. Clean the BTR with a soft, dry cloth. 2. Replace the BTR.
1. Check all connectors and voltages on the Power Supply Unit. 2. Check the Connector and voltage on the Power Supply Unit. 3. Replace the Power Supply Unit.
Yes
Are there any foreign particles or stains blocking the Laser Beam path? No
Is the SC PCB normal?
Yes 1. Remove the particles from the laser beam path or clean the stains. 2. Replace the Laser Unit (LSU).
No
Yes
1. Check all connectors and voltages on the SC PCB. 2. Replace the SC PCB.
END
109 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
Vertical White Lines
P
Paper Travel
4.4.3.
START
Is the printout in Service Mode 3 normal?
Yes
No
Is the recording paper damp?
Check the Scanner mechanism.
Yes
No
Is the Toner Cartridge operational?
Replace the recording paper.
No Replace the Toner Cartridge .
Yes Are there any foreign particles or stains blocking the Laser Beam path? No
Yes 1. Remove the particles from the laser beam path or clean the stains. 2. Replace the Laser Unit (LSU).
Are there any foreign particles Yes or stains on the BTR? No
Are the Fuser and Pressure Roller surfaces clean? Yes
1. Clean the BTR with a soft, dry cloth. 2. Replace the BTR.
No Clean or replace the rollers.
END
110 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
Ghost Images
A AAA A
Paper Travel
4.4.4.
START
Is the printout in Service Mode 3 normal?
Yes
No
Is the recording paper damp?
Check the Scanner mechanism.
Yes
No
Is the Toner Cartridge operational?
Replace the recording paper.
No Replace the Toner Cartridge.
Yes Are there any foreign particles or stains on the BTR? No
Yes
Are the Fuser and Pressure Roller surfaces clean? Yes
No
1. Clean the BTR with a soft, dry cloth. 2. Replace the BTR.
Clean or replace the rollers.
END
111 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
Vertical Dark Lines
P
Paper Travel
4.4.5.
START
Is the printout in Service Mode 3 normal?
Yes Check the Scanner mechanism.
No
Is the Toner Cartridge operational?
No Replace the Toner Cartridge.
Yes
Are there any foreign particles or stains on the BTR? No
Yes
Is the Laser Unit (LSU) normal? Yes
No
Are the Fuser and Pressure Roller surfaces clean? Yes
No
1. Clean the BTR with a soft, dry cloth. 2. Replace the BTR.
Replace the Laser Unit (LSU).
Clean or replace the rollers.
END
112 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
Horizontal Dark Lines
P
Paper Travel
4.4.6.
START
Is the printout in Service Mode 3 normal? No
Yes
Check the Scanner mechanism.
Is the Toner Cartridge operational? Yes
No Replace the Toner Cartridge.
Yes Are there any foreign particles or stains on the BTR? 1. Clean the BTR with a soft, dry cloth. 2. Replace the BTR.
No
No
Is the Laser Unit (LSU) normal? Yes
Is the Power Supply Unit normal?
Replace the Laser Unit (LSU).
No 1. Check all connectors and voltages on the Power Supply Unit . 2. Check the Connector and voltage on the Power Supply Unit. 3. Replace the Power Supply Unit.
Yes
Are the Fuser and Pressure Roller surfaces clean?
No
Yes
Clean or replace the rollers.
END
113 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
Dark Background
P
Paper Travel
4.4.7.
START
Is the printout in Service Mode 3 normal?
Yes Check the Scanner mechanism.
No
Is the recording paper damp?
Yes
No
Is the Toner Cartridge operational?
Replace the recording paper.
No Replace the Toner Cartridge.
Yes
Is the Laser Unit (LSU) normal?
No
Yes
Is the Power Supply Unit normal?
Replace the Laser Unit (LSU).
No 1. Check all connectors and voltages on the Power Supply Unit. 2. Check the Connector and voltages on the Power Supply Unit. 3. Replace the Power Supply Unit.
Yes
Are the Fuser and Pressure Roller surfaces clean? Yes
No Clean or replace the rollers.
END
114 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
Light Print Paper Travel
4.4.8.
START
Is the printout in Service Mode 3 normal? No
Is the recording paper damp?
Yes Check the Scanner mechanism.
Yes
No
Is the Toner Cartridge operational?
Replace the paper.
No Replace the Toner Cartridge.
Yes
Are there any foreign particles or stains blocking the Laser Unit path? No
Is the Power Supply Unit normal?
Yes 1. Remove the particles from the laser beam path or clean the stains. 2. Replace the LSU.
No
Yes
Are the Fuser and Pressure Roller surfaces clean? Yes
1. Check all connectors and voltages on the Power Supply Unit. 2. Replace the Power Supply Unit. No Clean or replace the rollers.
END
115 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
Horizontal White Lines
P
Paper Travel
4.4.9.
START
Is the printout in Service Mode 3 normal?
Yes
No
Is the recording paper damp?
Check the Scanner mechanism.
Yes
No
Is the Toner Cartridge operational?
Replace the recording paper.
No Replace the Toner Cartridge.
Yes
Are there any foreign particles or stains on the BTR? No
Yes
Is the Power Supply Unit normal? Yes
No
Are the Fuser and Pressure Roller surfaces clean? Yes
No
1. Clean the BTR with a soft, dry cloth. 2. Replace the BTR.
1. Check all connectors and voltages on the Power Supply Unit. 2. Replace the Power Supply Unit.
Clean or replace the rollers.
END
116 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
4.4.10. Improper Fusing (Printed image does not bond to the paper)
P START
Is the recording paper damp?
Yes
No
Is the Fuser Unit normal?
Replace the recording paper.
No
Yes
Replace the Fuser Unit. (See Note)
END
Note: Replace the entire Fuser Unit when the Thermostat, the Thermal Fuse or the Thermistor Assembly becomes an open-circuit.
117 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
Voids in Solid Areas
P
Paper Travel
4.4.11.
START
Is the recording paper damp?
Yes
No
Is the Toner Cartridge operational?
Replace the recording paper.
No Replace the Toner Cartridge.
Yes Are the Fuser and Pressure Roller surfaces clean? Yes
No Clean or replace the rollers.
END
118 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
P
Paper Travel
4.4.12. Black Dots
START
Is the Toner Cartridge operational?
No Replace the Toner Cartridge.
Yes Are the Fuser and Pressure Roller surfaces clean? Yes
No Clean or replace the rollers.
END
119 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
Paper Travel
4.4.13. Recording Paper Creases
START
Is the recording paper damp?
Yes
No
Replace the recording paper.
Are there any foreign particles or stains in the paper path? No
Yes
Is the recording paper skewing?
Yes
Remove any obstructions and clean the paper path.
No
Are there any foreign particles or stains in the Fuser Unit?
Ensure the paper is set under the Paper Separation Clips in the Cassette.
Yes 1. Remove any foreign particles or clean the stains. 2. Replace the Fuser Unit.
No
END
120 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
4.4.14. Poor Printed Copy Quality START
Is the Test Pattern printout in Service Mode 3 normal?
No 1. Replace the SC PCB. 2. Replace the Laser Unit (LSU). 3. Replace the Power Supply Unit. 4. Replace the Toner Cartridge .
Yes
Make a local copy.
Is the printed copy correct?
No
Yes
Check the Transmission Block (CN30 on the CCD PCB and CN7 on the SC PCB.
Perform a receiving test with the reference fax unit.
Is the received copy correct?
No
Yes
Is a poor copy printed only when receiving from a specific transmitter? Yes
1. Check the CN18 on the SC PCB. 2. Check the CN28 and 29 on the MJR PCB. 3. Check the Telephone Line Cable. 4. Replace the SC PCB.
No Telephone line quality is poor. (Refer to 4.6.)
The transmitting machine may be defective.
END
121 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
4.4.15. Abnormal Printing START
Is the recording paper loaded in the Cassette properly?
No
Yes
Is the recording paper size and thickness within specification?
1. Adjust the Paper Width Guide. 2. Adjust the Paper Length Guide. 3. Ensure the paper is under the Paper Separation Clips.
No
Yes
Is a Panasonic Toner Cartridge being used?
Replace with correct paper.
No
Yes
Are all switches and sensors operating properly?
Replace with a Panasonic Toner Cartridge.
No
Yes
Are there any foreign particles or paper pieces in the receiver unit? No
Do the rollers rotate properly?
Adjust, clean or replace.
Yes Remove the foreign particles or paper pieces from the receiver unit. No 1. Check all rollers, gears, drive clutches and springs. 2. Adjust or replace any defective parts.
Yes
Is the receiving mechanism operating correctly? Yes
No Adjust or replace any defective parts.
END
122 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
4.4.16. Scanned Copy Quality Problems START
Is the LED Array abnormal?
Yes
No
Are there any foreign particles or paper pieces in the scanning area?
Replace the LED Array.
Yes Remove the foreign particles or paper pieces from the scanning area.
No
Is the scanning area dirty?
Yes
No
Are the Transmitting Rollers dirty?
1. Clean the Scanning Glass (Sect. 2.2.4.). 2. Clean Mirrors 1, 2 and 3 (Sect. 2.2.8.).
Yes
No
Clean the rollers (Sect. 2.2.4.).
Yes Is the Scanner Assembly abnormal? No
1. Check CN7 (SC PCB). 2. Check CN30 (CCD PCB). 3. Replace the Scanner Block (321) (Sect. 2.2.8.). 4. Replace the SC PCB (Sect. 2.2.10).
END
123 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
4.5. 4.5.1.
Document Feeder (ADF) No Document Feed START
No Is the document set properly? Set the document properly.
Yes Is the document thickness or size within specification? Yes
No
Is the "Pi.." tone generated when the document is set? Yes
No
Make a copy or cut the document to the specification size.
Does the ADF Sensor actuator move smoothly?
No Adjust or replace the actuator.
Yes Replace the PNL PCB. No Does the ADF Roller rotate? Replace the Transmit Motor.
Yes
Is the trouble solved?
No
Yes
Replace the PNL PCB.
END Is the ADF Roller surface dirty? Yes
No Adjust the separator pressure.
Clean the ADF Roller surface. Is the trouble solved? Yes
No Replace the ADF Roller or Separation Rubber or both.
END
124 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
4.5.2.
Document Does Not Feed or Multiple Feeds START
Is the Control Panel Unit locked?
No
Yes
Is the adjustment of the Separation Rubber normal?
Close the Control Panel Unit firmly.
No
Yes
Is the Separation Rubber worn out?
No
Yes
Clean or adjust the Separation Rubber Pressure (Sect. 2.2.2).
Replace the Separation Rubber.
Is the ADF Roller clean?
No
Yes
Is the ADF Roller worn out?
Clean the surface of the roller with isopropyl alcohol (Sect. 2.2.4)
Yes Replace the ADF Roller (Sect. 2.2.8).
No
Does the ADF Roller drive properly? Yes
No Does the ADF Roller's gear system function properly? Yes
No Adjust the gear system or replace defective parts.
END
125 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
4.5.3.
Document Jam (030) or Skew START
Mode Copy le Samp
Is the Control Panel Unit closed?
No Close the Control Panel Unit firmly.
Yes
Do all sensors on the PNL1 PCB operate normally?
No Clean or replace PNL1 PCB.
Yes
Does the Feed Roller have drive and sufficient friction?
No Clean the surface of roller with isopropyl alcohol (Sect.2.2.4).
Yes
No Is the document path clear of foreign particles or paper? Remove the foreign particles or papers from the document path.
Yes
Is the Transmitting mechanism operating properly?
Yes
No Adjust or replace any defective parts.
END
126 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
4.6.
Communications
This section explains general troubleshooting procedures for the 400 series of Information Codes. These errors are primarily caused by poor telephone line quality (loss, noise, echo, etc.). This unit is furnished with Service Mode 1 to assist in troubleshooting line quality problems. It is suggested that both the transmitting unit and receiving unit be adjusted. This section gives relevant parameters in Service Mode 1 for the transmitting and receiving sides. If no improvement is realized after the parameters are adjusted, it is recommended that the parameters be returned to the default settings.
4.6.1.
Communication Trouble Perform a communication test after changing settings.
START
Is this an international communication?
Yes
No
Transmitting Side #021 : Off #025 : 1st
On 2nd
Receiving Side #018 : 14400 bps 12000 to 2400 bps #024 : 2100 Hz 1080 Hz #030 : 75 ms 1 sec #033 : 33600 bps 31200 to 2400 bps/ TC9600/TC7200
To equalize loss (Amplitude Distortion) between the fax unit and the phone company exchange Transmitting Side #014 : 0 dBm
4, 8, 12 dBm
Receiving Side #013 : 0 dBm
4, 8, 12 dBm
To improve a poor S/N (signal-to-noise ratio) Transmitting Side
Receiving Side
#010 : -9 dBm 0 to -15 dBm #017 : 14400 bps 12000 to 2400 bps #032 : 33600 bps 31200 to 2400 bps
#011 : -43 dBm -33 dBm or -38 dBm #018 : 14400 bps 12000 to 2400 bps #023 : Normal Long #032 : 33600 bps 31200 to 2400 bps
To cope with impulse noise Receiving Side #070 : 128
256 to 2048
To cope with shifted signal sequences caused by an echo Transmitting Side #025 : 1st 2nd
Receiving Side #024 : 2100 Hz 1080 Hz #030 : 75 ms 1 sec
127 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
4.6.2.
Poor Transmitted Copy Quality START
Make a copy.
Is the printed copy normal? Yes
No No
Is the LED Array lit?
Does CN1, pin 1 on the SC PCB measure +24 VDC?
Yes
Yes Does nLEDON go Low when the scan starts? Yes Perform a transmission test to a reference fax unit.
No Replace the LVPS. No Replace the SC PCB.
Check CN1 on the SC PCB and the LED harness.
Does the problem still occur? Yes Replace the LED Array. No
Are CN7 (SC PCB) and CN30 (CCD PCB) connected properly? Yes
Connect them correctly.
1. Replace the Scanner Block. 2. Replace the SC PCB. Is the transmitted copy normal? Yes
No
Does poor transmitted copy appear when transmitting to a specific receiver? Yes
No
1. Check CN18 (SC PCB) and CN28 and 29 (MJR PCB). 2. Check the telephone line cable. Replace if necessary.
Telephone line quality is poor.
The receiving unit may be defective.
END
128 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
4.6.3.
Dialing Problems START
Does the unit proceed to Phase B? No
Are you using One-Touch or ABBR dialing?
Yes 1. Set documents on the ADF correctly. 2. Check the telephone line connection. 3. The called party is busy. 4. Refer to Sect. 4.6.
Yes Check the registered telephone number.
No
Are you using direct dialing?
Yes
No
Is the Monitor Volume too loud or too low? No
Check the dialed telephone number.
Yes Adjust the monitor volume by pressing the "/\" or "\/" curser keys.
END
129 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
4.6.4.
Transmission Problems START
Does the ID display?
No
Yes
Does the Verification Stamp operate?
1. No ID function at the remote unit. 2. The ID is not set for the remote unit.
No 1. Set "STAMP=ON" 2. Check CN3 (SC PCB). 3. Replace the Stamp Solenoid. 4. Replace the SC PCB.
Yes
Is the copy quality OK?
No
Yes
Any other problems? No
Make a copy and refer to Sect. 4.4.
Yes See Sect. 4.3. (Troubleshooting with the Information Codes).
END
130 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
4.6.5.
Reception Problems START
Does the machine answer the Ringing signal? Yes
Is the received copy OK?
No 1. Set "RCV = AUTO" 2. Check that all covers are closed firmly. 3. Check the telephone line connection. 4. Check the Ringer Timing or DRD setting. 5. Check the recording paper path. 6. Check CN18 (SC PCB) and CN28 and 29 (MJR PCB). 7. Replace the MJR PCB. 8. Replace the SC PCB.
No
Yes
Any other problems? No
Make a copy and refer to Sect. 4.4.14.
Yes See Sect. 4.3. (Troubleshooting with the Information Codes).
END
131 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
4.6.6.
Polling Problems START
Is Polling reception OK?
No
Yes
Is Polling transmission OK?
1. Set the same polling password as the other party is using. 2. Check the password of the remote unit.
No
Yes
Any other problems? No
1. Set the polling password or no - check mode.* 2. Check the password of the remote unit.
Yes See Sect. 4.3. (Troubleshooting using information codes).
END
Note: No-check Mode means that password is not set.
132 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
4.7. 4.7.1.
Troubleshooting the LAN Interface Checking Network Configuration START Print the current Internet Parameters List Ask the customer for the Pre-Installation Information form filled out by the Network Administrator. Verify this information with the Internet Parameters List that you just printed. Are the Internet Parameters entered correctly into the unit?
No Re-enter the Internet Parameters correctly.
Yes Locate a PC connected to the same Subnet Mask as the unit From the DOS Prompt, enter the following command-line utility: ipconfig /all Does the displayed Network configuration, match the following settings of the unit Internet Parameters ? Default Gateway IP Address: DNS Server IP Address: Subnet Mask:
No Ask the Network Administrator to verify the proper information.
Yes From the DOS Prompt, enter the following command-line utility: "route print" Does the current routing table for the Gateway match ?
No Ask the Network Administrator to correct the routing table on that Gateway. No
Yes Does the Default Gateway respond to the "ping IP" command ? Yes
Check the power switch, cables and the current settings of unit.
Does the DNS Server respond to the "ping IP" command ?
No Ask the Network Administrator to check the Default Gateway and system status. No
Yes Does the unit respond to the "ping host name" command ?
Ask the Network Administrator to check the Default Gateway and system status. No
Yes Does the unit respond to the "telnet" command ?
Replace the SC and/or LANB PCB
Yes Ask the Network Administrator to verify the POP/SMTP account and system status.
133 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
4.7.2.
Testing the TCP/IP Network
It is beyond the scope of this Service Manual to cover Networking in detail, there are many excellent manuals on this subject, but we hope the information in this section will aid with your troubleshooting efforts. In most cases, the Network Administrator will be able to provide you with needed information or assistance. When encountering Network problems during an onsite service call or during the installation stage, try to isolate the steps that are not being completed so that you can quickly locate the components that don’t work. It is best to organize your troubleshooting efforts by understanding what should be happening, then you can trace the path and see where the problem is occurring. In our case, we use TCP/IP for transportation of data from one system to another, which involves a whole series of events occurring throughout a number of different layers. As with all networking, TCP/IP works better when its plugged in, therefore, start your troubleshooting by checking the Physical Connectivity first, the cable(s). In our examples, we’ll use several simple tools readily available in the DOS command-line utility for troubleshooting. There are many other utilities available for checking more detailed information, some are Free of charge, others are available for a nominal fee. 1. System Diagram Model Ask the customer to provide you with the Pre-Installation Information form, that was filled out by the Network Administrator. A description or system diagram for the unit, including its physical address, email server and DNS server is required. Network Configuration Domain Name: labo.mgcs.com
Network D PC Client [210.232.71.18] js2.labo.mgcs.com WAN
SMTP/POP DNS Server Server sv2.labo.mgcs.com [192.168.1.2]
Network A [192.168.3.0]
sv1.labo.mgcs.com [192.168.1.1]
[192.168.3.254] Router (R1)
[192.168.1.253] Network B [192.168.1.0]
"ping"
PC Client [192.168.1.4] ec5.labo.mgcs.com
Hub PC Client [192.168.3.4] ec4.labo.mgcs.com
DX-600/800 [192.168.3.5] ef1.labo.mgcs.com
Network C [192.168.4.0]
PC Client [192.168.4.1] fmrt7.labo.mgcs.com
134 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
2. Checking the Current Configuration Print the current unit Internet Parameters configuration. Locate a PC connected to the same Subnet Mask as the unit, then from the DOS Prompt, type the following command-line utility: "ipconfig /all" for Windows 98/Me/XP/2000/NT. Verify that the displayed Network configuration on the PC, matches the following Internet Parameter settings of the unit: Default Gateway IP Address: DNS Server IP Address: Subnet Mask: (whether it is valid) For Windows 98 / Me / XP / 2000 / NT The following example shows the output after you type "ipconfig /all" at a command prompt: C:\>ipconfig /all Windows NT IP Configuration Host Name DNS Servers Node Type NetBIOS Scope ID IP Routing Enabled. WINS Proxy Enabled NetBIOS Resolution Uses DNS
: ec4.labo.mgcs.com : 192.168.1.1 : Hybrid : : No : No : No
Ethernet adapter IBMFE1 Description
: : IBM 100/10 EtherJet PCI Adapter
Physical Address DHCP Enabled IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Primary WINS Server
: 00-04-AC-EE-9C-E8 : No : 192.168.3.4 : 255.255.255.0 : 192.168.3.254 : 192.168.3.18
From the above examples, you know the Network configuration for the specified Subnet Mask is as follows: IP Address: 192.168.3.4; Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0; Default Gateway (Default Router IP Address): 192.168.3.254; DNS Server: 192.168.1.1 and the Domain Name: labo.mgcs.com (obtained from the Host Name). 3. Using "PING" to Test Physical Connectivity The Packet Internet Groper (PING) is a command-line tool included with every Microsoft TCP/IP client (any DOS or Windows client with the TCP/IP protocol installed). PING is a simple utility that is used to send a test packet to a specified IP Address or Hostname, then, if everything is working properly, the packet is echoed back (returned). Sample command-line PINGing and parameters are shown below. There are several available options that can be specified with the PING command. However, for our examples, we will use two options (-n and -w) which are commonly used when the response from the destination location is too long. -n count : -w timeout :
The number of echo requests that the command should send. The default is four. Specifies the period PING will wait for the reply before deciding that the host is not responding.
135 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
PINGing the Unit C:\WINDOWS>ping ef1.labo.mgcs.com Pinging ef1.labo.mgcs.com [192.168.3.5] with 32 bytes of data: Reply from 192.168.3.5: bytes=32 time=5ms TTL=253 Reply from 192.168.3.5: bytes=32 time=4ms TTL=253 Reply from 192.168.3.5: bytes=32 time=4ms TTL=253 Reply from 192.168.3.5: bytes=32 time=4ms TTL=253
PINGing the Default Gateway (Default Router IP Address) C:\WINDOWS>ping 192.168.3.254 Pinging 192.168.3.254 with 32 bytes of data: Reply from 192.168.3.254: bytes=32 time=5ms TTL=253 Reply from 192.168.3.254: bytes=32 time=4ms TTL=253 Reply from 192.168.3.254: bytes=32 time=4ms TTL=253 Reply from 192.168.3.254: bytes=32 time=4ms TTL=253
PINGing the SMTP/POP Server C:\WINDOWS>ping sv2.labo.mgcs.com Pinging sv2.labo.mgcs.com [192.168.1.2] with 32 bytes of data: Reply from 192.168.1.2: bytes=32 time=5ms TTL=253 Reply from 192.168.1.2: bytes=32 time=5ms TTL=253 Reply from 192.168.1.2: bytes=32 time=5ms TTL=253 Reply from 192.168.1.2: bytes=32 time=5ms TTL=253
If for some reason, the physical connection is missing, the echo reply will not be received from the destination and the following output is displayed: C:\WINDOWS>ping fmrt7.labo.mgcs.com Pinging fmrt7.labo.mgcs.com [192.168.4.1] with 32 bytes of data: Request timed out. Request timed out. Request timed out. Request timed out. Ping statistics for 192.168.4.1: Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 0, Lost = 4 (100% loss), Approximate round trip times in milli-seconds: Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 0ms, Average = 0ms
136 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
If the physical destination is far and it’s connected by WAN (Wide Area Network), the PING option command default value must be changed to compensate for the expected delayed response. e.g. -n 10 -w 2000
: :
The number of echo requests that the command should send. Specifies the period PING will wait for the reply before deciding that the host is not responding. C:\WINDOWS>ping js2.labo.mgcs.com -n 10 -w 2000 Pinging js2.labo.mgcs.com [210.232.71.18] with 32 bytes of data: Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=633ms TTL=252 Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=645ms TTL=252 Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=810ms TTL=252 Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=455ms TTL=252 Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=645ms TTL=252 Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=633ms TTL=252 Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=677ms TTL=252 Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=703ms TTL=252 Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=633ms TTL=252 Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=633ms TTL=252
4. Tracing a Packet Route Another useful command-line utility is TRACERT, which is used to verify the route a packet takes to reach its destination. The result shows each router crossed and how long it took to get through each particular router to reach the specified destination. The time it takes to get through a particular router is calculated three times and displayed for each router hop along with the IP Address of each router crossed. If a FQDN (Fully Qualified Domain Name) is available, it will be displayed as well. This utility is useful for two diagnostic purposes: a. To detect whether a particular router is malfunctioning along a known path. For example, if you know that packets on a network always go through London to get from New York to Berlin, but the communication is failing. A TRACERT to the Berlin address shows all the hops up to the point where the router in London should respond. If it does not respond, the time values are shown with an asterisk (*), indicating the packet timed out. b. To determine whether a router is slow and needs to be upgraded or additional routers should be installed on the network. You can determine this by simply comparing the time it takes for a packet to get through a particular router. If its return time is significantly higher than the other routers, it should be upgraded. To use this utility, from the DOS command-line, type: tracert Tracing the Route to SMTP/POP Server C:\WINDOWS>tracert sv2.labo.mgcs.com Tracing route to sv2.labo.mgcs.com [192.168.1.2] over a maximum of 30 hops: 1 2
4 ms 4 ms
2 ms 5 ms
2 ms 192.168.3.254 5 ms sv2.labo.mgcs.com [192.168.1.2]
Trace complete.
137 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
5. Managing Network Route Tables In the simplest case a router connects two network segments. In this model, the system used to join the two segments needs to know only about these segments. The routing table for router R1 in this case is simple; the following table shows its key routes: Network Address 192.168.3.0 192.168.1.0
Netmask 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0
Gateway 192.168.3.254 192.168.1.253
Interface 192.168.3.254 192.168.1.253
When the Unit at 192.168.3.5 attempts to communicate with the Unit at 192.168.1.x, IP performs the ANDing process to find two things: The local network ID is 192.168.3.0, and the destination network ID is not. This means, that the destination host is not on the local network. IP, is responsible to find a route to the remote network, and therefore, it consults the routing table. Here, the local host normally determines that the next step in the route is the Default Gateway, and sends the packet to router R1. The router R1, receives the packet. After determining that the packet is for another host and not the router itself, it checks the routing table. It finds the route to 192.168.1.0 and sends the packet through the interface to the Unit at 192.168.1.x, which receives the packet. This is a simple route that took only a single hop. When another network is added as the number of hosts grows, it gets complicated, and the systems on the most distant networks cannot communicate. When the router receives a packet in this case, it cannot find a route to the remote network. It then discards the packet and a message indicating "destination host unreachable" is sent to the originator. Here, is where the ROUTE command-line utility is useful when dealing with more than two networks, and is used by Administrators to statically manage a route table by adding, deleting, changing and clearing the route table. It has a number of options that are used to manipulate the routing tables, some are shown below: • MASK If this switch is present, the next parameter is interpreted as the netmask parameter. • Netmask If included, specifies a sub-net mask value to be associated with this route entry. If not specified, it defaults to 255.255.255.255. • Gateway Specifies the gateway. • METRIC Specifies the metric / cost for the destination. All symbolic names used for the destination are looked up in the network database file NETWORKS. The symbolic names for the gateway are looked up the host name database file HOSTS.
138 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
When the packet does not reach the specified destination even when the physical connection is properly made, check the registered persistent routes on the same subnet as the Unit by typing "route print" in the DOS command-line. The output display is shown below: C:\WINDOWS>route print Active Routes: Network Address 0.0.0.0 127.0.0.0 192.168.3.0 192.168.3.2 192.168.3.255 224.0.0.0 255.255.255.255
Netmask 0.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.255 255.255.255.255 224.0.0.0 255.255.255.255
Gateway Address 192.168.3.254 127.0.0.1 192.168.3.2 127.0.0.1 192.168.3.2 192.168.3.2 192.168.3.2
Interface 192.168.3.2 127.0.0.1 192.168.3.2 127.0.0.1 192.168.3.2 192.168.3.2 192.168.3.2
Metric 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
6. Host Name Query on DNS Server Windows XP/2000/NT 4.0 also has a tool that enables you to test DNS to verify that it is working properly. This utility is not available on Windows 98/Me. From the DOS command-line, type "NSLOOKUP" to display the following output: C:\>nslookup Default Server: sv1.labo.mgcs.com Address: 192.168.1.1
NS(Name Server) Record in Domain From the DOS command-line, type "Is -t NS " to display the following output: > ls -t NS labo.mgcs.com. [sv1.labo.mgcs.com.] labo.mgcs.com. NS server = sv1.labo.mgcs.com
MX(Mail Exchange) Record in Domain From the DOS command-line, type "Is -t MX " to display the following output: > ls -t MX labo.mgcs.com [sv1.labo.mgcs.com] labo.mgcs.com. MX
10 sv2.labo.mgcs.com
A (Address) Record in Domain From the DOS command-line, type "Is -t A " to display the following output: > ls -t A labo.mgcs.com [sv1.labo.mgcs.com] labo.mgcs.com. NS sv1 A sv2 A ec5 A A ec4 A ef1
server = sv1.labo.mgcs.com 192.168.1.1 192.168.1.2 192.168.1.4 192.168.3.4 192.168.3.5
(To leave from this menu, type "exit" on the command-line.)
139 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
7. Testing Unit Using the TELNET Command TELNET is a terminal emulation protocol. TELNET enables PCs and workstations to function as dumb terminals in sessions with hosts on internet works. From Windows 98/Me/XP/2000/NT, use the TELNET to test the communication of TCP/IP and SMTP Protocol manually to the Unit. This method eliminates the SMTP Server. For better understanding, type "telnet" in the DOS Command-line to bring up the Telnet screen. Then, click on the Terminal menu and on Preferences, check the "Local Echo" and "Block Cursor" radio dials and click on the OK button. Click on the Connect menu, then click on Remote System. Enter "25" in the "Port:" field and click on Connect button. For example, C:\WINDOWS>telnet telnet to ef1.labo.mgcs.com[192.168.3.5] 220 ef1.labo.mgcs.com DP18xx V.xx helo 250 Hello mail from:test 250 Sender OK rcpt to:[email protected] 250 Receipient OK data 354 Email, end with "CRLF . CR LF" [Press the Enter Key] Panasonic Internet Fax test test [Press the Enter Key] [Press the Enter Key] [Press the Enter Key] 250 OK, Mail accept quit 221 Closing transaction channel
140 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
4.8.
Information Codes Table (For Facsimile)
Code 001
Mode RCV COPY
002
RCV COPY
007
RCV COPY
008 010
RCV COPY
011
STANDBY
017 030
XMT
031
045
XMT COPY STANDBY RCV COPY STANDBY RCV COPY STANDBY
060
041
043
Fax Information Codes Phase Description of Problem Cause C, D Leading edge of the recording Recording paper jam. paper fails to reach the Timing Timing Sensor abnormal. Sensor. (1st Cassette) C, D Leading edge of the recording Recording paper jam. paper fails to reach the Timing Timing Sensor abnormal. Sensor. (2nd Cassette) C, D 1. Leading edge of the recording Recording paper jam. paper fails to reach the Paper Paper Exit Sensor abnormal. Exit Sensor. 2. Recording paper has not completely passed the Paper Exit Sensor. Paper cassette is opened while Paper cassette is opened. paper is feeding. B, C No recording paper. No recording paper or paper is not set properly. No Paper Sensor is defective. B, C Paper Cassette is not installed Connector is not installed properly. properly. Incorrect paper size loaded in the Paper size is incorrect. Paper Cassette. B Read Point Sensor does not go Document is not set properly. ON within 10 seconds after the Defective Read Point Sensor. document starts feeding. C Transmitting document was longer The document may jam. than 2 meter (or 78.7 in). Defective Read Point Sensor. B, C, D Out of toner. No toner. Defective Toner Sensor. B, C, D Low toner.
Toner is getting low. Defective Toner Sensor.
-
No Toner Cartridge.
-
A
Printer Cover is open.
061
-
A
ADF Door is open.
400
XMT
B
T1 timer (35 ± 5 sec.) elapsed without detecting 300 bps signal.
Toner Cartridge has not been installed. Defective Toner Sensor (Cartridge Sensor). Cover is not firmly closed. Connectors are not firmly connected. Door is not firmly closed. Connectors are not firmly connected. Wrong number is dialed and the START button is pushed. Telephone line is disconnected while dialing. SC PCB (Modem) or MJR PCB are defective. Receiver is defective. (It may only be transmitting CED)
141 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
Code 401
Mode XMT
402
XMT
403
RCV (Polling)
404
XMT
405
XMT
406
RCV (Password Comm.)
407
XMT
408
XMT
409
XMT
410
RCV
411
RCV (Polling)
412
G3 RX
Fax Information Codes Phase Description of Problem Cause B DCN was returned from receiver Your machine’s ID Number is not while transmitter is waiting for CFR programmed. or FTT. Possible incompatibility or incorrect Password. B DCN was returned from receiver Receiver working in non-CCITT mode while transmitter is waiting for only. (Possible incompatibility) NSF/DIS. B Transmitter had no polling "POLLED=ON" (polling XMT ready) is function. not set at the transmitter. Document to be transmitted is not placed at the transmitter. B Transmitter sent NSS (or DCS) Receiver is defective. (Modem, MJR followed by TCF three times, but PCB, etc.) the receiver did not respond. (CFR SC PCB or MJR PCB are defective. or FTT is usually returned) Receiver disconnects line during first NSS (or DCS) is transmitted. B Transmitter received FTT after it Line quality is poor. (TCF is damaged transmitted TCF at 2400bps. due to line noise) Received RTN after Receiver is defective. (Modem, etc.) communicating at 2400 bps. SC PCB or MJR PCB are defective. B XMT-Password mismatched. XMT, RCV password does not match. RCV-Password mismatched. Last 4 digits of TSI does not match with Selective RCV incomplete. the last 4 digits of ONE-TOUCH, ABBR telephone number. D Transmitter received no response Receiver is defective. (No paper, paper after it transmitted post message, jamming, etc.) such as EOP, MPS, EOM, etc...or Receiver ceased receiving because of received DCN. excessive error. (Line quality is poor) SC PCB (Modem) or MJR PCB are defective. D Transmitter received RTN after it Receiver receives data with error. (Line transmitted EOP, MPS, or EOM. quality is poor) Receiver is defective. (Modem, etc.) SC PCB or MJR PCB are defective. D Transmitter receives PIN after it Receiver receives data with error due to transmitted a post message, such poor line quality, and receiving operator as EOP, MPS, EOM, etc. requests voice contact. Receiver is defective. (Modem, etc.) SC PCB or MJR PCB are defective. D Received DCN while waiting for Interface or line is faulty. post command. (EOP, MPS, EOM, Transmitter is defective. etc.) B Received DCN after transmitting Transmitter is not ready for polling NSC. communication. Password does not match between transmitter and receiver. B, D No response within 12 seconds in Transmitter is defective. NSS/DCS/MPS wait state. (After SC PCB is defective. transmitting FTT)
142 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
Code 414
415
416
417
418
420
421 422 427 434
436 456
490
494
495
501
Fax Information Codes Mode Phase Description of Problem Cause RCV B No response received after Password does not match between (Polling) transmitting 3rd NSC. transmitter and receiver. Transmitter is defective. (No original, document jam, etc.) XMT B Remote side attempted to receive Inform the remote side that your (Polling) message from your machine in machine does not have the polling polling communication. transmission feature. RCV D Receiver did not detect post Transmitter is defective. command, such as EOP, MPS, Line quality is poor. (RTC signal is EOM, etc. distorted due to line noise) SC PCB or MJR PCB are defective. RCV C Receiver returned RTN in Line quality is poor. (There are response to post message. excessive errors in received data) SC PCB or MJR PCB are defective. RCV C Receiver transmitted PIN in Line quality is poor. (There are response to PRI-Q from excessive errors in received data) transmitter. (Transmitting operator SC PCB or MJR PCB are defective. requests voice contact) RCV B T1 timer (35 sec.) elapsed without There is wrong incoming call. detecting 300 bps signal. (Non-facsimile communication) Transmitter is defective. SC PCB or MJR PCB are defective. RCV B Busy Tone is detected after Remote station disconnected the line. sending NSF Signal. Wrong number is dialed. XMT B Content of NSF (or DIS) or NSC There is an incompatibility. (or DTC) was invalid. G3 B DCN received to NSF/CSI/DIS The interface is incompatible. RCV transmitted. XMT or RCV B CD (response from Modem) did Remote unit is defective. not turn OFF within 180 sec. after SC PCB or MJR PCB are defective. receiver detected FLAG signal. G3 RX C DCN received after transmitting Transmitter is defective or incompatible. FTT. Line quality is poor. RCV B Received relay transfer request or confidential document to distribute to an end receiving station or all confidential mailboxes are used. RCV C Sum of error lines exceeded the Line quality is poor. limit (Function Parameter No. 70) SC PCB or MJR PCB are defective. of 64 lines. RCV C Interval between two EOLs was Transmitter is defective. more than 10 sec. when receiver Line quality is poor. (EOL is damaged received message data. due to line noise) SC PCB or MJR PCB are defective. XMT C During reception, CD turned OFF Line is disconnected. RCV or continued ON for long time. Transmitter is defective. During communication, lost loop - SC PCB or MJR PCB are defective. current. XMT/ B Remote unit does not have RCV(V.34) compatible Modem.
143 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
Code 502
540 541 542 543 544 550 554 555 580
581
601 623
630
631 634
638
Fax Information Codes Mode Phase Description of Problem Cause XMT/ B, C, D During reception, CD turned OFF Line is disconnected. RCV(V.34) or continued ON for long time. Transmitter is defective. During communication, lost loop - SC PCB or MJR PCB are defective. current. XMT ECM B No response after transmitting 3rd Incompatible interface. CTC or DCN received. XMT ECM D No response after transmitting 3rd Line is faulty. EOR or received DCN. MJR PCB abnormal. XMT ECM D No response to the 3rd RR Remote unit is abnormal. transmitted or received DCN. XMT ECM D T5 timer (60 sec.) elapsed without Remote unit is abnormal. MCF. XMT ECM D Stopped Transmission after EOR Line is faulty. Transmission. MJR PCB abnormal. RCV ECM C Timer between frames in phase C Defective remote station. has elapsed. RCV ECM D Transmitted ERR after receiving Line is faulty. EOR. RCV ECM D Transmitted PIN after receiving Line is faulty and Operator Call EOR. requested by RX side. XMT B Sub-address transmission to a unit Sub-address transmission to a unit that that has their DIS bit 49 (NSF bit has no Sub-address function. 155) OFF. XMT B Sub-address Password Sub-address transmission to a unit that transmission to a unit that has their has no Sub-address function. DIS bit 50 (NSF bit 156) OFF. XMT ADF Door was opened during ADF transmission. XMT A No original was in the ADF. (Built- Operator removed the original from the in dialer engaged) ADF after dialing was completed. Original was not set properly in the ADF. XMT or RCV B Redial count over. No dial tone detected. Sensor dial tone (Polling) is not detected. (destination dependent) Busy tone is detected. (destination dependent) T1 timer (35 ± 5 sec.) elapsed without a signal from the receiver. XMT A "STOP" button was pressed during Auto Dialing. XMT B Redial count over with no Telephone line cable is disconnected. response or busy tone was not Wrong number is dialed. detected. SC or MJR PCB is abnormal. Note: U.S.A. and Canadian models will redial only once if a busy tone is not detected. XMT LAN Power turned Off with applicable Power switched off. data in memory or during Power failure occurred. communication.
144 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
Code 711
Mode RCV
712
XMT
714
XMT RCV
715
XMT
716
XMT
717
XMT
718
XMT
719
RCV
720
POP
721
POP
722
RCV
725
729
XMT POP XMT POP XMT
730
RCV
726
Fax Information Codes Phase Description of Problem Cause LAN Incorrect LDAP settings. LDAP Server Name, LDAP Login Name, LDAP Password and/or LDAP Search Base are incorrect. LAN Unknown email address replied Mail Server received an incorrect email from the Mail Server. address. (Dependent on Server’s Mail application) LAN LAN Interface error. The 10Base-T/100Base-TX cable is not Cannot logon to the LAN. connected. An unexpected LAN problem occurred. Check the LANC/LANB PCB connector. LAN TCP/IP connection timed out. Incorrect IP Address is set. Verify the IP Address, Default Router IP Address, SMTP Server IP Address. LAN Cannot logon to the LAN. Incorrect SMTP Server IP Address is set. No email application is activated on the Mail Server. LAN Incomplete SMTP Protocol Mail Server’s hard disk may be full. transmission. Mail Server is defective. LAN Page Memory Overflow occurred Check the document size and while receiving printing data. The resolution. Ask originator to re-send in a supported paper size selected within your application to print is larger than size and resolution. the paper size loaded in the cassette(s). LAN Received data via LAN is in a Ask the originator to re-send with a format that is not supported. supported file attachment: * In a TIFF-F format. * Image data conforming to A4/Letter size. LAN Unable to connect with the POP Incorrect POP Server address is set. Server. POP Server is down. LAN Unable to login to the POP Server. Incorrect User Name or Password is set. LAN Cable is disconnected. LAN Failed to obtain the Network Parameters (such as: IP Address, DHCP is not available. Subnet Mask, Default Gateway IP (Contact the Network Administrator.) Address, etc.) from the DHCP server. LAN DNS Server connection timed out. Incorrect DNS Server address is set. DNS Server is down. LAN Received an error response from Incorrect POP Server address is set. the DNS Server. Incorrect SMTP Server address is set. LAN Failed to authenticate (SMTP SMTP AUTHENTICATION, User Name AUTHENTICATION) when and/or Password are incorrect. connecting with the SMTP server. (Contact the Network Administrator.) LAN Unable to program the Internet Verify that the Fax Parameter #158 is parameters or the autodialer with set to 2: Valid. Email from a PC.
145 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
Fax Information Codes Code Mode Phase Description of Problem Cause 731 RCV LAN Dialer full while Relayed Dial buffer for manual number dialing Transmission Request was (70 stations) are being used. received. 800 Relay The machine was requested to Comm. relay a document but has no Relay Hub capability. 815 Conf. RCV Mailbox is full. 816 Conf. Polled "The received Polling Password did not match. The machine does not have Confidential Comm. capability." 825 Conf. RCV Parameter settings of the initial Conf. Polled sending station are not properly set. 870 MEM XMT Memory overflow occurred while Multi-Copy storing documents into memory.
146 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
4.9.
Diagnostic Codes (For Facsimile)
The 13-digit Diagnostic Code is provided for the service engineer to analyze how the communication was performed. The code is recorded on the Journal. Journal Example ************* -JOURNAL- ************************* DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 09:39******** NO. COMM. PAGES 01
OK
001
FILE DURATION X/R 129
00:00'42
XMT
IDENTIFICATION 123 456 789
DATE MMM-dd
TIME 01:55
DIAGNOSTIC C8649003C0000
1st digit
13th digit
- PANASONIC PANAFAX DX-800
********************************** - PANAFAX DX-800 - ****** -12345678901234567890- *******
1st Digit: Manufacturer Code -: Not used/defined Fax Diagnostic Codes Definition Data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
Manufacturer Code Casio Canon Sanyo Sharp Tamura Toshiba NEC Oki Hitachi Xerox Fujitsu Matsushita Mitsubishi Murata Ricoh
147 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
2nd Digit -: Not used/defined
Data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
Fax Diagnostic Codes Definition ID (TSI, CSI, CIG) RTN DCN Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received
STOP Button Pressed Pressed Pressed Pressed Pressed Pressed Pressed Pressed
3rd Digit -: Not used/defined
Data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
Resolution (dpi) S-Fine 400 x 400 300 x 300 -
Fax Diagnostic Codes Definition Paper Width A4 A4 A4 A4 -
148 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
4th Digit -: Not used/defined
Data
Scanning Rate 20 ms/line 5 ms/line 10 ms/line 40 ms/line 0 ms/line 20 ms/line 5 ms/line 10 ms/line 40 ms/line 0 ms/line
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
Fax Diagnostic Codes Definition Resolution Std Std Std Std Std Std Std Std Fine Fine Fine Fine Fine Fine Fine Fine
5th Digit -: Not used/defined
Data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
Fax Diagnostic Codes Definition Memory/ Deferred Comm. Dialing/RCV Non-Memory Manual Non-Memory Communication Used Manual Non-Memory Communication Auto Dialing Non-Memory Used Auto Dialing Non-Memory Auto RCV Non-Memory Used Auto RCV Non-Memory Remote RCV Non-Memory Used Remote RCV Non-Memory Manual Memory Communication Used Manual Memory Communication Auto Dialing Memory Used Auto Dialing Memory Auto RCV Memory Used Auto RCV Memory Remote RCV Memory Used Remote RCV Memory 149
Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
6th Digit -: Not used/defined Fax Diagnostic Codes Definition Data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
Polling
XMT/RCV
Selective Comm.
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
RCV RCV XMT XMT RCV RCV XMT XMT RCV RCV XMT XMT RCV RCV XMT XMT
Off Off Off Off On On On On Off Off Off Off On On On On
Password Comm. Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off On On On On On On On On
7th Digit -: Not used/defined
Data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
Sub-Address Comm. Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Fax Diagnostic Codes Definition Confidential Relayed Comm. Comm. Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Turnaround Polling Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
150 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
8th Digit -: Not used/defined
Data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
Advanced Comm. Report XMT Check & Call Memory Transfer Report XMT Check & Call Memory Transfer -
Fax Diagnostic Codes Definition Cover Sheet XMT Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
9th Digit -: Not used/defined
Data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
Short Protocol B D -
Fax Diagnostic Codes Definition Standard/ NonStandard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Non-Standard Non-Standard Non-Standard Non-Standard Non-Standard Non-Standard Non-Standard Non-Standard
151 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
10th Digit -: Not used/defined
Data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
Coding MH MR MMR MH MR MMR -
Fax Diagnostic Codes Definition ECM Yes Yes Yes -
11th Digit -: Not used/defined Fax Diagnostic Codes Definition Data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
Symbol Rate (V.34) 2400 sr 2800 sr 3000 sr 3200 sr 3429 sr -
V.34 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes -
152 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
12th Digit -: Not used/defined
Data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
Modem Speed 2400 bps 4800 bps 7200 bps 9600 bps TC 7200 bps TC 9600 bps 12000 bps 14400 bps -
Fax Diagnostic Codes Definition Modem Speed (V.34) 2400 bps 4800 bps 7200 bps 9600 bps 12000 bps 14400 bps 16800 bps 19200 bps 21600 bps 24000 bps 26400 bps 28800 bps 31200 bps 33600 bps -
13th Digit -: Not used/defined
Data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
Fax Diagnostic Codes Definition Line Status Private Line -
153 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
5 Service Modes 5.1. 5.1.1.
Service Modes (For Facsimile) Service Mode Table
The following service modes are provided to assist you in setting operational functions of the unit and determining the condition of the unit. No. Service Mode 1 Function Parameter Setting 2 3
RAM Edit Mode Print Parameter List / Reports
4
Modem Tests
5 6
Diagnostic RAM Initialization
7 8
LBP Service Mode Check & Call
9
System Maintenance
Description Allows changes to the function parameters (the home position, etc.). Factory use only. Prints the Function Parameter List, Page Memory Test, Printer Report, All Document File, Protocol Trace, Toner Order Form. Generates various binary, tonal and DTMF signals, by the modem. Performs various hardware tests. Initialize RAM and restore the default value of the function parameters. Changes the Printer Parameters. Allows input of information for Service Alert Report, Maintenance Alert Report, Toner Order Form. Used for Firmware Update and Sending a Received File during a fatal printer error.
154 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
5.1.2.
Service Mode 1 (Function Parameter Setting)
Use the following procedure to change the function parameters.
Step 1
Service Mode 1 Operation or Unit Condition Standby
LCD Display MMM-dd-yyyy
15:00 00%
2
Press “FUNCTION” and then “7”.
3
Press “MONITOR” four times, then press “*”.
4
Press “1”.
5
6
Enter the Function Parameter Number. Ex: Changing the "ALARM STATUS" -- Enter "001" and press [SET]. Press “START”.
7
Enter the new setting value. Ex: Enter "3" for Constant.
8
Press “START”. The new value will be stored and the next parameter will be displayed.
PARAMETER #002 STOP COMM.JRNL?
9
Repeat steps 4 through 7 to change other Function Parameters or Press “STOP” twice to return to standby.
MMM-dd-yyyy
SET MODE ENTER NO. OR
(1-8)
SERVICE MODE ENTER NO. OR PARAMETER (000-199) ENTER PARAMETER #_ PARAMETER ALARM STATUS?
#001
ALARM STATUS:Timer 1:OFF 2:Tmr 3:CONST ALARM STATUS:Const. 1:OFF 2:Tmr 3:CONST
15:00 00%
Note: The following buttons provide these functions in the Service Mode: “START” “V” “/\”
: : :
The new setting value is stored in the machine. Scroll the function parameter number down. Scroll the function parameter number up.
155 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
No. 000
001
002
003
004 005 006 007 008
009 010
011
012
013
014
Service Mode 1 : Function Parameter Table Parameter Selections Function MON/TEL DIAL 1 = Monitor Selects whether the machine starts to TX 2 = TEL/DIAL automatically during On-Hook dialing. Monitor : Start to TX after pressing START TEL/DIAL : Start to TX automatically ALARM STATUS 1 = OFF Selects the No Paper or No Toner alarm status. 2 = Timer (6 sec.) OFF : Alarm is disabled. 3 = Constant Timer : Alarm will shut off after 6 seconds. Constant : Alarm will not stop until "STOP" is pressed or the error is cleared/ corrected. STOP COMM. 1 = Off Selects whether the machine prompts to print the JRNL 2 = On COMM. Journal when the printout condition is set to INC and STOP is pressed during communication. CONTINUOUS 1 = Off Selects whether the Continuous Polling feature is POLL 2 = Stn (Tx only) enabled. Stn: Place the document(s) on the ADF then press the Program Key [P4] to store or add the document(s) into a polled file. (See Note 4) NUMERIC ID 1 = Off (will not accept) Selects whether the machine accepts and allows to SET 2 = On (accepts) set or change the Numeric ID. Not Used ID DISPLAY 1 = Number (Numeric ID) Selects the priority of displaying the ID. 2 = Chara (Character ID) JNL COLUMN 1 = Preset station name Selects the contents of the ID to display on the 2 = Received ID Journal. MONITOR 1 = Off Selects whether the Monitor is ON/OFF for 2 = On monitoring fax signals. (FOR SERVICE USE ONLY) DC LOOP 1 = Off (Normal) Selects a false Off Hook state for back to back 2 = On (Off Hook) communication test. TX LEVEL 00 = 0 dBm Selects the TX signal output level, 0 to -15 dBm in 1 ~ dBm steps. (Refer to Chapter 4.3.) 15 = -15 dBm RX LEVEL 1 = -43 dBm Selects the receiving sensitivity of -33/-38/-43/-48 2 = -38 dBm dBm. 3 = -33 dBm 4 = -48 dBm DTMF LEVEL 00 = 0 dBm Selects the DTMF output level, 0 to -15 dBm in 1 ~ dBm steps. 15 = -15 dBm G3 RX EQL 1 = 0 dB Selects the cable equalizer for G3 reception mode, 2 = 4 dB 0dB, 4dB, 8dB or 12dB. 3 = 8 dB 4 = 12 dB G3 TX EQL 1 = 0 dB Selects the cable equalizer for G3 transmission 2 = 4 dB mode, 0dB, 4dB, 8dB or 12dB. 3 = 8 dB 4 = 12 dB
156 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
No. Parameter 015 Not Used ~ 016 017 TX START
018 RX START
019 ITU-T V.34
020 ITU-T ECM 021 EP TONE
Service Mode 1 : Function Parameter Table Selections Function
1 = 2400 bps 2 = 4800 bps 3 = 7200 bps 4 = 9600 bps 5 = TC7200 bps 6 = TC9600 bps 7 = 12000 bps 8 = 14400 bps 1 = 2400 bps 2 = 4800 bps 3 = 7200 bps 4 = 9600 bps 5 = TC7200 bps 6 = TC9600 bps 7 = 12000 bps 8 = 14400 bps 1 = Off 2 = On 3 = Select 1 = Off (Invalid) 2 = On (Valid) 1 = Off (without EP Tone) 2 = On (with EP Tone)
022 SIGNAL INTERVAL
1 = 100 ms 2 = 200 ms 3 = 500 ms 023 TCF CHECK 1 = Normal (Short) 2 = Long 024 CED 1 = 1080 Hz (non ITU-T) FREQUENCY 2 = 2100 Hz 025 COMM. START- 1 = 1’st response UP 2 = 2’nd response 026 NONSTANDARD 027 SHORT PROTOCOL B 028 SHORT PROTOCOL D
1 = Off (Invalid) 2 = On (Valid) 1 = Off (Invalid) 2 = On (Valid) 1 = Off (Invalid) 2 = On (Valid)
029 REMOTE DIAGNOSTICS
1 = Off (will not accept) 2 = On (accepts)
Selects the transmission modem start speed, 14400/ 12000/TC9600/TC7200/9600/7200/4800/2400 bps. Note: This parameter is applicable only when communicating with regular G3 machines. When communicating with Super G3 (V.34) machines, use Parameter No. 32. Selects the reception modem start speed, 14400/ 12000/TC9600/TC7200/9600/7200/4800/2400 bps. Note: This parameter is applicable only when communicating with regular G3 machines. When communicating with Super G3 (V.34) machines, use Parameter No. 33. Selects whether the ITU-T V.34 is Off, On or Select. Select: Select whether the ITU-T V.34 is Off or On, when entering Phone Book Dialing Numbers or Manual Number Dialing. Select the ECM mode. Selects whether to add the echo protect tone on V.29 mode. (Used when Echo Suppression is disabled.) On : Add Off : Do not add Selects the time interval between the receiving signal and the transmitting signal. Selects the TCF check interval Long/Short Selects the CED frequency 2100/1080 Hz Selects the communication start-up condition (XMT and Polling). (Used when Echo Suppression is disabled.) Selects own mode (Panafax mode). Selects the short protocol mode. Selects the short protocol mode. When activated, it allows the machine to automatically store the modem speed for each Auto Dial Number. Selects whether the machine accepts Remote Diagnostics from the service station.
157 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
No. 030
031 032 033 034
035
036 037
038 039
040
041
042 043
044
045
046
047
048 049
Service Mode 1 : Function Parameter Table Parameter Selections Function CED & 300 bps 1 = 75 ms Selects the pause interval between the CED and the 2 = 1 sec 300 bps signal. (Used when Echo Suppression is disabled.) RTC = EOLx12 1 = Off (EOLx6) Selects the RTC signal, EOLx6 or EOLx12. 2 = On (EOLx12) V34 TX START 2400-33600bps Selects the transmission modem start speed for V.34 communication, 33600-2400 bps. V34 RX START 2400-33600bps Selects the receiving modem start speed for V.34 communication, 33600-2400 bps. V34 TX Symbol 2400-3429sr Selects the transmission symbol rate for V.34, 3429/ Rate 3200/3000/2800/2400 sr. Press “V” or “/\ “ to select the symbol rate. V34 RX Symbol 2400-3429sr Selects receiving symbol rate for V.34, 3429/3429/ Rate 3200/3000/2800/2400 sr. Press “V” or “/\ “ to select the symbol rate. Not Used PROTOCOL 1 = Off (not displayed) Selects whether to display the modem speed during DISPLAY 2 = On (displayed) communication. Press “V” or “/\ “ to display. Not Used FLASH TIME 5 = 50 ms Selects the pause interval before activating the Flash ~ key. 100 = 1000 ms E/F TIME 5 = 50 ms Selects the pause interval before activating the Flash (Except for USA ~ key. and Canada) 100 = 1000 ms PAUSE TIME 1 = 1 sec. Selects the pause interval from 1 sec. ~ 10 sec. for ~ dialing through a switchboard or for international 10 = 10 sec. calls. Not Used REDIAL 0 = no waiting Selects the redial interval from 0 to 15 minutes in 1 INTERVAL ~ minute steps. 15 = 15 minutes REDIAL COUNT 0 = no redial Selects the redial count from 0 to 15 times in 1 step ~ intervals. 15 = 15 times Note: In order to comply with the requirements TBR21 in the EC destinations, do not select 15 times. RING DETECT 1 = 1 ring Selects the ring detection count from 1 to 9 rings in 1 COUNT ~ ring step intervals. 9 = 9 rings ON-HOOK TIME 0 = 0 sec. Selects the on-hook time between sequential ~ communication calls in 1 second step intervals. 90 = 90 sec. RESPONSE 1 = 1 sec. Selects the waiting interval for the response after WAIT ~ completing the dialing. 90 = 90 sec. Not Used
158 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
No. Parameter 050 RING DETECT MODE 051 Not Used 052 PULSE RATE 053 Not Used 054 055 BUSY TONE CHECK 056 DIAL TONE CHECK (Except for USA and Canada) 057 DC LOOP CHECK (Except for USA and Canada) 058 COMM.JRNL +IMAGE 059 CONF. RCV REPORT ON 060 VERSION 061 062
063 064
065
066
067 068
069
Service Mode 1 : Function Parameter Table Selections Function 1 = Normal Selects the quality of ringer detection. Use if the line 2 = Rough signal is out of regulation, set to "Rough" so that the unit may detect the ringing signals. 1 = 10 pps 2 = 20 pps
Selects the dial pulse rate 10/20 pps.
1 = Off 2 = On 1 = Off 2 = On
Selects whether to detect the Busy Tone.
1 = Off (will not check) 2 = On (checks)
Selects whether the unit checks the DC Loop during communication.
Selects whether to detect dial tone before dialing the telephone number.
1 = Off (without image) Selects whether the machine prints the COMM. 2 = On (with image) Journal with image. 1 = Off 2 = On Indicates the Host software version. TX/RX/PRT/CPY TX/RX/PRT/CPY Displays the transmitted, received, total printed and COUNTER copied document count. PRINT 1 = Off Selects whether to print in the Fax Parameter List, COUNTER 2 = On the counter information that is displayed in the Function Parameter No. 61. Not Used SILENT 01 = 1 sec. Select silent detection timeout time (TAM I/F). DETECTION ~ TIME OUT 60 = 60 sec. SILENT 01 = 1 sec. Select ring detection integration time (TAM I/F). INTEGRATION ~ TIME 10 = 10 sec. RING COUNT 01 = 1 sec. Select ring detection count 1 to 99 times in one step (TAM) ~ intervals on TAM I/F mode. 99 = 99 sec. Not Used NYSE FAX 1 = Off Selects whether the machine will forward the FORWARD 2 = On incoming and outgoing faxes to a specified station. (For USA and Canada only) Note: Once this parameter is activated, Fax Forwarding via Fax Parameter 054 is automatically disabled. NYSE LOCAL 1 = INC Selects the printing condition for the incoming faxes PRINT 2 = ON (Always) after FAX Forwarding. INC. : Prints only if FAX Forwarding fails. ON : Always prints.
159 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
No. 070
071
072
073 074 075
076 077
Service Mode 1 : Function Parameter Table Parameter Selections Function 1. Selects the line disconnect condition during LINE ERROR 1 = 128 lines reception. If the number of line errors exceed this 2 = 256 lines setting, the unit will disconnect the line. 3 = 512 lines 2. Selects the transmit condition of RTP/PIP or RTN/ 4 = 1024 lines PIN. 5 = 2048 lines (Available if No.73 Error Detect is set to "LINES") 6 = Off (See Note 1) (will not disconnect line) TOTAL ERROR 1 = 5% Selects the transmit condition of RTP/PIP or RTN/ 2 = 10% PIN. 3 = 15% (Available if No.73 Error Detect is set to "RATE".) 4 = 20% (See Note 2) CONTINUOUS 1 = Off (unlimited) Selects the continuous total error criteria of Off/3/6 or ERROR 2 = 3 lines/STD 12 lines in Standard mode. If continuous total error 3 = 6 lines/STD exceeds this setting, the unit will transmit RTN/PIN. 4 = 12 lines/STD (Available if No.73 Error Detect is set to "RATE".) ERROR 1 = Lines Selects the error detect condition Lines/Rate. DETECT 2 = Rate RTN RECEIVE 1 = Disconnect Selects whether to disconnect the phone line or 2 = Continue continue when "RTN" is received. CODING 1 = MH (MH only) Selects the coding scheme. 2 = MR (MH or MR) 3 = MMR (MH or MR or MMR) Not Used RX JAM 1 = Off (unlimited) Selects the maximum length of a received LENGTH 2=2m document that can be printed. 3=8m Not Used
078 079 080 DOC. TOP FEED
081 DOC. END FEED 082 JAM LENGTH
-5.0 mm ~ +5.0 mm -5.0 mm ~ +5.0 mm 1=1m 2=2m 3=8m 4 = Unlimited
Adjusts the distance between the scanning sensor ON position and the scanning start position. Adjusts the distance between the scanning sensor OFF position and the scanning end position. Selects the maximum length of the original that can be scanned.
083 Not Used 084 LINE AS NO PAPER
1 = Ring (ring) 2 = Busy (keep line busy)
Selects whether to ring or send a busy tone to the remote station when the recording paper runs out or the unit cannot receive because of any trouble.
085 Not Used 086 REDUCTION FINE
1 = Off 2 = On
Selects whether the resolution is preset to Fine, when sending with reduction B4→A4. (For B4 Scanning Model only)
160 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
No. 087 088 089
Service Mode 1 : Function Parameter Table Parameter Selections Function DARKER LEVEL 0 = Lightest Contrast Selects the contrast level. ~ 0← →15 NORMAL 15 = Darkest Contrast Lightest← →Darkest LEVEL LIGHTER LEVEL Not Used
090 091 092 SMOOTHING 093 ~ 109 110 111 112
1 = Off 2 = On
Selects whether the smoothing function is available.
Not Used
MAC ADDRESS Not Used INSERT EMAIL 1 = Off TXT 2 = On
113 Not Used 114 SYMBOL SET 115 TIME ZONE
116 OVERWRITE WARNING
1 = Standard 2 = Extended 1 = Scroll 2 = Direct
1 = Yes 2 = No
117 Not Used ~ 119 120 FORWARD ALL 1 = Off COM. 2 = On (Except for USA and Canada)
121 FAC LOCAL 1 = INC PRINT 2 = ON (Always) (Except for USA and Canada) 122 LDAP 1 = Off 2 = On
Indicates the MAC Address. Selects whether the Text Template (email message) is programmable and added on all email sent in the message body above the top line of text. (Up to 40 characters Programmed in the User Parameters.) Note: After enabling this feature, aside from entering the text in the User Parameters, it also has to be activated in each Auto Dial Number before it will take effect. It does not work for Direct Dialed Numbers. Selects whether the extended symbols other than "%" is available for Internet Parameters entry. Selects the setting method for Time Zone. Scroll : Allows using "Scroll Keys" to scroll through the Time Zone Table. Direct : Allows you to input the Time Zone directly, (*) key to be used as a switch between +/-. Selects whether the Overwrite Warning is included on the Internet FAX Result Receipt when programming the Auto Dialer via email.
Selects whether the machine will forward the incoming and outgoing faxes to a specified station. Note: If Fax Parameter 054 is activated, Fax Forwarding is enable. Selects the printing condition for the incoming faxes after FAX Forwarding. INC. : Prints only if FAX Forwarding fails. ON : Always prints. When LDAP is used, specialize characters may be displayed as different characters. Available from May production.
161 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
No. Parameter 123 Not Used ~ 129 130 BUSY-ACK TIMING 131
132
133
134
135 ~ 199
Service Mode 1 : Function Parameter Table Selections Function
• In Busy • After Busy • While Busy CMD RCV GRD 1 min. TIMER ~ 15 min. PRT DATA 1 min. TIMER ~ 15 min. COLLATION 1 = Off (PRT) 2 = On 3 = Auto COLLATION 1 = Off (PC I/F) 2 = On 3 = Auto Not Used
Selects the signal timing between the BUSY and ACK signal in Printer Interface Mode. Selects the Guard Timer between each GDI Command in Printer Interface Mode. Selects the Guard Timer between each GDI Data Frame in Printer Interface Mode. Selects the Print Collation in Printer Interface Mode. When “Auto” is selected, print collation will operate according to the setting in Fax Parameter #65. Selects the Print Collation in PC Interface Mode. When “Auto” is selected, print collation will operate according to the setting in Fax Parameter #65.
Note 1: Function Parameter No. 070 (Line Error) - Transmit condition of RTP/PIP or RTN/PIN
Signal MCF/PIP RTP/PIP RTN/PIN
1:128 0-31 32-63 64-127
2:256 0-63 64-127 128-255
Setting 3:512 4:1024 0-127 0-255 128-255 256-511 256-511 512-1023
5:2048 0-511 512-1023 1024-2047
6:Off Always -
Note 2: Function Parameter No. 071 (Total Error) - Transmit condition of RTP/PIP or RTN/PIN
Signal MCF/PIP RTP/PIP RTN/PIN
1:5% 0-2 3-4 5-
Setting 2:10% 3:15% 0-4 0-7 5-9 8-14 1015-
4:20% 0-9 10-19 20-
Note 3: The default setting of parameters depends on the destination’s specifications or regulations. Print the Function Parameter List to confirm the default settings. Note 4: Continuous Polling (Station Mode) This feature allows you to store or add documents into a polled file in memory. To enable the Continuous Polling feature set Function Parameter No. 003 to "2:Station". The Program Key [P4] will be assigned with the "Store-4-Polling" name automatically and cannot be changed. To prepare the document(s) to be polled, simply place the document(s) on the ADF and then press the Program Key [P4] to store or add the document(s) into a polled file. (Note: If a regular polled file ([FUNCTION][3][2]) is stored in memory, the Program Key [P4] for Continuous Polling will not be accepted.) 162 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
5.1.3.
Service Mode 3 (Printout of Lists, Reports and Test Results)
From this Service Mode you can print the Function Parameter List, Page Memory Test, Printer Report, All Document File, Protocol Trace and the Toner Order Form.
5.1.3.1.
Function Parameter List
A list of all Function Parameters can be printed by the following procedure.
Step 1
Service Mode 3 - Function Parameter List Operation or Unit Condition Standby
LCD Display
MMM-dd-yyyy
2
Press “FUNCTION” and then “7”.
3
Press “MONITOR” four times, then press “*”.
4
Press “3”.
5
Press “START”.
6
After printing is completed, the unit returns to the display in step 3.
SERVICE MODE ENTER NO. OR
7
Press “STOP” to return to standby.
MMM-dd-yyyy
SET MODE ENTER NO. OR
15:00 00% (1-8)
SERVICE MODE ENTER NO. OR PRINTOUT (1-7) 1:FUNC. PARAM. LIST * PRINTING * FUNC. PARAMETER LIST
15:00 00%
163 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
Function Parameter List (Sample) *************** -FUNCTION PARAMETER- ************** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 12:07 *** P.01 000 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009
MON/TEL DIAL:[Monitor] Monitor ALARM STATUS:[Timer] Timer STOP COMM.JRNL:[On] On CONTINUOUS POLL:[Off] Off NUMERIC ID SET:[On] On --------ID DISPLAY:[Chara] Chara JNL COLUMN:[Station] Station MONITOR:[Off] Off DC LOOP:[Off] Off
050 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 059
RING DET MODE:[Normal] Normal ---------PULSE RATE:[10pps] 10pps ------------------BUSY TONE CHECK:[On] On ------------------COMM. JRNL +IMAGE:[On] On CONF.RCV REPORT:[On] On
010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019
TX LEVEL:[-11dBm] -11dBm RX LEVEL:[-43dBm] -43dBm DTMF LEVEL:[-5dBm] -5dBm G3 RX EQL:[ 0dB] 0dB G3 TX EQL:[ 0dB] 0dB ----------------TX START:[14400bps ] 14400bps RX START:[14400bps ] 14400bps ITU-T V34:[On] On
060 061 062 063 064 065 066 067 068 069
VERSION: DX-800 AAV11100AU TX/RX/PRT/CPY:000050/000058/000074/000001 PRINT COUNTER:[Off] Off ---------SILENT DET.T.OUT:[60] 60 SILENT INT. TIME:[5sec] 5sec RING COUNT(TAM):[5] 5 ---------NYSE FAX FORWARD:[Off] Off NYSE LOCAL PRINT:[Inc] Inc
020 021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029
ITU-T ECM:[On] On EP TONE:[Off] Off SIG. INTERVAL:[500ms] 500ms TCF CHECK:[Normal] Normal CED FREQ.:[2100Hz] 2100Hz COMM. START-UP:[1'st] 1'st NON-STANDARD:[On] On SHORT PROTOCOL B:[On] On SHORT PROTOCOL D:[On] On REMOTE DIAG.:[On] On
070 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079
LINE ERROR:[128] 128 TOTAL ERROR:[ 10] 10 CONTI. ERROR:[Off] Off ERROR DETECT:[Rate] Rate RTN RECEIVE:[Discon] Discon CODING:[MMR] MMR ---------RX JAM LENGTH:[Off] Off -------------------
030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039
CED & 300bps:[75ms] 75ms RTC=EQL x 12:[Off] Off V34 TX START:[33600bps] 33600bps V34 RX START:[33600bps] 33600bps V34 TX SR:[3429sr] 3429sr V34 RX SR:[3429sr] 3429sr --------PROTOCOL DISPLAY:[Off] Off --------FLASH TIME:[500ms] 500ms
080 081 082 083 084 085 086 087 088 089
DOC TOP FEED:[0.0mm] 0.0mm DOC END FEED:[0.0mm] 0.0mm JAM LENGTH:[ 2 m] 2 m ---------LINE AS NOPAPER:[Ring] Ring ------------------DARKER LEVEL:[4] 4 NORMAL LEVEL:[8] 8 LIGHTER LEVEL:[12] 12
040 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 048 049
--------PAUSE TIME:[3sec] 3 sec --------REDIAL INTERVAL:[3min] 3 min REDIAL COUNT:[5] 5 RING DET. COUNT:[2] 2 ON-HOOK TIME:[5sec] 5 sec RESPONSE WAIT:[55sec] 55 sec -----------------
090 091 092 093 094 095 096 097 098 099
------------------SMOOTHING:[On] On ----------------------------------------------------------------
Note:The power must be reset for the new parameter settings to take effect. - PANASONIC ******************************** - PANAFAX DX-800 - ******* - 12345678901234567890 -*********
164 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
Function Parameter List (Sample) ************* -FUNCTION PARAMETER- ************* DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 12:07 ***P.02 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119
MAC ADRESS:0800230078DE ---------INSERT EMAIL TXT:[Off] Off ---------SYMBOL SET:[Std] Std TIME ZONE:[Scroll] Scroll OVERWRITE WARNING:[Yes] Yes ---------PRT FWD COMM JNL:[Inc] Inc ----------
160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139
BUSY-ACK TIMING:[In Busy] In Busy CMD RCV GRD TIMER:[3min] 3min PRT DATA TIMER:[3min] 3min COLLATION(PRT):[Off] Off COLLATION (PC):[Auto] Auto ----------------------------------------------
180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Note:The power must be reset for the new parameter settings to take effect. -PANASONIC ******************************** -PANAFAX DX-800- ****** -12345678901234567890- ***********
Note: 1. [ ] - Factory Default 2. The contents of the Function Parameter List may vary depending on the destination’s regulations. 3. “ * ” mark will be shown on the left side of number when setting was changed from default.
165 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
5.1.3.2.
Page Memory Test
A test pattern prints out for checking the page memory and the printer mechanism using the following procedure.
Step 1 Standby
Service Mode 3 - Page Memory Test Operation or Unit Condition
LCD Display MMM-dd-yyyy
2
Press “FUNCTION” and then “7”.
3
Press “MONITOR” four times, then press “*”.
4
Press “3”.
5
Press “3” and “START”.
6
After printing is completed, the unit returns to the display in step 3.
SERVICE MODE ENTER NO. OR
7
Press “STOP” to return to standby.
MMM-dd-yyyy
SET MODE ENTER NO. OR
15:00 00% (1-8)
SERVICE MODE ENTER NO. OR PRINTOUT (1-7) 1:FUNC. PARAM. LIST * PRINTING * PAGE MEMORY TEST
15:00 00%
MMM-dd-yyyy 15:00 VERSION: DX-800 AAV1xxxxAU OPTION BOARD: MEMORY SIZE: (4MB) TX/RX/PRT/CPY:000123/000456/000789/000333 MAC ADRESS:0800230078DE SHIPMENT SET
166 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
5.1.3.3.
Printer Report
All printer errors are logged on the Printer Report which can be printed by the following procedure.
Step 1
Service Mode 3 - Printer Report Operation or Unit Condition Standby
LCD Display MMM-dd-yyyy
2
Press “FUNCTION” and then “7”.
3
Press “MONITOR” four times, then press “*”.
4
Press “3”.
5
Press “4” and “START”.
7
After printing is completed, the unit returns to the display in step 3.
SERVICE MODE ENTER NO. OR
8
Press “STOP” to return to standby.
MMM-dd-yyyy
15:00 00%
SET MODE ENTER NO. OR
(1-8)
SERVICE MODE ENTER NO. OR PRINTOUT (1-7) 1:FUNC. PARAM. LIST * PRINTING * PRINTER REPORT
15:00 00%
167 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
**************-PRINTER REPORT-********************* DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 19:02******** LAST PRINT ERROR
: MMM-dd 15:38 NO. 001-12
CUSTOMER ID
: 1234567890123456
FAX ROM VERSION
: DX-800 AAV1xxxxAU
TRANSMIT COUNTER RECEIVE COUNTER COPY COUNTER PRINT COUNTER
: : : :
PRINT ERROR
:
****************************** -
000475 000398 001083 001575 1.MMM-dd-yyyy 15:38 NO.001-12 2.MMM-dd-yyyy 10:48 NO.001-11 3.MMM-dd-yyyy 15:23 NO.004-36
PANAFAX DX-800
PANASONIC - ***** - 12345678901234567890
- ******
168 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
1. Printer Error Code Table Printer Error Code Table Error Description of Problems Code 00 No problem detected. 11 Timing Sensor did not turn ON within a certain period of time. (Original Cassette Feeder)
Cause
12
Timing Sensor did not turn ON within a certain period of time. (250 sheet Optional Cassette Feeder)
14
Timing Sensor did not turn OFF within a certain period of time.
15
Paper Exit Sensor did not turn ON within a certain period of time. Paper Exit Sensor did not turn OFF within a certain period of time. Timing Sensor detected paper while initializing the unit. Paper Exit Sensor detected paper while initializing the unit. The temperature of the Fuser Roller remained low even after the circuit was activated. Abnormally high Fuser Roller temperature after the circuit was de-activated.
16 17 18 22
23
1. Recording Paper misfeeding, Paper Feed Roller defective. 2. Drive Clutch defective. 3. Timing Sensor defective. 1. Recording Paper misfeeding, Paper Feed Roller defective. 2. Drive Clutch defective. 3. Timing Sensor defective. 1. Recording Paper Jam. 2. Timing Sensor defective. 3. Incorrect paper size setting. 1. Recording Paper Jam. 2. Paper Exit Sensor defective. 1. Recording Paper Jam. 2. Paper Exit Sensor defective. 1. Recording Paper jammed in the unit. 2. Timing Sensor defective. 1. Recording Paper jammed in the unit. 2. Paper Exit Sensor defective. 1. Fuser Unit defective. 2. SC PCB defective. 3. Power Supply Unit defective. 1. Fuser Unit defective. 2. SC PCB defective. 3. Power Supply Unit defective. 1. Fuser Unit defective. 2. SC PCB defective. 3. Power Supply Unit defective. 1. Thermistor defective (Fuser Unit). 2. SC PCB defective. 1. Thermistor defective (Fuser Unit). 2. SC PCB defective. 3. Power Supply Unit defective. 1. LSU defective.
24
The temperature of the Fuser Roller was not controlled within a certain margin.
25
Thermistor open. (See Note) Thermistor detected temperature over 392°F (200°C). (See Note) The Tetragon Motor did not reach a constant speed of 8,898 rpm (400 dpi)/13,347 rpm (600 dpi) within a specified period of time. The Tetragon Motor did not maintain a 1. LSU defective. constant speed of 8,898 rpm (400 dpi)/ 13,347 rpm (600 dpi). HSYNC signal abnormal. 1. LSU defective. 2. SC PCB defective. A/D Converter error. 1. SC PCB defective. Unit detected “No Toner Cartridge”. 1. Toner Cartridge not installed. 2. Toner Sensor defective. Unit detected “Printer Cover Open”. 1. Printer Cover is not closed. 2. ILS PCB defective.
26
31
32
36 54 61 63
169 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
Printer Error Code Table Error Description of Problems Code 64 Unit detected “No Cassette”.
Cause 1. 2. 1. 2. 1. 1.
65 Unit detected “Out of Paper”. 81 No response from LP Controller. 82 Illegal response from LP Controller.
Cassette not installed or partially open. Cassette Sensor defective. The Paper Cassette is empty. Paper Detect Sensor defective. SC PCB defective. SC PCB defective.
Note: If an 021 series Error Code occurs, 021-25 (Thermistor Open) or 021-26 (Thermistor detected temperarure over 392°F (200°C), a pre-programmed recovery safety software is activated to protect the unit and the service personnel during abnormal increase in temperature. Once activated, this program is downloaded into the LPC PC Board’s SRAM, disabling the Fuser Lamp and preventing it from turning ON again. In order to reset this circuit, please follow the procedure below. 1) Reset the LBP Fuser by using Service Mode 7-1-2 (Section 5.1.7.) and Power OFF/ON. 2) Replace the Thermistor or Fuser Unit. If the problem persists. 3) Replace the SC PCB.
170 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
2. Printer Error Detail Explanation Recording Paper Jam Detection Feed Solenoid (nADF1) (CN14, 2)
Recording Paper Size Setting
A sec
Legal
0.2
A
A4
0.2
Letter
0.2
Timing Sensor (nRSEN)
1.35s E11 Timing Sensor did not turn ON 0.55s E14 Timing Sensor did no turn OFF
4.5s
E001 will be logged when nRSEN does not go low between 0.55 sec to 4.5 sec after pADF1 goes high.
E007 will be logged when nRSEN does not go OFF between B sec to C sec after nRSENA goes ON.
B C
Recording Paper Size Setting
B sec
C sec
Legal
9.05
10.25
A4
7.48
8.68
Letter
7.00
8.20
Paper Exit Sensor Timing (nESEN) (CN7, 4)
E15 Paper Exit Sensor did not turn ON
E16 Paper Exit Sensor did not turn OFF
4.25s 3.85s 5.05s
E007 will be logged when nESEN does not go low between 3.85 sec or 5.05 sec after Timing Sensor goes low.
E007 will be logged when nESEN does not go high between D sec or E sec after nESEN goes low.
D
E
Recording Paper Size Setting
D sec
E sec
Legal
8.12
10.25
A4
6.56
8.68
Letter
6.08
8.20
171 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
Fuser Error Detection ( C) E26 will be logged.
200 E24 will be logged if Thermistor detects 180 C for more than 3 sec. (Thermostat will open.)
180
170
E23 will be logged if Thermistor detects 175 C or higher for 5 min. after Fuser Lamp is turned Off.
OFF 165
160 155
Fuser Roller Temperature
150
E24 will be logged if Thermistor detects less than 140 C for 3 sec during the print process.
70
E22 will be logged when temperature does not rise.
25 E25 will be logged when temperature does not go up at low temperature environment.
14
Approx. 30 sec Time
172 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
Laser Unit (LSU) Error Detection nPRNT Print Start
nPMON (CN69-3) Tetragon Motor ON
nPMRY (CN69-2)
Normal Condition
Tetragon Motor Ready
Motor ON
20 sec
3 sec
E31 nPMRY Tetragon Motor does not reach constant speed during wake up state.
nPMRY does not go low for more than 2 sec during 3 sec to 20 sec after nPMON goes low.
E32 nPMRY Tetragon Motor does not maintain constant speed.
nPMON
nPMRY:ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
nPMRY goes high 4 times during printing.
nVIDEO (CN68-6) Laser Timing Signal
1.7 ms (400 dpi) 1.1 ms (600 dpi)
Normal Condition
nHSYNC (CN68-2) Laser Timing Detection
E36 nHSYNC (CN68-2) Can not detect Laser Timing nHSYNC timing signal is less than 60% of nVIDEO signal.
173 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
Out of Toner Detection Toner Sensor Output Signal Status A (Enough toner in the cartridge)
Max. - min. voltage is less than 1.0V 3V
Min. voltage is more than 1.4V
Status B 2V
(Remaining toner is getting low)
Max. - min. voltage is less than 0.25V Min. voltage is less than 1.4V 1.4V Status C (Almost no toner) 1V
Mixing blade rotating cycle
Max. - min. voltage is less than 0.08V Min. voltage is less than 1.4V
0V
Toner Sensor output may change when the mixing blade passes above the Toner Sensor. Therefore the output signal has a max. voltage and min. voltage during mixing blade rotation cycle (4.6 sec.). E043 If the unit detects Status B, 10 times during printing, the machine recognizes that the remaining toner is low and the display shows "REPLACE TONER CARTRIDGE". E041 After detecting E043 and the LBP Print Available Counter Value reaches "0" (after 100 pages are printed), the unit logs E041 (OUT OF TONER). E045 If the unit detects Status C when power is On, the unit logs E045 and displays "NO CARTRIDGE". The unit will recover when detecting Status A after a new toner cartridge is installed.
174 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
5.1.3.4.
All Document Files
Print the document files from the Flash Memory.
Step 1
Service Mode 3 - All Document Files Operation or Unit Condition Standby
LCD Display MMM-dd-yyyy
2
Press “FUNCTION” and then “7”.
3
Press “MONITOR” four times, then press “*”.
4
Press “3”.
5
Press “5” and “START”.
6
After printing is completed, the unit returns to the display in step 3.
SERVICE MODE ENTER NO. OR
7
Press “STOP” to return to standby.
MMM-dd-yyyy
SET MODE ENTER NO. OR
15:00 00% (1-8)
SERVICE MODE ENTER NO. OR PRINTOUT (1-7) 1:FUNC. PARAM. LIST * PRINTING * ALL DOCUMENT FILES
15:00 00%
Note: Documents received with a Confidential Code will not be printed by this operation.
175 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
5.1.3.5.
Protocol Trace
Print a Protocol Trace Report for the previous communication.
Step 1 Standby
Service Mode 3 - Protocol Trace Operation or Unit Condition
MMM-dd-yyyy
2
Press “FUNCTION” and then “7”.
3
Press “MONITOR” four times, then press “*”.
4
Press “3”.
5
Press “6” and “START”. Note: If there were no transmission or reception mode after the power is last tured on, you cannot print the Protocol Trace Report. After printing is completed, the unit returns to the display in step 3.
6 7
LCD Display 15:00 00%
SET MODE ENTER NO. OR
(1-8)
SERVICE MODE ENTER NO. OR PRINTOUT (1-7) 1:FUNC. PARAM. LIST
Press “STOP” to return to standby.
* PRINTING * PROTOCOL TRACE
SERVICE MODE ENTER NO. OR MMM-dd-yyyy
15:00 00%
*************** PROTOCOL LOG REPORT ****************** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 16:56 ***P.01
STATUS MODE SPEED REMOTE CAPA. LOCAL CAPA.
: : : : :
OK ECM-TX (STANDARD) 9600bps 00MS/L DIS 00 CE B9 C4 80 12 TSI 2B 20 20 20 38 37 2B 2B 2B 2B 39 38 36 36 35 34 37 38 38 30 DCS 00 C6 F8 44
COMMAND LOG. REMOTE : NSF CSI DIS CFR LOCAL : TSI DCS PIX PPS-EOP -----------------------------------------------------------------REMOTE : MCF LOCAL : DCN -PANASONIC************************************ -PANAFAX DX-800- ***********-12345678901234567890-******
176 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
5.1.3.6.
Toner Cartridge Order Form
The Toner Cartridge Order Form can be printed out manually by the following procedure.
Step 1
Service Mode 3 - Toner Cartridge Order Form Operation or Unit Condition LCD Display Standby
MMM-dd-yyyy
2
Press “FUNCTION” and then “7”.
3
Press “MONITOR” four times, then press “*”.
4
Press “3”.
5
Press “7” and “START”.
6
After printing is completed, the unit returns to the display in step 3.
SERVICE MODE ENTER NO. OR
7
Press “STOP” to return to standby.
MMM-dd-yyyy
SET MODE ENTER NO. OR
15:00 00% (1-8)
SERVICE MODE ENTER NO. OR PRINTOUT (1-7) 1:FUNC. PARAM. LIST * PRINTING * TONER ORDER FORM
15:00 00%
177 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
For USA and Canada ************************************* > TONER CARTRIDGE ORDER FORM < *************************************
**** The toner supply in your facsimile machine is running low **** (1) To order a replacement Cartridge from your Authorized Dealer Panafax Corp.(2) by Phone: by Fax:
1 201 111 5555 (3) 1 201 111 4444 (4)
Thank you for your order.
Customer Name and Address ========================= Ship to:
Bill to:
Attention:
Attention:
Phone No.:
Phone No.:
Customer ID: ABC COMPANY (5)
P.O. No.(if required):
Toner Cartridge: UG-5510
(6)
Serial No.:
Quantity Required:
/ Print your name and title
/
Signature & Date
Explanation of Contents (1) Low Toner Message (Fixed)
“The toner supply in your machine is running low”
(2) Dealer Name
Up to 25 digits
(3) Order Tel #
Up to 36 digits
(4) Order Fax #
Up to 36 digits
(5) Customer ID
Up to 16 characters (User Identification Code)
(6) Toner Cartridge #
UG-5510 (For USA / Canada) for DX-800
178 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
For Other Destinations ************************************* > TONER CARTRIDGE ORDER FORM < *************************************
**** The toner supply in your facsimile machine is running low **** (1) To order a replacement Cartridge from your Authorized Dealer Panafax Corp.(2) by Phone: by Fax:
1 201 111 5555 (3) 1 201 111 4444 (4)
Thank you for your order.
Customer Name and Address ========================= Ship to:
Bill to:
Attention:
Attention:
Phone No.:
Phone No.:
Customer ID: ABC COMPANY (5)
P.O. No.(if required):
Toner Cartridge: UG-3350
(6)
Serial No.:
Quantity Required:
/ Print your name and title
/
Signature & Date
Explanation of Contents (1) Low Toner Message (Fixed)
“The toner supply in your machine is running low”
(2) Dealer Name
Up to 25 digits
(3) Order Tel #
Up to 36 digits
(4) Order Fax #
Up to 36 digits
(5) Customer ID
Up to 16 characters (User Identification Code)
(6) Toner Cartridge #
UG-3350 (For Other Destinations) for DX-600
179 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
5.1.4.
Service Mode 4 (Modem Test)
5.1.4.1.
Binary Signal
This Service Mode is used to check the binary signal output. Signals can be output to the line using the following procedure.
Step 1 Standby
Service Mode 4 - Binary Signal Operation or Unit Condition
LCD Display MMM-dd-yyyy
15:00 00%
2
Press “FUNCTION” and then “7”.
3
Press “MONITOR” four times, then press “*”.
4
Press “4”.
5
Press “START”.
6
Enter the signal number (1-9) to select the binary signal.
SIGNAL TEST 300bps
7
Press "CLEAR" to end the signal generation. To select another signal, repeat step 6.
SIGNAL TEST IDLE (ENTER 1-9)
8
Press "STOP" twice to return to standby.
MMM-dd-yyyy
SET MODE ENTER NO. OR
(1-8)
SERVICE MODE ENTER NO. OR MODEM TEST (1-5) 1:SIGNAL TEST SIGNAL TEST IDLE (ENTER 1-9)
15:00 00%
Binary Signal Table Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Signals V21 300bps V27ter 2400bps V27ter 4800bps V29 7200bps V29 9600bps V17 TC7200bps V17 TC9600bps V33 12000bps V33 14400bps
180 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
5.1.4.2.
Tonal Signal
This Service Mode is used to check the tonal signal output. Signals can be output to the line using the following procedure.
Step 1
Service Mode 4 - Tonal Signal Operation or Unit Condition Standby
LCD Display MMM-dd-yyyy
15:00 00%
2
Press “FUNCTION” and then “7”.
3
Press “MONITOR” four times, then press “*”.
4
Press “4”.
5
Press “2” and “START”.
6
Enter the signal number (1-7) to select the binary signal.
TONAL TEST 1080Hz
7
Press "CLEAR" to end the signal generation. To select another signal, repeat step 6.
TONAL TEST IDLE (ENTER 1-7)
8
Press "STOP" twice to return to standby.
MMM-dd-yyyy
SET MODE ENTER NO. OR
(1-8)
SERVICE MODE ENTER NO. OR MODEM TEST (1-5) 1:SIGNAL TEST TONAL TEST IDLE (ENTER 1-7)
15:00 00%
Tonal Signal Table Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Signals 462 Hz 1080 Hz 1100 Hz 1300 Hz 1650 Hz 1850 Hz 2100 Hz
181 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
5.1.4.3.
DTMF Signal
This Service Mode is used to check the DTMF (Dual Tone Multi Frequency) signal output. The DTMF signal can be generated using the following procedure.
Step 1 Standby
Service Mode 4 - DTMF Signal Operation or Unit Condition
LCD Display MMM-dd-yyyy
2
Press “FUNCTION” and then “7”.
3
Press “MONITOR” four times, then press “*”.
4
Press “4”.
5
Press “3” and “START”.
6a
Press "START" for DTMF Single Tone Generation.
7a
Enter the signal number (1-8) to select the DTMF signal.
6b
Press "2" and "START" for Dual Tone Generation.
7b
Enter the signal number (0-#) to select the DTMF Dual tone.
DUAL TONE (0)
8
Press "CLEAR" to end the signal generation. To select another signal, repeat step 7a or 7b.
SINGLE TONE ENTER (1-8)
9
Press "STOP" twice to return to standby.
MMM-dd-yyyy
15:00 00%
SET MODE ENTER NO. OR
(1-8)
SERVICE MODE ENTER NO. OR MODEM TEST (1-5) 1:SIGNAL TEST DTMF TEST (1-2) 1.SINGLE
DTMF Single Tone Table Number DTMF Signal Tones 1 697 Hz 2 770 Hz 3 852 Hz 4 941 Hz 5 1209 Hz 6 1336 Hz 7 1477 Hz 8 1633 Hz
SINGLE TONE ENTER (1-8) SINGLE TONE 697Hz DUAL TONE ENTER (0-#)
15:00 00%
DTMF Dual Tone Table Number DTMF Dual Tones 0 941 Hz + 1336 Hz 1 697 Hz + 1209 Hz 2 697 Hz + 1336 Hz 3 697 Hz + 1477 Hz 4 770 Hz + 1209 Hz 5 770 Hz + 1336 Hz 6 770 Hz + 1477 Hz 7 852 Hz + 1209 Hz 8 852 Hz + 1336 Hz 9 852 Hz + 1477 Hz * 941 Hz + 1209 Hz # 941 Hz + 1477 Hz
182 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
5.1.4.4.
Binary Signal (V.34)
This Service Mode is used to check the binary signal output. Signals can be output to the line using the following procedure. (V.34)
Step 1
Service Mode 4 - Binary Signal Operation or Unit Condition Standby
LCD Display MMM-dd-yyyy
15:00 00%
2
Press “FUNCTION” and then “7”.
3
Press “MONITOR” four times, then press “*”.
4
Press “4”.
5
Press “5” and “START”.
6
Enter the signal number (01-61) and press [START] to select the binary signal.
V.34 MODEM TEST V34 2400sr 2400bps
7
Press "CLEAR" to end the signal generation. To select another signal, repeat step 6.
V.34 MODEM TEST ENTER NO.
8
Press "STOP" twice to return to standby.
MMM-dd-yyyy
SET MODE ENTER NO. OR
(1-8)
SERVICE MODE ENTER NO. OR MODEM TEST (1-5) 1:SIGNAL TEST V.34 MODEM TEST ENTER NO.
15:00 00%
Binary Signal Table Number 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Signals V34 2400 sr 2400 bps V34 2400 sr 4800 bps V34 2400 sr 7200 bps V34 2400 sr 9600 bps V34 2400 sr 12000 bps V34 2400 sr 14400 bps V34 2400 sr 16800 bps V34 2400 sr 19200 bps V34 2400 sr 21600 bps V34 2800 sr 4800 bps V34 2800 sr 7200 bps V34 2800 sr 9600 bps V34 2800 sr 12000 bps V34 2800 sr 14400 bps V34 2800 sr 16800 bps V34 2800 sr 19200 bps V34 2800 sr 21600 bps V34 2800 sr 24000 bps V34 2800 sr 26400 bps V34 3000 sr 4800 bps V34 3000 sr 7200 bps
Number 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42
Signals V34 3000 sr 9600 bps V34 3000 sr 12000 bps V34 3000 sr 14400 bps V34 3000 sr 16800 bps V34 3000 sr 19200 bps V34 3000 sr 21600 bps V34 3000 sr 24000 bps V34 3000 sr 26400 bps V34 3000 sr 28800 bps V34 3200 sr 4800 bps V34 3200 sr 7200 bps V34 3200 sr 9600 bps V34 3200 sr 12000 bps V34 3200 sr 14400 bps V34 3200 sr 16800 bps V34 3200 sr 19200 bps V34 3200 sr 21600 bps V34 3200 sr 24000 bps V34 3200 sr 26400 bps V34 3200 sr 28800 bps V34 3200 sr 31200 bps
Number 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61
Signals V34 3429 sr 4800 bps V34 3429 sr 7200 bps V34 3429 sr 9600 bps V34 3429 sr 12000 bps V34 3429 sr 14400 bps V34 3429 sr 16800 bps V34 3429 sr 19200 bps V34 3429 sr 21600 bps V34 3429 sr 24000 bps V34 3429 sr 26400 bps V34 3429 sr 28800 bps V34 3429 sr 31200 bps V34 3429 sr 33600 bps ANSam CM JM INFO0c & TONEB INFO0c & TONEA PPh & AC & ALT
183 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
5.1.5.
Service Mode 5 (Diagnostic)
5.1.5.1.
CCD Test
This Service Mode is used to check the CCD. Use the following procedure to initiate the test.
Step 1 Standby
Service Mode 5 Operation or Unit Condition
LCD Display MMM-dd-yyyy
2
Press “FUNCTION” and then “7”.
3
Press “MONITOR” four times, then press “*”.
4
Press “5”.
5
Press “START”. The Scanner will be active.
1:CCD TEST * CHECK NOW *
6
Press "STOP" twice to return to standby.
MMM-dd-yyyy
SET MODE ENTER NO. OR
15:00 00% (1-8)
SERVICE MODE ENTER NO. OR DIAGNOSTIC (1-2) 1:CCD TEST
15:00 00%
184 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
5.1.5.2.
LCD / LED Test
This Service Mode is used to check the LCD and LEDs on the Control Panel. Use the following procedure to initiate the test.
Step 1
Service Mode 5 Operation or Unit Condition Standby
LCD Display MMM-dd-yyyy
2
Press “FUNCTION” and then “7”.
3
Press “MONITOR” four times, then press “*”.
4
Press “5”.
5
Press ”2” and “START”. 1) LCDs display as shown at right. 2) All LEDs will be lit.
6
Press "STOP" twice to return to standby.
15:00 00%
SET MODE ENTER NO. OR
(1-8)
SERVICE MODE ENTER NO. OR DIAGNOSTIC (1-2) 1:CCD TEST 2:LCD/LED TEST * CHECK NOW *
MMM-dd-yyyy
15:00 00%
185 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
5.1.6.
Service Mode 6 (RAM Initialization)
Initializes the RAM and restores the Function Parameters to their default values. Note: This operation should be performed when the unit is first installed.
Step 1 Standby
Service Mode 6 Operation or Unit Condition
LCD Display MMM-dd-yyyy
2
Press “FUNCTION” and then “7”.
3
Press “MONITOR” four times, then press “*”.
4
Press “6”.
5
Press “V” or “/\ “ to select the initialization mode. (See Table)
6
Press “START”.
7
Press "STOP" twice to return to standby.
SET MODE ENTER NO. OR
15:00 00% (1-8)
SERVICE MODE ENTER NO. OR * RAM INITIALIZE * ENTER NO. OR * RAM INITIALIZE * LOGO/ID/PSWD CLEAR LOGO/ID/PSWD CLEAR * COMPLETED * MMM-dd-yyyy
15:00 00%
RAM Initialization Table No. Initialize Mode 99 SHIPMENT SET (A) 98
SHIPMENT SET (B)
97 16 15 14 13 12 11 *
FLASH MEMORY CLEAR LBP LOG CLEAR LOGO/ID/PSWD CLR ALL JOB CLEAR PROG. DIAL CLEAR AUTO DIAL CLEAR JOURNAL CLEAR PARAMETER INIT.
Description Deletes all setting information, except parameter number 80 and 81, then set default values. (See Note) Deletes all setting information, except parameter number 61, 80 and 81, then set default values. (See Note) Deletes all information in the Flash Memory. Clears the Printer Error Log. Clears the Logo, ID, Polling Password. Clears all Jobs stored in Flash Memory. Clears the Program keys. Clears the One-touch, ABBR Numbers and Phone Books. Clears the Journal contents. Restores the Fax and Function Parameters to default values.
186 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
5.1.7.
Service Mode 7 (LBP Service Mode)
This Service Mode is used to change printer parameters and verify printer information. Use the following procedure to change printer parameter.
Step 1
Service Mode 7 Operation or Unit Condition Standby
MMM-dd-yyyy
2
Press “FUNCTION” and then “7”.
3
Press “MONITOR” four times, then press “*”.
4
Press “7”.
5
1) Press "START" for printer parameter settings. Press "2" and "START" to get the printer information. Ex: Enter "START" for printer parameter settings. Press "3" and “START”. Then enter the number of pages. Ex: Enter "50" and press "START". Press "\/" or "/\" to select another Parameter Name (See Table) or press "CLEAR" to return to step 4.
6
7 8
1
SET MODE ENTER NO. OR
2 3
Parameter Name PRINTER COUNTER LBP FUSER RESET OUT OF TONER
\/ /\
PRINT AVAILABLE
\/ /\
LBP MEMORY CAPACITY
2
15:00 00% (1-8)
SERVICE MODE ENTER NO. OR LP SERVICE MODE (1-2) 1:LBP PARAMETER SET
Repeat step 5 through 7 to request operation, or press "STOP" twice to return to standby.
Sub-Code 1
LCD Display
LBP PARAMETER SET 1.PRINTER COUNTER
LBP PARAMETER SET 3.OUT OF TONER
LP SERVICE MODE (1-2) 1.LBP PARAMETER SET MMM-dd-yyyy
15:00 00%
Description Displays and resets the Printer and Paper Cassette(s) counters. Clears the LBP Fuser Error. Sets the number of pages to print after low toner is detected. (Factory default = 100, adjustable from 0 - 999) Shows the remaining number of allowable printable pages after low toner has been detected (Counter Only). Shows the Page Memory Capacity.
187 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
5.1.8. 5.1.8.1.
Service Mode 8 (Check & Call) Overview
This feature enables the Authorized Servicing Dealers to manage and improve the Fax machine maintenance to their customers by alerting them of equipment problems. It also can be used as a Supply Sales Tool by alerting the Dealer that the unit is running Low on Toner. The function overview is as follows: 1. The machine’s printer error information is stored in the Printer Report. 2. The printer report can be manually printed when required. 3. When printer errors occurs, the unit can automatically transmit the Service Alert Report to the preregistered telephone number. 4. When the unit detects Low Toner, it can automatically transmit the Maintenance Alert Report to the preregistered telephone number. 5. When the unit detects Low Toner, it can automatically print out the Toner Order Form with preregistered order information.
5.1.8.2.
Printer Reports
• Conditions under which a report can be printed or transmitted 1. Manual print The Printer Report can be printed by Service Mode 3. (See Sect. 5.1.3.1.) 2. Automatic transmission/printout 3. Service Alert Report When the unit detects an Emergency Printer Error, the unit will immediately transmit the Service Alert Report to the pre-registered telephone number. However, the unit will not transmit the Service Alert Report if it finds the same error within the same date in the error log. 4. Maintenance Alert Report When the unit detects Low Toner, the unit can automatically transmit the Maintenance Alert Report to the pre-registered telephone number. Refer to the Printer Error Code Table. 5. Toner Cartridge Order Form When the unit detects Low Toner, the unit can automatically print the Toner Order Form with the preregistered order information. Note: The Service and Maintenance Alert Reports are managed in the same manner as the normal memory transmission (Retry, Incomplete, File List, Display while it is transmitting, Journal). • Printer Error Code Table Printer Error Code Table Log Tx Condition Content of Error Only Report O R/C Paper Jam 1st Cassette. O R/C Paper Jam 2nd Cassette. O R/C Paper Exit Error. No Paper in 1st or 2nd NO PAPER R/C Cassette. NO S No 1st or 2nd Cassette. Cassette Fuser Problem / LP R/C O S Thermistor disconnected Problem TONER O S/R/C No Toner TONER O M S/R/C Low Toner Warning TONER O S No Toner Cartridge
Info. Printer LED/LCD Code Error Code 001 11 JAM 002 12 JAM 007 14-18 JAM 010
00
011
64, 65
021
22-26
041 043 045
00 00 61
188 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
Printer Error Code Table Info. Printer Log Tx LED/LCD Condition Content of Error Code Error Code Only Report 051 54 O S R/C Printer Error 054 31,32,36 O S R/C LSU Problem No response from LP 055 81, 82 R/C O S Controller 060 Rx Door Open Note: 1. Tx Report: S = Service Alert Report, M = Maintenance Alert Report 2. Condition : R = Receive Mode, C = Copy Mode, S = Standby Mode, T = Transmit Mode
189 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
5.1.8.3.
Setting Operation 8:CHECK & CALL PRESS SET TO SELECT SET or START 1 CLEAR
CHECK & CALL (1-7) 1:SVC. ALERT FAX #
SET or START
SERVICE ALERT FAX #
CLEAR SET or START Enter a destination fax number for the Service Alert Report. When it is entered, the automatic transmission of the Service Alert Report becomes effective. Max. 36 digits (i.e. 201 111 2222)
2 CLEAR
CHECK & CALL (1-7) 2:MAINT. ALERT FAX #
SET or START
MAINT. ALERT FAX #
CLEAR SET or START Enter a destination fax number for the Maintenance Alert Report. When it is entered, the automatic transmission of the Maintenance Alert Report becomes effective. Max. 36 digits (i.e. 201 111 3333)
3 CLEAR
CHECK & CALL (1-7) 3:TONER ORDER FAX #
SET or START
TONER ORDER FAX #
CLEAR SET or START Enter the supply fax number to be printed on the Toner Order Form. When it is entered, the automatic print of the Toner Order Form becomes effective. Max. 36 digits (i.e. 201 111 4444)
4 CLEAR
CHECK & CALL (1-7) 4:TONER ORDER TEL #
SET or START
TONER ORDER TEL #
CLEAR SET or START Enter the supply telephone number to be printed on the Toner Order Form. Max. 36 digits (i.e. 201 111 5555)
5 CLEAR
CHECK & CALL (1-7) 5:DEALER NAME
SET or START
DEALER NAME
CLEAR SET or START Enter the Dealer's Name to be printed on the Toner Order Form. Max. 25 digits (i.e. Panafax Corp.)
6 CLEAR
CHECK & CALL (1-7) 6:CUSTOMER ID
SET or START
CUSTOMER ID
CLEAR SET or START Enter a Customer ID code to be printed on the Service Alert Report, Maintenance Alert Report and Toner Order Form. Max. 16 characters (i.e. ABC Company)
7 CLEAR
CHECK & CALL (1-7) 7:PRINTER REPORT XMT
SET or START
PRINTER REP XMT:Off 1:OFF 2:ON 1+ SET or START
2+ SET or START
* DIALING * 555 1234
After the Service Alert Report is faxed to the pre-registered FAX #, the machine returns to standby mode.
190 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
Note 1. Service Alert Report To enable the automatic transmission of Service Alert Report, enter the destination fax telephone number in the “SERVICE ALERT (FAX #)” field. When a printer error occurs, the Service Alert Report is transmitted to the designated number automatically. A blank entry in this field, disables the Automatic transmission of the Service Alert Report. 2. Maintenance Alert Report To enable the automatic transmission of Maintenance Alert Report, enter the destination fax telephone number in the “MAINT. ALERT (FAX #)” field. When a printer error occurs, the Maintenance Alert Report is transmitted to the designated number automatically. A blank entry in this field, disables the Automatic transmission of the Maintenance Alert Report. 3. Toner Cartridge Order Form To enable the automatic printout of the Toner Cartridge Order Form, enter the destination fax telephone numbers in the “Order FAX #” field. When a low toner error occurs, the Toner Order Form is printed automatically. 4. SERVICE ALERT FAX #, this would be the fax telephone number for the Dealer's Service Department. MAINT. ALERT FAX #, this could be the fax telephone number for the Dealer's Supply Sales Desk. ORDER FAX #, this could be the fax telephone number for the Dealer's Supply Sales Desk. ORDER TEL #, this could be the voice telephone number for the Dealer's Supply Sales Desk. DEALER NAME, this name is printed on the Toner Order Form. CUSTOMER ID, to identify your customer, enter up to 16 characters user code in this field. This name will be printed on the Service Alert Report, Maintenance Alert Report and Toner Order Form. 5. Printer Report XMT To manually transmit the Service Alert Report to the pre-registered SERVICE ALERT REPORT FAX #, set the Printer Report XMT to "2:ON".
191 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
5.1.8.4.
SERVICE ALERT REPORT FORMAT
*************************************************** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 12:14 ******** **************************** > SERVICE ALERT REPORT < ****************************
(1) LAST PRINT ERROR : MM-dd-yy 12:10
(2) (3) No.999-00
ABC COMPANY (4)
CUSTOMER ID
:
FAX ROM VERSION
: DX-800 AAV1xxxxAU
TRANSMIT COUNTER RECEIVE COUNTER COPY COUNTER PRINT COUNTER
: : : :
PRINT ERROR
: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :
(5)
999999 (6) 999999 999999 999999 MM-dd-yy 12:10 MM-dd-yy 10:15 MM-dd-yy 13:48 " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " MM-dd-yy 17:10 MM-dd-yy 12:10 MM-dd-yy 08:10
No.999-00 No.999-00 No.999-00
(7)
No.999-00 No.999-00 No.999-00 -LOGO PANASONIC
************************************ -CHARACTER ID
-
- ***** -31415926535897932384-***********
Explanation of Contents (1) Date & Time when a problem occurred (2) Information Code (3) Printer Error Code
Refer to Service Manual
(4) Customer ID
Up to 16 characters (User Identification Code)
(5) Fax ROM Version (6) Transmission / Reception / Copy / Print Counters (7) Print Error
Last 30 records (Latest on top)
192 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
5.1.8.5.
MAINTENANCE ALERT REPORT FORMAT
*************************************************** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 12:14 ******** **************************** > MAINTENANCE ALERT REPORT < ****************************
LAST PRINT ERROR : MACHINE IS RUNNING OUT OF TONER (1) CUSTOMER ID
: ABC COMPANY (2)
FAX ROM VERSION
: DX-800 AAV1xxxxAU
TRANSMIT COUNTER RECEIVE COUNTER COPY COUNTER PRINT COUNTER
: : : :
(3)
999999 (4) 999999 999999 999999
-LOGO PANASONIC ************************************ -CHARACTER ID
-
- ***** -31415926535897932384-***********
Explanation of Contents (1) Low Toner Message (Fixed)
“MACHINE IS RUNNING OUT OF TONER”
(2) Customer ID
Up to 16 characters (User Identification Code)
(3) Fax ROM Version (4) Transmission / Reception / Copy / Print Counters
193 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
5.1.9.
Service Mode 9 (System Maintenance)
5.1.9.1.
Overview
This Service Mode is used to maintain and/or update the firmware of the machine. Use the following procedure for System Maintenance.
Step 1
Service Mode 9 Operation or Unit Condition Standby
LCD Display MMM-dd-yyyy
2
Press “FUNCTION” and then “7”.
3
Press “MONITOR” four times, then press “*”.
4
Press “9”.
5
6
Press “START” to update the firmware. Enter No. or press "\/" or "/\" to select the maintenance to be performed. Ex: Enter “2”. Press “SET” and “START”.
7
Press “SET” or “START”.
8
After the backup is completed, repeat step 4 through 6 to request an operation.
SERVICE MODE ENTER NO. OR
9
Press "STOP" twice to return to standby.
MMM-dd-yyyy
15:00 00%
SET MODE ENTER NO. OR
(1-8)
SERVICE MODE ENTER NO. OR SYSTEM MAINT. (1-8) 1:FIRMWARE UPDATE SYSTEM MAINT. (1-8) 2:FIRMWARE BACKUP
FIRMWARE BACKUP (1-3) 1:HOST PROGRAM <4MB> FIRMWARE BACKUP * IN PROGRESS *
15:00 00%
194 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
System Maintenance Table No. Maintenance Mode 1 FIRMWARE UPDATE
Description Updates the firmware in the machine with the Master Firmware Card. Updates the firmware in the machine with the Master Firmware from the PC. After the firmware is updated, the machine reboots automatically and returns to standby. See Note. 1: HOST PROGRAM <4MB> 2: HOST PART A <2MB> 3: HOST PART B <3MB> Creates a Backup Card of the machine’s firmware. (A 2 MB or higher Flash Memory Card is required) See Note. 1: HOST PROGRAM <4MB> 2: HOST PART A <2MB> 3: HOST PART B <3MB> Restores the parameters from the Backup Card into the machine. Creates a Backup Card of the machine’s parameters.
2
FIRMWARE BACKUP
3
PARAMETER RESTORE PARAMETER BACKUP ERASE FLASH CARD Erase a Master Firmware Card. SEND RECEIVED Transfers documents from memory to another fax machine FILE during a fatal printer error.
4 5 8
Note: The created Backup Card must be removed from the machine.
195 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
5.1.9.2.
Operation
9:SYSTEM MAINTENANCE PRESS SET TO SELECT SET or START
1
2 SET or START
SET or START
1
CLEAR
SYSTEM MAINT.(1-8) 1:FIRMWARE UPDATE
1
CLEAR
FIRMWARE UPDATE(1-3) 1:HOST PROGRAM <4MB>
CLEAR
Display card version
*
SET or START
DX-800AAV1xxxxAU PRESS SET TO START
FIRMWARE UPDATE * IN PROGRESS *
* If the card is not installed, SET/START will be refused. If the card has no information (Blank), the 1st row displaying the card version will be blank.
SET or START 2 CLEAR
FIRMWARE UPDATE(1-3) 2:HOST PART A <2MB>
CLEAR
Display Host version
SET or START
DX-800AAV1xxxxAU PRESS SET TO START Reboot the machine after updating
SET or START 3 CLEAR
2
FIRMWARE UPDATE(1-3) 3:HOST PART B <2MB>
SET or START
SET or START
CLEAR
SYSTEM MAINT.(1-8) 2:FIRMWARE BACKUP
1 CLEAR
CLEAR
FIRMWARE BACKUP(1-3) 1:HOST PROGRAM <4MB>
CLEAR
Display card version
DX-800AAV1xxxxAU PRESS SET TO START
SET or START 2 CLEAR
SET or START
FIRMWARE BACKUP(1-3) 2:HOST PART A <2MB>
CLEAR
FIRMWARE BACKUP * IN PROGRESS * After Uploading
SET or START 3 CLEAR
3
FIRMWARE BACKUP(1-3) 3:HOST PART B <2MB>
Display 1.5sec
FIRMWARE BACKUP * COMPLETED *
CLEAR
SET or START
CLEAR
SYSTEM MAINT.(1-8) 3:PARAMETER RESTORE
CLEAR
DX-800 PARAMETER PRESS SET TO START
SET or START
PARAMETER RESTORE * IN PROGRESS * After Downloading
Display 1.5sec
PARAMETER RESTORE * COMPLETED *
Display card version 4
SET or START
CLEAR
SYSTEM MAINT.(1-8) 4:PARAMETER BACKUP
CLEAR
DX-800AAV1xxxxAU PRESS SET TO START
SET or START
PARAMETER BACKUP * IN PROGRESS * After Uploading
Display 1.5sec
PARAMETER BACKUP * COMPLETED *
Display card version 5
SET or START
CLEAR
SYSTEM MAINT.(1-8) 5:ERACE FLASH CARD
CLEAR
DX-800AAV1xxxxAU PRESS SET TO START
SET or START
ERACE FLASH CARD * ERASING NOW *
After Erasing
Service Mode default display
8
CLEAR
1 MAINT.(1-8) 2 SYSTEM 8:SEND RCV'D FILE
1
Refer to the Sect. 5.9.4
2
196 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
5.1.10. Recovering from a Firmware Update Failure If the Firmware Update is interrupted before completion, the machine will not be able to progress into the Standby Mode and the LCD display will remain Blank. If this happens, please follow the steps described below to recover from a failed firmware update. (2)
Printer Cover
(1) Unplug the Power Cord. (2) Open the Printer Cover. (3) Remove the Memory Card Cover.
Memory Card Cover (3)
Memory Card (4)
Control Panel Unit (5)
(6)
(4) Insert the Flash Memory Card gently into the card slot with the Panasonic logo facing to the outside of the machine. Caution: Installing the Flash Memory Card in the wrong direction may damage the connecting pins inside the machine.
(5) Open the Control Panel Unit. (6) Activate the Read Point Sensor with your finger and plug in the Power Cord. (7) Wait approximately 10 seconds, release the Read Point Sensor, close the Control Panel Unit (ADF) and the Printer Cover. (8) Allow the unit to complete the Firmware Update (approx. 1-minute). When completed, the unit will reboot and progress to the Standby Mode. (9) Unplug the Power Cord. (10) Remove the Flash Memory Card. (11) Re-install the Memory Card Cover. (12) Plug in the Power Cord. (13) Perform Parameter Initialization.
Note: For Updating the Firmware Remotely through the Phone Line, please refer to the Firmware Update Tool (Remote) Operating Instructions. Please inform to the Customer prior to proceeding with the Remote Firmware Update, to Never Unplug the Power Cord or turn the machine OFF. If the machine is turned OFF during the Remote Firmware Update, it may not be re-coverable at all. During the Remote Firmware Update, the LCD display shows ON LINE * DIAG *.
197 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
5.1.10.1. Send Received File This function is the relief mode which makes it possible to retrieve memory received documents during a fatal printer error by transferring the documents to another fax machine. MMM-dd-yyyy 15:00 nn% FUNC
7
MON X 4
*
SERVICE MODE ENTER NO. OR v 9
8
Pi-pi-pi
CLR
SYSTEM MAINT.(1-8) 8:SEND RCV'D FILE SET
or
START If no file was received
Pi-pi-pi CLR
ENTER STATION(S) THEN PRESS START Enter station CLR
<01> NEW YORK OFFICE 212 555 1234 Enter another station CLR
<02> LONDON OFFICE 011 44 123 4567
START
SET CLR
2 STN(S) ARE SET ADD MORE OR START SET
*STORE*
START
No,nnn
Note: 1. After the received document file is successfully transmitted, unit will NOT delete the file automatically. 2. Under certain conditions there could be two (2) received files stored separately. In this case, transmission will be made separately. 3. Only normal received document will be transmitted. Document received with a confidential code will NOT be transmitted by this operation. 4. Documents received with a confidential code, can be retrieved by using Confidential Polling from a remote station.
MMM-dd-yyyy 15:00 nn%
* DIALING * NO.nnn 212 555 1234
198 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
6 System Description 6.1. 6.1.1.
Mechanical Operation Transmit Mechanism
The Transmit Mechanism consists of components which feed, scan and eject documents, as well as send signals. These components and their functions are as follows:
ADF Mechanism The ADF (Automatic Document Feeder) automatically feeds paper into the unit, and consists of ADF Roller and Separation Rubber. Each document is placed face-down on the Printer Cover (106) before being fed into the unit. ● The ADF Roller (331) feeds individual pages into the scanning area. ● The Separation Rubber (207) separates documents placed on the ADF, preventing multiple feeding. LED Array (329) The DX-600/800 has one LED Array, used as a light source to illuminate the document. The LED Array turns ON when the Read Point Sensor is activated by the document leading edge. Transmit Guide Unit The Transmit Guide Unit is an auxiliary part used for feeding and ejecting documents. It consists of the Transmit Guide (301), Control Panel Chassis (201), Feed Roller (302), Eject Roller (303), and Eject Pinch Roller (206) and Feed Pinch Roller (236). This unit also provides the white scanning area and serves as a base for electronic white reference. Transmit Mechanism Drive System This system feeds documents through the transmitting mechanism, and consists of rollers, gears and a stepper motor. ● The Transmit Motor (324), a stepper motor, controlled by the CPU, drives the ADF Roller, Feed Roller and Eject Roller, with the speed based on the density of the picture information. ● The Feed Roller (302) feeds the document to the scanning point. ● The Eject Roller (303) feeds and ejects the document out of the machine.
199 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
Transmit Mechanism Sensors The ADF Sensor (PC1), activated by Actuator A (224), detects the presence of documents on the ADF Tray and multiple pages. The RP (Read Point) Sensor (PC3), activated by Actuator B (225), detects the lead and trail edges of the document, controlling the reading position. The CPU determines that a document is jammed if Actuator B is not tripped within a specified time after the ADF Roller starts feeding, and disengages the ADF Roller by reversing the Transmit Motor direction. The ADF Door Sensor (PC2), activated by ADF Door Actuator (226), halts all scanning operations when the Control Panel Unit is opened. Verification Stamp Unit The Verification Stamp Unit stamps an “X” mark on the front of the document after the document is successfully transmitted or stored. It consists of the Stamp Head (325), Stamp Holder (326) and Stamp Solenoid (327). Scanner Block (321) The Scanner Block consists of three mirrors, a Lens, and a CCD PC Board (1014). ● The mirrors, Mirror 1 (334), Mirror 2 (335) and Mirror 3 (336) reflect image information, in the form of light, through the Lens. ● The Lens focuses the image information and passes it to the CCD. ● The CCD, mounted on the CCD PC Board, converts the image information into an electronic signal.
200 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
Drive System Eject Roller (303)
Feed Roller (302)
ADF Roller (331)
Document
B55D16 Gear (312) ADF Gear (305) D17 Gear (313) D25F Drive Gear (332)
Transmit Motor (324) D50 Gear (314)
6.1.2
B55D30 Gear (311)
B54B22 Gear (310)
Control Panel
The Control Panel consists of the PNL PC Board (1004) and LCD Unit, which displays the various status messages, and a membrane-type panel.
201 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
6.1.3.
Printing Mechanism
The Receive Mechanism consists of the Laser Unit (LSU), OPC (Organic Photo Conductor) Drum, and various other parts which ensure the normal feeding of recording paper. These components and their functions are as follows: Fuser Unit (701)
Paper Direction
OPC Drum Feed Roller (526)
Paper Exit Actuator (730)
Toner Cartridge Paper Feed Roller (518)
Bias Transfer Roller (604)
Laser Unit (512) Paper Feed Solenoid (531)
Timing Actuator (609)
No Paper Actuator (525) Printer Motor (626)
2nd Cassette (Option)
No Paper Actuator (525)
Feed Roller 2 (904) Paper Feed Roller (518) Paper Feed Solenoid (908)
Paper Feed Units No.1 and 2 The Paper Feeder Unit No. 2 is available as an option. Paper Feed Unit No.1 Operation 1. The printing operation begins when the nPRNT (Print Request) output signal level goes Low. The Printer Motor (626) is initialized. 2. The Paper Feed Solenoid (531) is energized for a specified period of time and turned ON. This activates the Paper Feed Roller (518), which rotates one revolution. The paper is separated into individual sheets by the L and R Paper Separation Clips (809 and 811) and transported to the Feed Roller (526). 3. After one revolution the Paper Feed Roller (518) stops, releasing the paper. The Feed Roller (526) transports the paper to the drum area. 4. The actual printing process starts at a specified time after the Timing Actuator (609) is activated and stops at a a specified period of time after the trailing edge clears the Timing Actuator (609).
202 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
Paper Feed Unit No. 2 (Optional) Operation The Paper Feed Unit No.1 always takes priority. The Paper Feed Unit No. 2 becomes operational only when the cassette No.1 runs out of paper and the NP Sensor is deactivated, causing the nPCHK1 output signal level to go High. 1. The printing operation begins when the nPRNT (Print Request) output signal level goes Low. The Printer Motor (626) is initialized. 2. The Paper Feed Solenoid (908) is energized for a specified period of time and is turned ON. This activates the Paper Feed Roller (518), which rotates one revolution. The paper is separated into individual sheets by the L and R Paper Separation Clips (809, 811) and transported to the Feed Roller 2 (904). 3. After one revolution the Paper Feed Roller (518) stops, releasing the paper. The Feed Roller 2 (904) and the Feed Roller (526) transports the paper to the drum area. 4. The actual printing process starts at a specified time after the Timing Actuator (609) is activated and stops at a a specified period of time after the trailing edge clears the Timing Actuator (609). Paper Feed Roller (518) L and R Paper Separation Clips (809, 811) Clutch Gear Assembly Feed Roller (526)
SNS3 PC Board (1009) No Paper Actuator (525)
SNS1 PC Board (1008)
Timing Actuator (609) Pinch Roller (607) Paper Feed Solenoid (531)
Feed Roller (904) Pinch Roller (607)
CST2 PC Board (1009)
No Paper Actuator (525) Paper Feed Roller (518) Paper Feed Solenoid (908)
Clutch Gear Assembly
L and R Paper Separation Clips (809, 811)
203 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
6.1.4.
Printing Process Operation Handle Toner Waste Box Waste Toner Bias Transfer Roller
Cleaning Blade
OPC Drum
Laser Beam
Development Roller Developing Blade Toner
Agitator Sweeper
Hopper Mixing Blade
Charge In the dark, the Bias Charge Roller (BCR) applies a high, uniform negative charge to the surface of the OPC Drum. The surface potential is approximately -650 VDC and remains because the drum has a high electric resistance in the dark. Exposure A portion of the laser beam is deflected to the timing sensor [Beam Detection (BD) Sensor], which controls the start timing of scanning on the OPC Drum. The CPU also uses the timing sensor to detect abnormal signals. The light beam from the laser diode is modulated by the digital signal (nVIDEO) and converted to parallel light waves by the collimator lens. The beam is then directed to the rotating tetragon mirror, where it is reflected to the f-θ lens and then focused onto the OPC Drum surface. The laser beam moves across the surface of the OPC Drum in the scanning direction. Where the laser beam is applied, the negative charge on the drum dissipates, and where the laser is not applied, the negative charge remains. This action forms a latent, electrostatic image on the OPC Drum, corresponding to the original image. Development This development process uses a conventional method, where toner coats a Development Roller and transfers to the latent image on the OPC Drum. In the Toner Cartridge, the (mono-component) toner is negatively charged by the friction between the rotating Development Roller (Mag Roller) and the Developing Blade. This combination and the rotation of the Mixing Blade transfers the toner from the reservoir and forms a brush effect on the Mag roller. Where the magnetic brush lightly touches the OPC Drum, the negatively charged toner is attracted to the latent image on the drum, forming a mirror image of the original on the drum. Any remaining toner is removed from the Mag Roller by the Developing Blade and is recycled back into the toner reservoir. A bias voltage of approximately 1.65 kVACp-p at 1.875 kHz, riding on a -300 VDC bias is applied to the magnetic brush to achieve maximum print quality. The Toner Sensor (513), a magnetic sensor, detects the remaining quantity of toner in the Toner Cartridge. When the “TONER” lamp starts to blink, there is still enough toner left in the cartridge to print 100 pages (based on ITU-T Image No.1). When the toner runs out, the display will show: “OUT OF 204 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
TONER & INFO CODE 041” and the machine is disabled from printing any copies. The Toner Cartridge consists of OPC Drum, Bias Charge Roller, Development Roller, Developing Blade, Cleaning Blade, Mixing Blades and Toner Waste Box. The OPC Drum is an aluminum cylinder coated with an OPC (Organic Photo Conductor) sensitive material. This surface is photoelectric (retains the charge in the dark and releases the charge in the light). The potential differences on the surface (a static latent image) form a printed image. The Bias Charge Roller provides a uniform charge on the OPC Drum surface. The Development Roller supplies toner to the drum by rotating over the magnet. The Developing Blade evens the toner on the Development Roller surface and also charges the toner by friction. The Cleaning Blade cleans by scraping the remaining toner off the OPC Drum surface after transfer. Transfer and Separation As the paper is fed between the OPC Drum and the Bias Transfer Roller (BTR) (604), a positive charge of approximately +3.0 µA steady current is applied to the backside of the paper by the BTR. The toner particles are attracted away from the drum towards the surface of the paper. During cleaning, the BTR is charged to approximately -1500 VDC to repel toner on the OPC Drum and prevent toner from being attracted to the BTR. After transfer has occurred, the paper passes over the Discharge Plate (612) in the Transfer Guide (601), reducing the difference of potential between the OPC Drum and the paper. The stiffness of the paper causes the paper to separate from the drum. Cleaning After transfer, some toner may remain on the surface of the OPC Drum. A Cleaning Blade scrapes the OPC Drum surface, and the removed toner is moved into the Toner Waste Box, inside the Toner Cartridge. Laser Unit LD PCB
Beam Detection Sensor
F Lens
Bean Detection Lens
Laser Housing
Tetragon Mirror
Laser Diode
Collimator Lens
Aperture
Cylindrical Lens
Tetragon Motor
205 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
Laser A 5 mW Laser Diode, with a wave length of 780 nm (±20 nm), provides a modulated beam controlled by nVIDEO. The beam power on the drum surface is approximately 0.15 mW, and is controlled by the monitor circuit. Collimator Lens This lens converges and focuses the laser beam, converting it to parallel light. Aperture This controls the size of the laser beam. Tetragon Mirror and Motor The tetragon scanner consists of a 4-sided mirror, directly driven by a tetragon motor, revolving at 8,898 rpm (400 dpi) or 13,347 rpm (600 dpi). Scanning speed for 400 dpi and 600 dpi are controlled by motor clock supplied from SC PCB. Motor clock for 400 dpi is 890 Hz and 600 dpi is 1,335 Hz. The laser beam is reflected against these mirrors and swept over the recorded width in the scanning direction. This unit features a stable line scanning speed, a precision mirror reflection angle, a reflection free surface, and instant start. Beam Detection (BD) Lens and Beam Detection (BD) Sensor The BD Lens receives the reflected light from the Polygon Mirror and redirects it into the BD Sensor, which converts the laser beam into electrical signals and sets the start timing for the scanning line. f-θ Lens This amorphous plastic, molded lens is designed to provide parallel laser light across the surface of the drum, providing a constant scanning speed. Fusing and Paper Exit Fuser Unit (701) Exit Roller (719) Thermistor Assembly (728)
Thermal Fuse (726) Paper Exit Actuator (730) Thermostat (725)
Fuser Roller (709) Pressure Roller (706)
Fuser Lamp (732)
Fuser Unit (701) The Fuser Unit, consisting of the Fuser Lamp, Fuser Roller, Pressure Roller, Thermistor, and Thermostat, bonds the toner into the paper using heat and pressure.
206 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
Fuser Lamp (732) Located in the Fuser Roller is a Halogen lamp that serves as the heat source for the Fuser Roller. Fuser Roller (709) A Teflon coated roller supplies the heat for bonding the toner to the paper. The temperature of the surface is kept constant at approximately 160 ± 5°C or (320°F). Pressure Roller (706) This converted PFA tube Silicon Rubber Roller applies pressure to the Fuser Roller, assisting in bonding the toner to the paper. Thermistor Assembly (728) The Thermistor, a heat sensitive resistor, in contact with the Fuser Roller, monitors the surface temperature. The temperature detected is used to control the ON/OFF switching of the Fuser Lamp. It also acts as the primary overheat prevention device. A comparator circuit on the FCB PC Board acts as a secondary overheat protection and becomes active at approximately 185°C (365°F). Thermostat (725) A Thermostatic Fuse, part of the power line for the Fuser Lamp, provides an extra overheat protection by opening when the Fuser Roller surface temperature reaches approximately 200°C (392°F) and remains there for 1 minute. If the primary and secondary overheat protection does not halt the rise in temperature, the thermostat opens, removing power from the Fuser Lamp. When the Thermostat opens, it must be replaced. SNS4 PC Board (1007) [Paper Exit Sensor] This sensor detects the presence of printed paper at the exit. If no paper passes, or if paper is over the sensor too long, a “RECORDING PAPER JAM” message is displayed. When paper passes over the sensor, the output is Low (Low Active). Thermal Fuse (726) It is placed in series with the Thermostat on the power line of the Fuser Lamp and performs the tertiary overheating prevention (in case the Thermostat fails) by opening when the surrounding temperature reaches approximately 216°C (420.8°F).
6.1.5
Covers and Enclosures
The Printer Cover (106) contains the R and L Document Guides (107 and 108), which adjust to the paper width to properly feed the original documents. The Left Cover (103) has a Speaker (117) mounted inside and shields the circuit boards. The Rear Cover (105) contains the Recording Paper Tray (111) and Recording Paper Sub Tray (112), used to support legal size documents.
207 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
Array
AC
Main Motor
LSU UNIT
Scanner Motor
LED
CCD (TCD1208ACY)
Motor Driver
Motor Driver
+5VP
+5V
+24V
ACI PCB
Low Voltage Power Supply
+3.3V
SC PCB
-5V
Edition 1.0 Heater Control
Thermistor
16MHz
4.9152 MHz
50MHz
3V--> 5V
48MHz
C D T
8.9813MHz
3.9656 x 2MHz
ThermalFuse
Thermostat
Fuser LAMP
High Voltage Power Supply
for 600dpi Printing
for 16pels/mm Printing
for Scaner
ASIC (DZAC000273)
16MHz
MN86075
32KB
RAM
Line Memory
(Option)
Paper Exit Sensor
Timing Sensor
SNS1 PCB
Toner Sensor
No Paper Sensor
Casette Detect Sensor
SNS2 PCB
Cover Sensor
ILS PCB
CPU (V850/MA1)
Work Memory Page Memory SDRAM 8MB
SNS3 PCB
Program FROM 4MB
SNS4 PCB
FROM CARD (Image) 2/4/8MB
Pick up Solenoid
Pick up Solenoid
Option
Stamp
LANB PCB
No Paper Sensor
CST2 PCB
3V--> 3V
25MHz
Image FROM 4MB
UART
Casette Detect Sensor
SNS2 PCB
Si3021
LED
Key Matrix and
CPU
LCD Unit
ACTIVITY LED
LINK LED
RJ45
Si3014
24.576MHz
LANC PCB
MN195006
(LAN91C111)
Controller
MAC/PHY
Magnetics *
Speaker
MJR PCB
B4 Width Sensor
SDoor Sensor
B-point Sensor
A-point Sensor
PNL1PCB
Option
EXIT TEL Handset (option)
6.2.1.
TEL
6.2.
LINE
DX-800 Block Diagram
DX-600/800
Electrical Circuit Explanation Fax Block Diagram
208
APR 2002
DX-600/800
6.2.2.
Signal Routing
1. ADF Transmission (1)
Laser Printer
MN86075 (IC30)
CCD PCB
LANB PCB
SHINE DZAC000273 (IC3)
transFormer (T1)
RJ45
INTERNET (10Base-T/100Base-TX)
LANC PCB
S-DRAM 8MB (IC7)
LINK
LAN Controller (IC1) Page Line Memory Memory
ACTIVITY
(2) D-BUS
ECM Buffer
(3)
FROM 4MB Program (IC9)
CPU V850E/MA1 (IC1)
FROM 4MB Image Memory (IC10)
MODEM MN195006 (I22)
DAA Si3021, Si3015 (IC23,24)
Line
2. Memory Transmission Laser Printer MN86075 (IC30)
CCD PCB
LANB PCB
SHINE DZAC000273 (IC3)
transFormer (T1)
RJ45
INTERNET (10Base-T/100Base-TX)
LANC PCB
S-DRAM 8MB (IC7)
LINK
LAN Controller (IC1) Page Line Memory Memory
ACTIVITY
(2) D-BUS
ECM Buffer
(3)
(1) FROM 4MB Image Memory (IC10)
FROM 4MB Program (IC9)
CPU V850E/MA1 (IC1)
MODEM MN195006 (I22)
DAA Si3021, Si3015 (IC23,24)
Line
209 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
3. Direct Reception
Laser Printer
MN86075 (IC30)
CCD PCB
LANB PCB
SHINE DZAC000273 (IC3)
transFormer (T1)
INTERNET (10Base-T/100Base-TX)
RJ45
LANC PCB
S-DRAM 8MB (IC7)
LINK
LAN Controller (IC1)
ACTIVITY
(3) Page Line Memory Memory
D-BUS
ECM Buffer
(2)
FROM 4MB Program (IC9)
CPU V850E/MA1 (IC1)
FROM 4MB Image Memory (IC10)
MODEM MN195006 (I22)
(1)
DAA Si3021, Si3015 (IC23,24)
Line
4. Memory Reception
Laser Printer
MN86075 (IC30)
CCD PCB
LANB PCB
SHINE DZAC000273 (IC3)
transFormer (T1)
INTERNET (10Base-T/100Base-TX)
RJ45
LANC PCB
S-DRAM 8MB (IC7)
LINK
LAN Controller (IC1)
ACTIVITY
Page Line Memory Memory (3) D-BUS
ECM Buffer
(2)
FROM 4MB Image Memory (IC10)
FROM 4MB Program (IC9)
CPU V850E/MA1 (IC1)
MODEM MN195006 (I22)
DAA Si3021, Si3015 (IC23,24)
(1) Line
210 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
5. Scan into Memory (1) MN86075 (IC30)
CCD PCB
LANB PCB
SHINE DZAC000273 (IC3)
transFormer (T1)
RJ45
INTERNET (10Base-T/100Base-TX)
LANC PCB
S-DRAM 8MB (IC7)
LINK
LAN Controller (IC1)
ACTIVITY
Page Line (2) Memory Memory
D-BUS
ECM Buffer
FROM 4MB Program (IC9)
CPU V850E/MA1 (IC1)
FROM 4MB Image Memory (IC10)
MODEM MN195006 (I22)
DAA Si3021, Si3015 (IC23,24)
Line
6. File Print from Memory
Laser Printer
MN86075 (IC30)
CCD PCB
LANB PCB
SHINE DZAC000273 (IC3)
transFormer (T1)
RJ45
INTERNET (10Base-T/100Base-TX)
LANC PCB
S-DRAM 8MB (IC7)
LINK
LAN Controller (IC1)
ACTIVITY
(2) Page Line Memory Memory
D-BUS
ECM Buffer
(1) FROM 4MB Image Memory (IC10)
FROM 4MB Program (IC9)
CPU V850E/MA1 (IC1)
MODEM MN195006 (I22)
DAA Si3021, Si3015 (IC23,24)
Line
211 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
7. Single Copy (1)
Laser Printer
MN86075 (IC30)
CCD PCB
LANB PCB
SHINE DZAC000273 (IC3)
transFormer (T1)
INTERNET (10Base-T/100Base-TX)
RJ45
LANC PCB
S-DRAM 8MB (IC7)
LINK
LAN Controller (IC1)
ACTIVITY
Page Line (2) Memory Memory
D-BUS
ECM Buffer
FROM 4MB Program (IC9)
CPU V850E/MA1 (IC1)
FROM 4MB Image Memory (IC10)
MODEM MN195006 (I22)
DAA Si3021, Si3015 (IC23,24)
Line
8. Multiple Copies (1)
Laser Printer
MN86075 (IC30)
CCD PCB
LANB PCB
SHINE DZAC000273 (IC3)
transFormer (T1)
RJ45
INTERNET (10Base-T/100Base-TX)
LANC PCB
S-DRAM 8MB (IC7)
LINK
LAN Controller (IC1) Page Line Memory Memory
ACTIVITY
(4) (2) D-BUS
ECM Buffer
FROM 4MB Program (IC9)
(3) FROM 4MB Image Memory (IC10)
CPU V850E/MA1 (IC1)
MODEM MN195006 (I22)
DAA Si3021, Si3015 (IC23,24)
Line
212 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
9. Report/List Printing Laser Printer
MN86075 (IC30)
CCD PCB
LANB PCB
SHINE DZAC000273 (IC3)
transFormer (T1)
RJ45
INTERNET (10Base-T/100Base-TX)
LANC PCB
S-DRAM 8MB (IC7)
LINK
LAN Controller (IC1) Page Line Memory Memory
ACTIVITY
(2)
D-BUS
ECM Buffer (1) FROM 4MB Program (IC9)
CPU V850E/MA1 (IC1)
FROM 4MB Image Memory (IC10)
MODEM MN195006 (I22)
DAA Si3021, Si3015 (IC23,24)
Line
10. Report with Image Data Laser Printer
MN86075 (IC30)
CCD PCB
LANB PCB
SHINE DZAC000273 (IC3)
transFormer (T1)
RJ45
INTERNET (10Base-T/100Base-TX)
LANC PCB
S-DRAM 8MB (IC7)
LINK
LAN Controller (IC1) Page Line Memory Memory
ACTIVITY
(3)
D-BUS
ECM Buffer
(2) FROM 4MB Image Memory (IC10)
(1) FROM 4MB Program (IC9)
CPU V850E/MA1 (IC1)
MODEM MN195006 (I22)
DAA Si3021, Si3015 (IC23,24)
Line
213 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
11. LAN Transmission Laser Printer MN86075 (IC30)
CCD PCB
LANB PCB
SHINE DZAC000273 (IC3)
transFormer (T1)
RJ45
INTERNET (10Base-T/100Base-TX)
LANC PCB
S-DRAM 8MB (IC7)
LINK
LAN Controller (IC1)
ACTIVITY
Page Line (2) Memory Memory
D-BUS
ECM Buffer
(1)
FROM 4MB Program (IC9)
CPU V850E/MA1 (IC1)
FROM 4MB Image Memory (IC10)
MODEM MN195006 (I22)
DAA Si3021, Si3015 (IC23,24)
Line
12. LAN Reception Laser Printer MN86075 (IC30)
CCD PCB
LANB PCB
SHINE DZAC000273 (IC3)
Transformer (T1)
RJ45
INTERNET (10Base-T/100Base-TX) (1)
LANC PCB
S-DRAM 8MB (IC7)
LINK
LAN Controller (IC1)
ACTIVITY
Page Line Memory Memory (2) D-BUS
ECM Buffer
FROM 4MB Image Memory (IC10)
FROM 4MB Program (IC9)
CPU V850E/MA1 (IC1)
MODEM MN195006 (I22)
DAA Si3021, Si3015 (IC23,24)
Line
214 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
6.2.3
Picture Signal Scanning Block
The image data read by the optical unit is input to the CCD mounted on the CCD PC Board, then transferred to the SC PC Board after the optical information is converted into an electrical signal by the CCD. The following shows a block diagram of the picture signal scanning circuit. This picture signal scanning circuit consists of (1) ABC circuit, (2) shading correction circuit, (3) offset control circuit, (4) picture signal binary coding correction circuit and (5) reducing circuit.
Differential Amplifier
CCD
Delay
TCD 1208P
IC3 DZAC000273
CCD Drive Circuit [SC] IC30 MN86075
CCD PC Board
SC PC Board
W 1728 bit B Effective Scan Width ABC Circuit This circuit consists of IC28, IC30, C175, R288 and R285. Its function is to prevent deterioration of picture quality due to dirt on the document or degrading of the luminous energy of the Xenon Lamp light source. The picture signal from the CCD is amplified in IC28 and input to IC30, where it is converted from analog to digital and the shading is corrected. When the signal exceeds +5V as the result of this amplification and correction, capacitor C175 is charged through R288. This charging voltage lowers the level of the picture signal input to IC28. When the picture signal voltage rises, this charge voltage becomes higher. When the picture signal level lowers due to the background color, etc., of a transmitting document, the voltage of the charged capacitor C175 is discharged through R285. Consequently, the output of the ABC circuit is kept constant to maintain the picture quality, regardless of changes in the CCD output level.
215 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
3V 0V
0V
ABC Circuit Output
CCD Output
32
OS IC28, 2
IC28, 1
DOS
IC30
37 19
+5V R288 Q15
41
Q13
39 C175
Control Circuit
40 R285
-5V Shading Correction Circuit The Shading Correction Circuit, included in IC30, is provided to correct for reduction in LED lamp intensity around the optical lens and LED lamp intensity distortion due to shading of each bit. This circuit scans the white reference on the transmitting document plate immediately before the document reaches the scanning position and writes a compensation value according to the distortion of the waveform, at the time, into the S-RAM (IC31).When the actual picture signal is input, the circuit corrects the picture signal shading, according to this compensation value. This shading is carried out for each page during transmission or copy. Offset Control Circuit The Offset Control Circuit consists of Q15, Q13, IC30 and IC28, and controls the black level of the CCD output to be at 0V by using the input. Picture Signal Binary Coding Correction Circuit The Picture Signal Binary Coding Correction Circuit is included in IC30. It is used to obtain a binary coding signal which is a corrected picture and error diffused signal of a false halftone signal, which is detected from a shaded picture signal.
216 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
6.2.4
CCD Drive Clock Generator Circuit
This circuit is also contained in IC30. Its function is to generate FSG, FCK1, FCK2 and RS clock signals, which are required for driving the CCD. These clock signals are generated by the system clock generator circuit derived from the 4 MHz clock signal that is input to IC30. Its timing chart is shown below.The FR clock supplied to the CCD is output from the RS of IC3. The RS clock of IC3 is derived from the FR clock of IC30 [MN86075] generates the timing of the RS clock to drive the CCD.
FCK1 FCK2 RS FSG
CCD FR
RS IC3 SHINE
FCK1 FCK2 FSG
IC30 86075 FR
217 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
6.2.5
Line Monitor Circuit
The Line Monitor Circuit consists of an operational DAA (The secondary side chip) and its peripheral circuits. Its function is to monitor the dial tone, DTMF tone, response signals, etc. over the speaker. It also sounds the output of the key touch tones, alarm tones, etc. from the panel CPU over the speaker. The Received Signals are output from DAA of Secondary circuit, and through Analog AGC, Electronic Volume, Amplifier and over the speaker. The monitor tone from the phone line and the buzzer tone from the panel can be adjusted from the Control Panel.
Line Monitor Signal (from AGC Circuit)
Volume Control Circuit (IC21)
(IC20, 2) +
Buzzer Clock (from Control Panel Unit)
Buzzer Tone Switch (from Output Port)
Speaker Amplifier (Q4,5) Speaker
AGD (+2.5VDC)
Level Control Circuit (Q3)
Line Monitor Circuit Block Diagram
218 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
6.2.6
Transmit Motor Control Circuit
The transmit motor is a PM type, two-phase bi-polar motor. The stepping signal and chopping current control signals (pTAPH, pTBPH, pTA10, pTA11, pTB10 and pTB11) are sent to the chopper drive circuit, comprised of IC36, IC37 and its peripheral circuitry, from IC3 SHINE output port. The motor is powered by +24 VDC and is driven by a 1/2-phase excitation, and greater step division is provided by controlling the phase circuit in steps (micro-step control).
+24V
Motor Driver
Tx Stepper Motor
IC36
R370
SHINE IC3 +24V
Motor Driver IC37
R371
Tx Motor Driver Circuit Block Diagram
219 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
6.2.7
Line Control Circuit
The Line Control Circuit consists of CML relay, DP circuit, DAA (Direct Access Arrangement), Ring Detect Circuit for power-save and DC hold circuit. A Jack for an external telephone, which can be used for either an external telephone or an optional Handset Kit. The block diagram of the Line Control Circuit is shown below.
SC PCB
Ringer Signal Detection, TAM I/F, DTMF Remote Detection Off-Hook Detection 10MW
DP Circuit
Line
CML Relay
DC Hold Circuit
DAA Line I/F Si3015 (IC23)
DAA Control I/F Si3021 (IC24)
MODEM MN195006
DP Control
Connect only to one module
Ringer Signal Detector for Wake-up (PC2)
External Telephone Jack
PNL
CPU
MJR PCB Line Control Circuit Ringer IC
+ ~ - ~ Hook SW
Speech IC
+ ~ - ~
Optional Handset Kit
220 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
Dial Pulse Generator The Dial Pulse Generator consists of a CML relay, a DC hold circuit, a dial pulse generate circuit and their peripheral circuits. The generator generates dial pulses. The CPU on the SC PC Board controls all dial pulse generation sequences. When the absence of the terminating message is confirmed by the Off-Hook detector in DAA (IC23), the CPU turns the CML relay ON and the dial pulse generate circuit ON through DAA to develop loop status (DC loop). After a few seconds, the CPU turns the PLS relay ON and OFF to generate dial pulses, making and breaking the loop. The line status during dialing is shown below. break CML Relay make
Dial Pulse Generate Circuit
break make
Line release
Speech condition
break
Prepause
First digit
Speech condition
Second digit
Speech condition
Inter-digit pause
Line status make
DTMF Tone Generator The DTMF Tone Generator is incorporated in the MODEM on the SC PC Board. The DTMF tone is conveyed to the telephone line using the same route as the facsimile signal. The DTMF tone selection is controlled by the CPU. Digital amplitude signal is conveyed as analog amplitude signal through D/A converter in the DAA (IC23). The line status during dialing is shown below. break CML Relay make Line release
Speech condition
First digit
Speech condition
Signal time
Inter-digit pause
break
Second digit
Speech condition
Line status make
DTMF signal
Ring Detector When the unit is in the Sleep Mode status, a Ringing signal is detected by a photo-coupler (PC2) in Ring Detector to cancel the power-save for waking up. Then DAA (IC23) detects the ringing signal for receive mode. When the unit is normal operating status, DAA (IC23) detects the ringing signal immediately.
221 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
6.2.8
SNS PC Board
Each sensor consists of an LED and photo transistor. When documents are placed on the ADF tray or are moving, a shutter in the document sensor opens. The light from the LED turns the photo transistor “ON”, and the output voltage from the sensor becomes a “Low” level. With no document on the ADF tray, the shutter interrupts the light path, and output from the sensor is kept at a “High” level. Operation of the RP Sensor is exactly the same as the ADF Sensor. The ADF Cover Sensor operation is similar, except that the output from the sensor is kept at a “Low” level when the cover is closed and becomes a “High” level when the Printer Cover is opened. +5V
Shutter
ADF Cover Sensor (ILS PC Board)
A PC2 K
+5V
nBPNT
Shutter
Read Point Sensor
CPU (IC1)
A PC3
MPU
+5VP
K
GND
+5VP
Shutter
PNL CPU IC1
A PC1 K
ADF Sensor
GND
PNL1 PC Board
SC PC Board
222 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
6.2.9
Control Panel
The Control Panel consists of the Display PCB and Panel Unit, which display various status information.It is normally interfaced to the main CPU. Keyed input signals are received by the Panel CPU and the data is transferred to the main CPU on the SC PC Board. The Control Panel performs the following processes simultaneously: • Key inputting • LED, LCD display • Data transmission / reception Interface to main CPU The interfacing between the main CPU and the panel CPU are all executed with commands and responses in the following two formats: • Command / response (1 byte) + number of data + check sum • Command / response (1 byte) + number of data + data 1 + data 2........................ + data n + check sum.
From /to SC PCB
11
20 characters, 2 lines, 5x7 dots control LED, KEY scanning
PNLCK PNLRD
LEDCT (1:0)
PNLSD PNLRST
2
BZCLK
8
+5V +5VP
LED
LED (1:0)
GND GND nPWSAVE nWAKEUP nBPNT
8
BATLVL
Key matrix (59 keys)
SCN (7:0) 8 KIN (7:0)
PNL1 PC Board
223 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
6.2.10
Printer Motor Drive Circuit
Motor Drive Circuit The Printer Motor is a 4-phase uni-polar PM-type step motor. The step signals (pMMP0A to pMMP3A) are transmitted to IC38 (the Chopper Drive Circuit) from IC3 SHINE output ports. The chopper current is determined by the voltage at IC38, Pin3 and Pin13. The Printer Motor has two speeds, Slow and Constant. The Printer Motor is powered by a +24 VDC supply. When the interlocks are open, the +24 VDC supply is cut off and the Printer Motor stops rotating.
CN54
SHINE IC3
+24 VM
3
pMMP0a
Motor Driver
1
nMMP0a
IC38
6
pMMP2a
4
nMMP2a
Pulse Motor
Laser Printer Motor Drive Circuit Block Diagram
224 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
Fuser Lamp Drive Circuit
Thermal Fuse Thermostat
R112
C109 1
4
R127
nSSR
9
SC PCB
CN103
9
+24V
1 2
PC102
6
R111
3
2
TRC100
L301
R111
C108
L101
LVPS
2
CN102
Fuser Lamp
CN102 1
1 Fuse
2
H
The Fuser Lamp is powered by 100 VAC (200 VAC). It is driven by the LVPS and controlled by the nSSR signal from the SC PC Board. When the CN103, Pin11 (nSSR) on the LVPS goes LOW, the Fuser Lamp turns ON. This lights up the PC102 LED and activates the TRC100 photo-triac, and VAC 115 VAC is sent to the Fuser Lamp. The time at which TRC100 is actually activated depends on the 100 VAC (200 VAC) sine wave. When the cross-voltage for Pin 6 and Pin 4 of PC102 is other than 0 Volts (sine wave exceeds 0 volts), PC102 inhibits the activation of the triac and turns ON the Fuser Lamp.
Fuser Lamp Drive Circuit Diagram
225 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
Fuser Temperature Control Circuit The fuser temperature is controlled by IC1 on the SC PC Board, which contains A/D (Analog/Digital) converters ANI0 to ANI7. The Fuser Temperature Control Circuit uses A/D converter, ANI1. When the PC001 drive current is transmitted from the SC PC Board to the PSU (LVPS), the Fuser Lamp turns ON. IC32 is a comparator with open output at pins 1 and 7 and is used as an abnormal temperature detection circuit. IC32, pin 7, has a high impedance when Q44 is activated, turning ON the Fuser Lamp. An abnormal temperature is detected when the VTH voltage level becomes higher than V+, forcing IC32, pin 7 Low and deactivating Q44. Abnormally low and high temperatures, as well as Thermistor release status, are detected by IC1 (CPU) programming.
CN6
IC3 SHINE
11
CN103
11
R221
+24v
PC001 1
6
2
4
3
R401
2
pSSRA
Q44 1
GND
+3.3V
PSU (LVPS)
CN52
+3.3V
TH2
2 1
R394
D26 +24V R396
8
5
D25
7 6
IC32
4
GND +3.3V
Q42 C214
2
GND 79
(ANI1)
Q43
3 1
TH2
1
GND
R395
IC1 C263
3 2
R400
Thermistor
R399
R398
R397
R78
+5v
CPU
SC PCB
GND
Fuser Temperature Control Circuit Diagram
226 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
High Voltage Drive Circuit (Charging, Development and Transfer) High Voltage is provided through a DC to DC converter, which changes the +24 VDC supply voltage to 650 VDC, and output approximately 0.64 KVAC (Steady current: 200 µA) for the Charging Block. The Developer Circuit converts the +24 VDC to between -300 VDC for the development bias, and outputs 1,500 VAC (p-p) at a frequency of 1.650 kHz to charge the toner. The Transfer Circuit changes the +24 VDC supply voltage to approximately +280 VDC (MAX) (steady current:3 µA/-1500 VDC steady voltage).
CN53 pCR0
3
nCRCK
3
nCR1
4
2
Q40
Discharge Plate
3
1
pCR1
2
Q39 1
CPU
nTR0
5
T
Bias Transfer Roller
C
Bias Charge Roller Toner Cartridge Development Roller
3
pTR0
2
D
Q3
FG
1
GND
nDRCK pDRCK
2
3 2
Q41 1
HVPS SC PCB GND
High Voltage Drive Circuit
227 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
6.2.11.
Interlock Safety Circuit
This safety circuit turns OFF the +24 VDC supply voltages when the Cover is opened. When the Cover is opened, the microswitch(es) on the ILS PC Board are de-actuated, turning OFF +24 VDC to the Printer Drive Circuit, the High Voltage Power Supply, and the Paper Feed Solenoid Circuits, turning OFF the +5 VDC supply voltage for the Laser Driver circuits on the Laser Unit.
+24V +24V
+24V
Cover
ILS PCB LVPS (Power Supply Unit)
+24VD Rush Current Protection Circuit
+24VM
Motor
pMPOW
+24VM
+24VM
HVPS (Power Supply Unit) Paper Feed Solenoid
DC/DC Converter +24VM
L+5V
Laser Unit
(SC PCB)
Interlock Safety Circuit Block Diagram
228 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
6.2.12 Laser Unit (LSU) Control Circuit The laser control signals are described below. nLDEN The LSU is activated when this output signal is LOW. If an error occurs, the nLDEN output signal level goes High and the LSU is deactivated. nVIDEO This is the actual Data Signal. The Laser is ON when the nVIDEO output signal level is LOW. nHSYNC This horizontal synchronization signal transmitted from the Beam Detection Sensor sets the horizontal position of the laser beam as it crosses the OPC Drum. nSTART This is the Scanner Motor Control Signal. The Scanner Motor rotates when the nSTART output signal level is LOW. nREADY A Phased-Lock Loop (PLL) circuit keeps the Scanner Motor speed constant when the nREADY is at a Low output signal level. CLK This is the Scanner Motor Clock. nS/H This is the Sample Hold Signal in order to adjust the Laser power. When the Laser switches on compulsorily, the Laser Power is adjusted to a suitable level and held until the next duty cycle in order to keep the Laser Power stable.
CN68 1 nS/H
Q24
20
3
2
19
1
IC34
6 nVIDEO
4
2
Laser Q23 +5V IC3
4
2
IC35 23
nHSYNC
Circuit
1
R328
Laser
3
2
C189
30
Timing Sensor
3 nPMON
Q21 1
21
2
Drive
R330
24 163
nLDON
3
+5V
R181
C190
SHINE
2
5
R326
2
nPMRY
1
nPMCK
Scanner Motor Drive Circuit
3
2 1
Q22
Scanner Motor
CN69
GND
LSU
SC PCB
Laser Unit Control Circuit Block Diagram
229 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
Edition 1.0 0
0
E-F, G-H Voltage
C-D Voltage
B
C103
RECTIFIER A CIRCUIT
A-B Voltage
INPUT CIRCUIT
OVER CURRENT LIMITTER
CONTROL CIRCUIT
D
CONVERTER CIRCUIT (Q100) C
ERROR DETECTION CIRCUIT
+24 VDC OUTPUT CIRCUIT
-5 VDC OUTPUT CIRCUIT
+5 VDC OUTPUT CIRCUIT
GND
+24 VDC OUTPUT
-5 VDC OUTPUT
GND
GND
+5 VP OUTPUT
GND
+5 VP OUTPUT
6.2.13
0
INPUT
+5 VP OUTPUT CIRCUIT
DX-600/800
Power Supply Unit (LVPS)
Block Diagram of DZEA000057
230
APR 2002
DX-600/800
DZEA000057 Input Circuit AC line voltage travels to the rectifying circuit through the line filter. The line filter eliminates RFI noise which may otherwise pass to the AC line from the power supply unit. It also protects the power supply unit from transient noise which may pass into the unit from the AC line. Rectifying Circuit AC power is rectified by D100 and charges C103 to make high DC voltage, then supply power to converter circuit. Kick-on voltage for control IC (IC105) is supplied AC power through R134, R135 and R136. Inrush current is limited by TH100. Converter Circuit A IC (IC105), in combination with transformer T100, form a switching power supply circuit using the RCC (Ringing Choke Converter) system. As soon as power is applied to the Power Supply Unit, AC line voltage is rectified by D100 and is smoothed by capacitor C103. The protection circuit at the time of start-up is controlled by an IC (IC105) and resistors R134, R135 and R136. T100 Ei
P --- Primary Winding S --- Secondary Winding B --- Control Winding
D102 Eo P
+
S
Q100 B
Control Circuit
Main Switching Circuit In the above circuit, when the main switching transistor, Q100, is turned On, input voltage, Ei, is supplied to the primary winding of transformer T100. However, no current will flow through diode D102 of the secondary side, due to reverse polarity of the secondary winding causing no current flow within T100. But the transformer charges with energy. When Q100 is turned Off, the supply voltage to the primary winding shuts off and the windings of T100 change polarity, allowing D102 to conduct, releasing the energy accumulated in T100 to the circuit. When the energy is discharged through D102, Q100 turns on, once again reversing the polarity on T100 windings, creating a self-oscillation circuit.
231 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
The value of output voltage is Eo=d/(1-d)*Ei
Ton : ON time of Q100
d=Ton/Ts
Ts : Period of oscillation
Equivalent circuit model for the RCC. SW Ei
D(D102)
Eo
(Q100)
L
VL
C
RL
T100
In the equivalent circuit ; When SW is ON, current flows SW L When SW is OFF, current flows L D RL The value of inductance increase current between ON period. (d*Ts) IL=Ei/L*d*Ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .(1) The value of inductance decrease current between OFF period. ((1-d)*Ts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .(2) From equation (1) and (2), E0=d/(1-d)*Ei
VL Ei T Eo
Ts
dTs
IL
(1-d)Ts
dTs
In the actual circuit, the fixed output voltages are obtained by changing the winding ratio of transformer T100. In this converter circuit, the output voltages are stabilized by controlling the duty cycle of the ON and OFF timing of the transistor. In this power supply, the bias winding is built into the transformer. The power supply has four outputs, +24 VDC, -5 VDC, +5 VP and +5 VDC. The +24 VDC output is protected by the Error Detection Circuit, and the +5VDC, +5 VP and -5 VDC outputs are protected by the circuitry inside of the voltage regulator IC. Control Circuit and Error Detection Circuit The control circuit amplifies the output of the duty cycle according to the error voltage detected by the Error Detection Circuit, and drives the main transistor Q100. The method used to change the duty cycle is to change the ON time period. When the output voltage of the +24 VDC circuit rises, the current of photo coupler PC103 increases, the output pulse width of the control circuit decreases and the ON time period of Q100 decreases. This control circuit decides the minimum OFF time period by itself. When the oscillation frequency becomes higher and the OFF time period becomes minimum, the OFF time period remains unchanged and only the ON time period decreases. This way, there is a upper limit of the oscillation frequency and the duty cycle is expanded.
232 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
Over Current Limiter (O.C.L) The +24 VDC output is limited by Ton MAX Limiter (ON time period of transistor Q100) which is part of the control circuit. The +5 VP, -5 VDC and +5 VDC outputs have over current limiters provided inside the voltage regulator.
233 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
6.2.14
LAN Control Circuit
LAN Controller Laser Printer MN86075 (IC30)
CCD PCB
LANB PCB
SHINE DZAC000273 (IC3)
Transformer (T1)
RJ45
INTERNET (10Base-T/100Base-TX) (1)
LANC PCB
S-DRAM 8MB (IC7)
LINK
LAN Controller (IC1)
ACTIVITY
Page Line Memory Memory (2) D-BUS
ECM Buffer
FROM 4MB Image Memory (IC10)
FROM 4MB Program (IC9)
CPU V850E/MA1 (IC1)
MODEM MN195006 (I22)
DAA Si3021, Si3015 (IC23,24)
Line
1. LAN Controller (IC1) This conforms to IEEE 802.3 Ethernet Controller. The CPU (SC PCB) bus is directly connected and the data interrupt is controlled by pLANINT. The 25 MHz clock is supplied by OSC 1. The LAN Controller for the system timing clock divides the frequency provided from OSC1. The clock signal is also supplied for the Manchester encoding/decoding circuit for data conversion. The LAN Controller is a mixed signal Analog/Digital device that implements the MAC and PHY portion of the CSMA/CD protocol at 10 and 100Mbps. The LAN controller contains a built in 8 KByte RAM for transmission and reception buffer. 2. EEPROM (IC2) This memory stores the configuration registers and MAC (Media Access Control) address for the LAN controller. Data is transferred to LAN controller (serial transfer) when the power is turned "On". The MAC address for the LAN controller represents the location on the LAN. 3. Filter Transformer (T1) A choke module transformer with a EMI filter. The output TX signal from the LAN controller is differentiated and transmitted on to the LAN via this module. Similarly, the input RX signal (differential input pair) is terminated by an externally connected 75 ohms resistor and input to the LAN controller via this module. 4. Ethernet Interface Provides the 10Base-T/100Base-TX Ethernet interface.
234 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
LED 1. LINK LED (LED1) The LINK LED normally illuminates when the LAN cable is connected and when a link pulse is detected. Consequently, LED can be used to determine whether the 10Base-T/100Base-TX cable has become disconnected (RX side). 2. Activity LED (LED2) This LED illuminates when reception data is present on the LAN. (The LED also illuminates when reception data for other devices is present.) Signal Routing 1. LAN Transmission a. Transfers the MMR coded data from Image Memory (FROM) to CPU (SC PCB) and converts the MH coded data. b. Transfer the MH coded data of CPU (SC PCB) to SDRAM. c. Transfer the converted text data to buffer RAM on LAN controller (LANB PCB) sequentially. d. The transmission packet is processed by FIFO transfer to buffer RAM and then converted for Manchester code. Finally, they are converted for differential pair signal and transmitted to Internet. 2. LAN Reception a. Processed received data for Manchester coded signal at LAN controller. b. The decoded received packet goes to buffer RAM through the FIFO. The data stored in buffer RAM is transferred to SDRAM (SC PCB) by requests from SC PCB. c. Decodes the Base 64 for MH coded image data at SDRAM and transfers CPU (SC PCB). d. Inputs MMR coded data from CPU transfers Image Memory (FROM).
235 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
7 General Network Information 7.1. 7.1.1.
Network Protocol OSI Reference Mode
Having a model in mind helps you understand how the pieces of the network puzzle fit together. The most commonly used model is the Open System Interconnection (OSI) reference model. The OSI model, first released in 1984 by the International Standards Organization (ISO), provides a useful structure for defining and describing the various processes underlying networking communications. The OSI model organizes communication protocols into seven layers. Layer 1, the Physical (Hardware) layer, consists of protocols that deal with how data is transferred across the transmission media. At the opposite end, Layer 7, the Application layer, interfaces the network services with the applications (software) in use on the computer. The five layers in between, Data Link, Network, Transport, Session and Presentation - perform intermediate communication tasks. In essence the OSI model is a framework that describes how a function from one computer is transmitted to another computer on the network.
Layer
Name
Function
7
Application
6
Presentation
5
Session
Protocol SMB SMTP FTP DNS HTTP Telnet etc...
NetBIOS, Windows, Sockets, etc... TDI
4
Transport
3
Network
TCP, UDP
IP, IPX, etc...
TCP/IP IPX/SPX Net BEUI Apple Talk IP Address etc... etc...
ODI Driver, NDIS Driver
2
1
Datalink
Physical
Router
PPP... NIC SW Hub Repeater Hub
Ethernet Token Ring FDDI ATM etc... RS-232C, X21...
MAC Address
OSI Reference Model and Network Terms
236 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
7.1.2.
Protocol
One reason for the popularity of TCP/IP is that no one vendor owns it, unlike the IPX/SPX, DNA, SNA or Apple Talk protocol suites, all of which are controlled by specific companies. TCP/IP evolved in response to input from a wide variety of industry sources. Consequently, it is the most open of the protocol suites and is supported by the widest variety of vendors. One huge advantage of using TCP/IP is that, it is required for communication over the Internet, thus the Internet can be used as a communication backbone. TCP/IP was originally designed by ARPANET (Advanced Research Project Agency) in 1969 for the UNIX operating system. In early 1980, UNIX 4.2 BSD version was released. For more detailed information, an RFC (Request for Comment) document is available from the IETF (Internet Engineering Task Force) on the Internet at http://www.ietf.org/. The Internet protocols do no map cleanly to the OSI reference model. The model for the Internet protocol suite has four layers. From the illustration below, you can see the approximate relationship of the layers.
Layer 7 6 5 4
3
2
1
OSI Reference Model TCP/IP Base Function Application This layer embraces functions of the OSI Application Session, Presentation and Application Presentation layers. Protocols at this layer provide Session network services. Compares to OSI Transport layer. Transport Transport Enables peer communication between hosts on the internetwork. Network Internet Corresponds roughly to the OSI Network layer. Protocols move data between devices on networks. Corresponds to the bottom two layers of Data Link Network the OSI model. This correspondence Interface enables the TCP/IP protocols to coexist with existing Data Link and Physical layer Physical standards. This layer is concerned with all aspects of transmitting and receiving data on the network. Comparison of the TCP/IP layers to the OSI model
7.1.3.
Cable
For the network transmission media at the Physical layer on the OSI reference model, there are several cable categories available. Category 5, 8 wire Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) cable is commonly used. Shielded Twisted Pair cables are also available. The Impedance for the STP / UTP Ethernet cable is 100 Ω. Category 3 is also used for the 10Base-T Ethernet. Category 1 2 3 4 5
Purpose Voice grade telephone line ISDN 10Base-T Token Ring (4M) Token Ring (16M) 100Base-TX, ATM (155M)
237 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
7.2. 7.2.1.
Layer Functions and Technology MAC (Media Access Control)
The MAC address is burnt into each network card for establishing addresses for nodes on the network. These addresses are hexadecimal in nature and are unique for each card. The First three bytes from the left end identify the manufacturer’s code that must be approved by IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers). The Remaining three bytes on the right half should be kept in a unique manner. For Ethernet connections, multiple stations share the topology, therefore, the identification packet from each station should be unique.
XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX Unique value Manufacturer ID MGCS:080023 7.2.2.
Network Control
CSMA/CD (Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection) If a node is trying to make a link to the network, transmission from another station is prohibited and halted until the data transfer is completed and the link is off. CSMA/CD and Token Passing are typical techniques used to control the connection. The General sequence is as follows: Wait for the next available timing to send, Send out a frame, Perform collision sensing simultaneously, Retry to send the same frame up to 16 times if necessary. (Sequence goes by a binary exponential back-off algorithm to avoid periodical incident) 802.3 (Ethernet) Frame Format
Least significant bit Most significant bit Pre-amble Destination MAC address Source MAC address Data type Data FCS 8 byte 6 byte 6 byte 2 byte 46 1500 byte 4 byte Destination MAC address: 6 byte (uni-cast or broadcast) If all "1" on 6 byte (FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF) means broadcast frame, it is detected by an applicable node, it must be passed to the upper layer. Also, if the destination MAC address is not matched with that node, the frame is discarded at that node immediately. Token Passing Token passing utilizes a frame called a token, which circulates around the network. A computer that needs to transmit must wait until it receives the token, at which time the computer is permitted to transmit. When the computer is done transmitting, it passes the token frame to the next station on the network. The first station that is powered up on a token-ring network automatically becomes the active monitor station. Its responsibility is to announce itself to the next active downstream station as the active monitor station and request that station to announce itself to its next active downstream station. After each station announces itself to its next active downstream neighbor, the announcing station becomes the nearest active upstream neighbor (NAUN) to the downstream station. After each station becomes aware of its NAUN, the beaconing process continues every seven seconds.
238 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
A computer in the ring captures the token, if it has data to transmit, it holds the token and transmits a data frame. This data frame is passed to each computer in the ring, which checks whether it is the intended recipient of the frame. When the frame reaches the destination address, the destination PC copies the frame to a receive buffer, updates the frame status field of the data frame and puts the frame back on the ring.When the computer that originally sent the frame receives it back from the ring, it acknowledges a successful transmission, takes the frame off the ring, and places the token back on the ring. Token Frame indicates that the network is available for transmission. Data Frame indicates that the network is busy processing a transmission. Token Frame Format
Least significant bit Most significant bit Start De-limiter (SFD) P P P S M R R R End De-limiter (ED) 1 byte 1 byte P: priority S: Status 0 = Token Frame 1 = Data Frame R: Reserved Data Frame Format
Most significant bit Access Frame SFD 1 byte Control control 1 byte 1 byte
Destination Source Data MAC MAC 6 or 2 byte 6 or 2 byte
Least significant bit FCS ED Frame 4 byte 1 byte Status 1 byte
Data: Max 4429 byte (4M) Max 17779 (16M) There are several different bit types assigned for Frame Status. For example, 1 and 5 bit indicates that the token has been read, 2 and 6 bit indicates that the frame has been copied by another station. Thus, we can confirm whether the Data Frame was delivered.
239 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
7.2.3.
Ethernet
Ethernet is a very popular local area network architecture based on the CSMA/CD access method. The original ethernet specification was the basis for the IEEE 802.3 specifications. Typically, ethernet networks can use a bus physical topology, although, many varieties of ethernet such as 10Base-T uses a star physical topology and a bus logical topology. (Microsoft uses the term "star bus topology" to describe 10Base-T)
10Base-5
Speed (bps) Topology Cable Type 10M Bus Yellow cable
10Base-T 10M 100Base-TX 100M
Star Star
Max Length 500 m (1640 ft)
Twisted Pair (Cat. 3, 4, 5) 100 m (328 ft) Twisted Pair (Cat. 5) 200 m (656 ft)
802.3 (CSMA/CD) Network Type
Max length (x 100m) 10
BASE
Logical speed (Mbps)
5 BASE : baseband (digital) BROAD: broadband (analog)
10
BASE
-
T TP Twisted Pair
hyphen "-" means type of cable no "-" means max length Ethernet Configuration
240 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
1 2 3 6
TX (+) TX (-) RX (+) RX (-)
1
1
TX (+)
1
2
2
TX (-)
2
3
3
RX (+)
3
6
6
RX (-)
6
Straight Cable
Crossed Cable
Ethernet Cable Pin Configuration All eight pins on the Ethernet cable are normally wired in this configuration accordingly. The Electrical level follows the Manchester code configuration.
"1"
"0" 0V
-2.05 V Out of balance in electrical levels indicates that a collision is occurring in a certain area. To avoid from further malfunctions, terminating the physical end is required for coaxial cables. If a collision is detected, transmission is stopped and a maximum of 4.8 usec. of JAM packet is sent. The node that receives the JAM packet, discards the applicable received data. The maximum timing for collision detection is called slot time, normally set to 49.9 usec. The interval of 9.6 usec to 10 usec after the end of transmission frame is reserved for non-transmission period. There are several merits to Ethernet wiring, the physical connection is easy and flexible for future expansion due to the star topology.
7.2.4.
Repeater
The main purpose of a repeater is to extend the maximum range for the network cabling. They operate at the OSI Physical layer, and do not filter or interpret the signal - they merely repeat (regenerate) the signal, passing all network traffic in all directions. They perform signal amplitude, delete errors and reschedule the timing. Repeaters also follow the 5-4-3 rule, where no more than 5 network segments connected by 4 repeaters, with no more than 3 of the segments being populated. Active Hubs function in part as repeaters (amplify and regenerate network signals), they occasionally are called multiport repeaters.
7.2.5.
NIC (Network Interface Card)
NIC is an acronym for Network Interface Card, which plugs into a computer and adapts the network interface to the appropriate standard. ISA, PCI, and PCMCIA cards are all examples of NICs.
241 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
7.3. 7.3.1.
Network Layer IP Address
An IP address is a set of four numbers, or octets, that can range in value between 0 and 255. Each octet is separated by a period (i.e. 192.168.31.1). All devices on a network that runs the TCP/IP protocol suite need a unique IP address. Most machines use a Domain Name, which are easier for people to remember. The IP addresses are actually broken down into three distinct classes, knows as class A, class B and class C addresses. Class A IP addresses contain a number between 1 and 127 before the first dot. In class A address, this first octet represents the network address, and the last three octets represent the node or host number. Class B IP addresses can range in value from 128 to 191 for the first octet, but it is the first two octets that make up the network address, and the last two octets that make up the host ID. Class C IP addresses can range in value from 192 to 223 for the first octet, and the first three octets make up the host ID. There are class D and E addresses as well. For these addresses, the first octet is a number greater than 223. These addresses are not currently available to be used and are reserved for other purposes. Class A : First octet reserved for the network address Class B : First two octets reserved for the network address Class C : First three octets reserved for the network address
Class A 0 Class B 1 0 Class C 1 1 0 Network address represented as Private networks that do not connect to the Internet (operate internally) allow additional flexibility with IP addresses. Three classifications are available as shown below: Class A : 10.0.0.0 - 10.255.255.255 Class B : 172.16.0.0 - 172.31.255.255 Class C : 192.168.0.0 - 192.168.255.255
242 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
7.3.2.
Subnet Mask
A subnet mask defines how sub-segments of a network are treated.
IP 192.168.32.1 Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Network Address 192.168.32.0
1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 192 168 32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 255 255 0 255 IP Subnet Mask
1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Network Address Configuration
Global IP Address 190.0.0.0 255.255.0.0
190.0.3.1 255.255.255.0
190.0.3.2 255.255.255.0
190.0.3.3 255.255.255.0
190.0.2.2 255.255.255.0
190.0.2.3 255.255.255.0
Router 190.0.2.1 255.255.255.0
Note Upper: IP address Lower: Subnet mask
190.0.1.1 255.255.255.0
190.0.1.2 255.255.255.0
190.0.1.3 255.255.255.0
Third Floor
Second Floor
Ground Floor
Class B Subnet Outline For network management purposes, special IP addresses are assigned. 1. Host address is set to all “0” 2. Host address is set to all “1” Reserved for IP broadcasting to all subnet stations. 3. All 4 octets are set to all “1” IP broadcast of 255.255.255.255 can be passed over the router when the network address is specified. Normally, this is used for DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) network. 4. All 4 octets are set to all “0” Reserved for default route for non-destination address 5. Most significant bit starting with “127” Reserved for loop back address
243 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
7.3.3.
Internet Protocol
The IP (Internet Protocol) operating at the OSI Network layer, is a connectionless protocol that provides datagram service, and IP packets are most commonly referred to as IP data grams. It performs the following typical functions: 1. Identifies the IP address 2. Packet disassembly and reassembly of the IP datagram 3. Routing of the IP address
4 byte Version
Internet Header Length
Type Of Service
Total Length
ID Time To Live
Flags
Fragment Offset Header Checksum
Protocol Source Address Destination Address Option + Padding (size varies) Data
IP Datagram Terms Version Internet Header Length Type Of Service ID Flags Fragment Offset Time To Live Protocol Header Checksum Source Address Destination Address Option Padding
Detail Currently version 4 IP Header field length Service priority requested by IP Datagram (3 bits are reserved for precedence) Identification frame number for upper layer communication Packet disassembly information Offset from most significant bit Decrement the counter until 0 every time packet pass over the router Upper layer protocol identification number. ie TCP (06h), UDP (11h) Checksum is used for error checking on the header data Sender’s IP Address Destination’s IP Address When implemented Fill bit field to add up to 32 bit
244 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
7.3.4.
Router
Routers, operating at the OSI Network layer, organize the large network in terms of logical network segments. Each network segment is assigned an address so that every packet has both a destination network address and a destination device address. Routers are more intelligent than bridges. Not only do routers build tables of network locations, but they also use algorithms to determine the most efficient path for sending a packet to any given network by identifying its header information. These are the typical functions: 1. Routing This controls the traffic according to a specified routing table. 2. Packet Filtering This performs the access and security control for specified routing.
access-list permit tcp 192.168.32.0 0.0.0.255 192.168.33.1 0.0.0.0 eq 23 192.168.32/24
PC-A 192.168.32.1/24
192.168.33/24 Router B
PC-C 192.168.33.1/24
PC-B 192.168.32.2/24
OK
PC-D 192.168.33.2/24
OK permission denied
permission denied Packet Filtering Sample 3. Address Conversion NAT (Network Address Translator), This performs conversion of a single global IP Address from/to single private IP Address. 4. IP Masquerade: This performs a conversion of single global IP Address from/to multiple private IP Address. At the same time the port number is automatically assigned. Occasionally, the conversion creates a bottleneck in the network overhead. For a typical solution, PIX (Private address Internet address exchange) is available from Cisco, which is a well-known manufacturer. 5. Designated Reply These are reply that keep a connection alive by responding with a signal periodically. Watch Dog in IPX/SPX, TCP/IP in TCP, and Net BT (NetBIOS on TCP/IP) in Windows NT are all well known techniques to keep a live connection.
245 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
7.4. 7.4.1.
Transport Layer TCP (Transmission Control Protocol)
The TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) is an internetwork connection-oriented protocol that corresponds to the OSI Transport layer. TCP provides full-duplex, end-to-end connections. When the end-to-end communication acknowledgement is not required, the UDP (User Datagram Protocol) can be substituted for the TCP at the Transport (host-to-host) level. TCP and UDP operate at the same layer. The UDP is a connectionless oriented protocol.
IP Datagram TCP segment IP Header (20 byte)
TCP Header (20 byte)
Application D ata (vary)
TCP Segment in IP Datagram Source Port (2 byte) Destination Port (2 byte) Sequence Number (4 byte) Acknowledgment Number (4 byte) Header Length (4 bit)
Reserved (6 bit)
Control Flag (6 bit)
Checksum (2 byte) Option
Window (6 byte) Urgent Pointer (2 byte) PAD
Data (Segment)
TCP Segment Outline
TCP Header Monitoring Sample
246 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
Client
SYN, Se
quential
No.=453
8970
Increments No. sequentially
538971 K No.=4 000 ACK, AC 1919424 .= o N l a ti quen SYN, Se ACK, AC K
No.=191
9724001
Server
Panasonic Device TCP 3 Handshake General Flowchart The client generates random sequential numbers initially and sends them to the server. The initial sequential numbers are synchronized with the clock and increments the counter every 4 msec. The Server responds with an acknowledgement that increments the initial sequential number by one. The ACK bit number is also changed to a "1" value. The "SYN" can have and identical "ACK" response for each packet, thus, the server and the client can establish a connection.
247 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
7.5. 7.5.1.
Upper Layer DNS (Domain Name System)
The DNS (Domain Name System) protocol provides host name and IP address resolution as a service to client applications. DNS servers enable humans to use logical node names, utilizing a fully qualified domain name structure, to access network resources. Domain Names are comprised of 2 or more parts, separated by dots. The part on the left is the most specific, and the part on the right is the most general. A given device may have more than one Domain Name but a given Domain Name points to only one device. For example, the Domain Names below: Panasonic.com Mail.panasonic.com ifax.panasonic.com can all refer to the same device, but each domain name can refer to no more than one device. Usually, all of the devices on a given network will have the same right-hand portion of their Domain Names (i.e. panasonic.com in the examples above). It is also possible for a Domain Name to exist but not be connected to an actual device. This is often done so that a group or business can have an Internet email address without having to establish a real Internet site. In these cases, some real Internet machine must handle the email on behalf of the listed Domain Name. Specification for this name system follows this basic guideline. • The name must be separated by dots and must start with ASCII code. • Only Alpha numeric and hyphen are available. • Up to 63 characters maximum, separated by dots. • Up to 255 characters maximum, including all dots. • Capital letters and small letters are not identical. (Case Sensitive.)
DNS Server (root) DNS Server (jp)
3 2 1
Panasonic Device
5 4 6
10 8 DNS Server (panasonic.com)
DNS Server (co.jp)
7
9
DNS Server Mail Server mlsv.panafax.co.jp (panafax.co.jp) domain
DNS Name Resolution Sample The advantage of using a DNS server over a host lookup table, for host name resolution, is to avoid the need for a single centralized clearinghouse for all names. The authority for this information can be delegated to different organizations on the network responsible for it. There are at least 10 Root DNS servers installed all over the world.
248 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
The Name resolution flow is shown in the illustration above and follows the sequence below: 1. Query the local DNS Server. 2. Query the root DNS Server because the domain belongs to a destination outside of the company. 3. Com root DNS Server sends the query to the jp root DNS Server. 4. The procedure repeats until a final name resolution is available. 5. The panafax.co.jp server responds with an IP address for the query name. 6. Finally, the name resolution is completed and the destination IP address is determined. All DNS servers makes an effort to resolve the query name with an IP address, however, a response is not always sent out every time. Once a name resolution is completed, the information from the DNS Server IP address table is kept in cache memory at each DNS server in accordance with a minimum TTL (Time To Live) of SOA (Start Of Authority) record. There are two types of Name Servers, Primary and Secondary Name Server.
7.5.2.
Primary Name Server
A primary server has the original copy of a zone file. Any changes made to the zone file are made to the copy on the primary server. When a primary server receives a query about a host name in its own zone, it retrieves the host resolution locally from its own zone files.
7.5.3.
Secondary Name Server
A secondary server gets a copy of zone files from another server. This zone file is a read-only copy of the original file from the primary server. Any changes made to the zone file are made at the primary server, then the changes are copied down to the secondary server through a zone transfer. Multiple secondary servers in a domain improves performance.
249 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
7.5.4.
SOA (Start of Authority) Record
Each database file starts with a Start of Authority (SOA) record for the file. This record specifies the zone’s primary server, the server that maintains the read/write copy of the file. The syntax of this record is as follows: IN SOA An example of the syntax is shown below: ; ; File: db.127.0.0 file ; Purpose: This file establishes the identity of this DNS. ; SOA stands for 'start of authority' and sets the ; default parameters for information this DNS is ; authoritative for: ; @ IN SOA nwr42.rdmg.mgcs.mei.co.jp. hostmaster.rdmg.mgcs.mei.co.jp. ( 951213 ; serial number 43200 ; refresh every 12 hours ; retry after 2 hours 7200 1209600 ; expire after 2 weeks 172800) ; default ttl is 2 days ; IN NS nwr42.rdmg.mgcs.mei.co.jp. 1 IN PTR localhost.rdmg.mgcs.mei.co.jp. ;
SOA Record (Bind 4.9.5 for NT) in "db.127.0.0" file The "@" symbol in this example indicates the local server; "IN" indicates an Internet record. The FQDN for the name server NWR18 must end in a period. Note that the email address for the administrator must have a period instead of the "@" symbol. Also, if the SOA record is on more than one line, an open parenthesis must end the first line, and a close parenthesis must end the last line. The following list explains the other parameters: * Source host: The name of the host that has the read/write copy of the zone file. * Contact email: The Internet email address of the person who maintains this file. This address must be expressed with a period instead of the "@" that is usually found in email addresses (i.e. hostmaster.rdmg.mgcs.mei.co.jp instead of [email protected]). * Serial number: A version number for the zone file. This number should be changed each time the zone file changes, it changes automatically if you use DNS Manager to change the zone file. * Refresh time: The time, in seconds, that a secondary server waits before checking the master server for changes to the database file. If the file has changed, the secondary server requests a zone transfer. * Retry time: The time, in seconds, that a secondary server waits before trying again if a zone transfer fails. * Expiration time: The time, in seconds, that a secondary server keeps trying to transfer a zone. After the expiration time passes, the old zone information is deleted. * TTL: The time, in seconds, that a server can cache resource records from this database file. The TTL is sent as part of the response for any queries that are answered from this database file. An individual resource record can have a TT: that overrides this value.
250 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
7.5.5.
A (Address) Record
The A (Address) Record, lists the addresses for a given machine. The name field is the machine’s name and the address is the network address. There should be one A record for each address on the machine.
; BIND version named 4.9.5-Rel+-Monday-dd-Month-yy ; BIND version GregSchueman-LarryKahn-VirajBais ; zone ' rdmg.mgcs.mei.co.jp' last serial 720 ; from 133.185.245.7 at Sun Mmm dd:11:35 yyyy $ORIGIN mgcs.mei.co.jp. rdmg IN SOA nwmgr.mgcs.mei.co.jp. postmaster.rdmg.mgcs.mei.co.jp. ( 721 10800 3600 604800 86400 ) IN NS nwmgr.mgcs.mei.co.jp. IN MX 10 mlsv2.rdmg.mgcs.mei.co.jp. $ORIGIN rdmg.mgcs.mei.co.jp. ifax-gz03 IN A 172.21.94.216 qmc-cco1 IN A 133.185.254.212 ifaxos01 IN A 172.21.97.26 ifpdyna IN A 202.244.202.29
A Record (Bind 4.9.5 for NT) in "db zone.info" file
7.5.6.
PTR (Pointer) Record
Pointer records are the reverse-lookup file entries that enable IP addresses to be resolved to host names. DNS is used to resolve host names to IP addresses, so the opposite process is called reverse lookup. They specify the IP address in reverse order (like a DNS name, with the most specific information first) and then corresponding host name. The files are named according to the class of network, but with the octets in reverse order. The syntax for a PTR record is shown below: IN PTR
1 ;
IN NS IN PTR
nwr42.rdmg.mgcs.mei.co.jp. localhost.rdmg.mgcs.mei.co.jp.
PTR record (Bind 4.9.5 for NT) in "db.127.0.0" file. 7.5.7.
CNAME (Canonical Name) Record
The CNAME (or canonical name) record is an alias (nickname), enabling you to specify more than one name for each IP address. The syntax of a CNAME is shown below: CNAME Using CNAME records, you can combine an FTP and a Web server on the same host. Nicknames are useful when a well-known host changes its name. In this case, its usually a good idea to have a CNAME record so people still using the old name, will get to the right place.
251 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
7.5.8.
NS (Name Server) Record
The Name Server record specifies the other name servers for a domain. The syntax for a name server record is shown below: IN NS An example of a name server record follows below: @ IN NS nwmgr.mgcs.mei.co.jp The "@" symbol indicates the local domain. The server "nwmgr" in the domain "mgcs.mei.co.jp" is the name server.
7.5.9.
MX (Mail Exchange) Record
The Mail Exchange (MX) record specifies the name of the host that processes mail for this domain. If you list multiple mail servers, you can set a preference number (value) that specifies the order in which the mail server should be used. Note that lower values indicate higher precedence, and that mailers are supposed to randomize same-value MX hosts so as to distribute the load evenly if values are equal. If the first preferred mail server does not respond, the second one is contacted, and so on. If you want a host to receive its own mail, you should create an MX record for your host’s name, pointing at your host’s name. The syntax of this record is shown below: IN MX For a more detail, please refer to RFC974 document at URL http://www.ietf.org/.
7.5.10. Reverse Lookup This is a special domain for allowing address to name mapping. As Internet host addresses do not fall within domain boundaries, this special domain was formed to allow inverse mapping. The IN-ADDR.ARPA domain has four labels preceding it. These labels correspond to the 4 octets of an Internet address. All four octets must be specified even if an octet contains zero. The Internet address 128.32.0.4 is located in the domain 4.0.32.128.IN-ADDR.ARPA. This reversal of the address is awkward to read but allows for the natural grouping of hosts in a network.
7.5.11.
Forwarding
A Slave Server is a server that always forwards queries it cannot satisfy from its cache, to a fixed list of forwarding servers instead of interacting with the name servers for the root and other domains. The queries to the forwarding servers are recursive queries. There may be one or more forwarding servers, and they are tried in turn until the list is exhausted. A Slave and forwarder configuration is typically used when you do not wish all the servers at a given site to interact with the rest of the Internet servers. A typical scenario would involve a number of workstations and a departmental timesharing machine with Internet access. The workstations might be administratively prohibited from having Internet access. To give the workstations the appearance of access to the Internet domain system, the workstations could be Slave servers to the timesharing machine, which would forward the queries and interact with other name servers to resolve the query before returning the answer. An added benefit of using the forwarding feature is that the central machine develops a much more complete cache of information that all the workstations can take advantage of. The use of Slave mode and forwarding is discussed further under the description of the named bootfile commands. There is no prohibition against declaring a server to be a slave even though it has primary and/or secondary zones as well; the effect will still be that anything in the local server’s cache or zones will be answered, and anything else will be forwarded using the forwarders list. For more detail, please refer to published book (i.e. DNS and BIND etc) provided from O’ Reilly & Associates, Inc.
252 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
7.6.
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)
The objective of Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is to transfer mail reliably and efficiently. SMTP is independent of the particular transmission subsystem and requires only a reliable ordered data stream channel. The SMTP design is based on the following model of communication: as the result of a user mail request, the sender-SMTP establishes a two-way transmission channel to a receiver-SMTP. The receiver-SMTP may be either the ultimate destination or an intermediate. SMTP commands are generated by the senderSMTP and sent to the receiver-SMTP. SMTP replies are sent from the receiver-SMTP to the sender-SMTP in response to the commands. Once the transmission channel is established, the SMTP-sender sends a MAIL command indicating the sender of the mail. If the SMTP-receiver can accept mail it responds with an OK reply. The SMTP-sender then sends a RCPT command identifying a recipient of the mail. If the SMTP-receiver can accept mail for that recipient it responds with an OK reply, if not, it responds with a reply rejecting that recipient (but not the whole mail transaction). The SMTP-sender and SMTP-receiver may negotiate several recipients. When the recipients have been negotiated the SMTP-sender sends the mail data, terminating with a special sequence. If the SMTP-receiver successfully processes the mail data it responds with an OK reply. The dialog is purposely lock-step, one-at-a-time. For more detail, please refer to the URL http:// www.imc. org/rfc821
Internet SMTP Server
PC
DNS Server SMTP
POP Server
PC POP 3
Internet Mail Sending and Receiving
7.6.1.
Mail Header Sample Received: from nwr35 by labo.mgcs.com (8.9.3/3.7W-RDMG) with SMTP id PAA09157 Delivery route for ; Sun, dd Mmm yyyy 15:04:48 +0900 (JST) Date: Sun, dd Mmm yyyy 15:04:48 +0900 (JST) Message-Id: <[email protected]> Message ID Mime-Version: 1.0 X-Mailer: Internet FAX, MGCS From: "MGCS" Subject: IMAGE from Internet FAX To: [email protected] Content-Type: multipart/mixed; boundary="+-+-+-MGCS-+-+-+" Content-Type X-UIDL: 8f32e4b1d691fdfc28daa812d913f572
253 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
7.7. 7.7.1.
ITU T.37 and RFC2305 Mode of Operation
The Unit conforms to the ITU T.37 standards and RFC2305. This Internet store and forward facsimile uses approved IETF protocols for posting, relaying and delivery of documents. It requires no changes to Internet standards or to ITU Facsimile Recommendations. Store and forward facsimiles may operate in one of two modes. Communicating in the Simple Mode as defined below provides inter operability. All terminals conforming to this recommendation and capable of reception must be able to receive in Simple Mode. It is recommended that terminals conforming to this recommendation and capable of transmitting should, as a minimum, be capable of transmitting in Simple Mode. Simple Mode supports the transfer of image data. Capability exchange and confirmation of receipt are not required for Simple Mode but may be provided using optional email functions outside the scope of this recommendation.
7.7.2.
Implementation Requirements for T.37 Simple Mode Table Sender
Required
Strongly recommended Optional
Send data as a single MIME multi-page TIFF Profile S file Provide notice in case of local transmission problem Provide a return address of an Internet email receiver which is MIME compliant Include Message-ID Use Base 64 encoding for image data Use other TIFF Profiles if it has prior knowledge that such profiles are supported by the receiver Provide notice on receipt of DSN or other notifications Receiver
Required
Optional
Be MIME compliant except that it is not required to offer to place MIME attachment in a file and may print a received file rather than display Be capable of processing multiple MIME TIFF Profile S image files within a single message Provide notice in case of reception or processing problems Use other TIFF Profiles
254 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
Offramp Gateway (when implemented)
Required
Strongly recommended Optional
7.7.3.
Be SMTP compliant Provide delivery failure notification Be able to process PSTN/FAX email address Comply with the relevant ITU Recommendations relating to facsimile transmission Attempt to relay authorized email to the corresponding G3 facsimile terminals Ensure DSN for delivery failure notification Use DSN for delivery failure notification Use an approved mailbox access protocol when serving multiple users Translate image data into a format acceptable by the receiving G3 facsimile terminal Use a mailbox access protocol when serving a single mail recipient
Definitions and Abbreviations IETF RFC MIME POP3 SMTP DSN MDN TIFF IFD Offramp gateway Mailstore Notice
Internet Engineering Task Force Request For Comment Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions Post Office Protocol version 3 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol Delivery Status Notification Message Disposition Notification Tagged Image File Format TIFF Image File Directory Equipment capable of receiving email and relaying to one or more G3/ G4 facsimile terminals Equipment capable of receiving email and storing it for retrievals by receiver Provision of status information to the originator or recipient in a manner to be determined by the device RFC reference http://www.imc.org/ietf-fax/
File Format for Internet Fax RFC2301 Tag Image File Format (TIFF) image/tiff MIME Sub-type RFC2302 Registration Minimal PSTN address format in Internet Mail RFC2303 Minimal FAX address format in Internet Mail RFC2304 A simple Mode of Facsimile Using Internet Mail RFC2305 Tag Image File Format (TIFF)-F Profile for facsimile RFC2306
255 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
7.7.4.
File Format for Internet Fax
Sending Internet Fax devices must be able to write minimum set TIFF files, according to the rules for creating minimum set TIFF files defined in TIFF for Facsimile (the S profile) [RFC2301], which is also compatible with the specification for the minimum subset of TIFF-F in [RFC2306]. Receiving Internet Fax devices MUST be able to read minimum set TIFF files. The Following tree diagram shows the relationship among profiles and between profiles and coding methods.
S (MH) Color
B/W
C (JPEG) J (JBIG)
F (MMR, MR)
L (JPEG)
M (MRC)
MRC: Mixed Raster Content A profile is based on a collection of ITU-T facsimile coding methods. Class S F J C L
Color B/W B/W B/W Color Color
M
Color
Coding Method MH MMR, MR JBIG JPEG (lossy) JPEG (lossless, grayscale) Mixed Raster Content
Remarks Internet Fax minimal set Internet Fax full mode Internet Fax mixed mode Color minimal set One bit per color,palletized color image, continuos tone color and grayscale images Multiple coders and resolution within a page
256 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
7.7.5.
Minimal Set
The minimum interchange set of TIFF fields that must be supported by all implementations in order to assure that some form of an image, albeit black-and-white, can be interchanged. The table below summarizes the TIFF fields that comprise the minimal interchange set for black-and-white facsimile. The Baseline and Extenuation fields and fields values must be supported by all implementations. Baseline Fields Bits Per Sample Compression Fill Order Image Width Image Length New Sub File Type Page Number Photometric Interpretation Resolution Unit Rows Per Strip Samples Per Pixel Strip Byte Counts Strip Offsets X Resolution Y Resolution Extensions Fields T4 Options
7.7.6.
Values 1 3:1 dimension MH coding set T4 Options = 0 or 4 Least significant bit first 1728 (A-4) N: total number of scan lines in image 2: Bit 1 identifies single page of a multi-page document N, m: page number n followed by total page count m 0: pixel value 1 means black 2: inch Number of scan lines per strip = Image length, with one strip 1 Number of byte in TIFF strip Offsets from beginnings of file to single TIFF strip 204, 200 (pixels/inch) 98, 196, 100, 200 (pixels/inch) 0: MH coding, EOLs not byte aligned4: MH coding, EOLs byte aligned
Addressing
A simple method of encoding PSTN addresses in the local-part of Internet email addresses, along with an extension mechanism to allow encoding of additional standard attributes needed for email gateway to PSTN-based services.
(1) Offramp
(2) Sub address
(3) Others
FAX= +12125551212@ panafax.com Global-phone Service selector
Domain
FAX= +3940 / T33S=183 @ faxworld.org Sub address Selector Global-phone Service selector VOICE = +3940183@ panafax.com Global-phone Service selector
Domain
Domain
257 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
Note: For RFC2305, a PSTN address in an email address should follow the above style. The key words “MUST”, “MUST NOT”, “REQUIRED”, “SHALL”, “SHALL NOT”, “SHOULD”, “SHOULD NOT”, “RECOMMENDED”, “MAY”, and “OPTIONAL” in this document are to be interpreted as described in RFC 2119. URL http://www.imc.org/rfc2119 1. MUST This word, or the terms “REQUIRED” or “SHALL”, means that the definition is an absolute requirement of the specification. 2. MUST NOT This phrase, or the phrase “SHALL NOT”, means that the definition is an absolute prohibition of the specification. 3. SHOULD These words, or the adjective “RECOMMENDED”, means that there may exist valid reasons in particular circumstances to ignore a particular item, but the full implications must be understood and carefully weighed before choosing a different course. 4. SHOULD NOT This phrase, or the phrase “NOT RECOMMENDED” means that there may exist valid reasons in particular circumstances when the particular behavior is acceptable or even useful, but the full implications should be understood and the case carefully weighed before implementing any behavior described with this label.
7.7.7.
Coding Example of a TIFF Header, IFD and Image Data Header Value Offset
IFD (Page 0) Long Values Image Data (Page 0)
Value Offset
IFD (Page 1) Long Values Image Data (Page 1)
First IFD Offset Next IFD Offset Strip Offset
Next IFD Offset Strip Offset
IFD (Page 2) File Structure
258 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
Message Header Contents
7.7.8.
Delivery Failure
In the event of relay failure, the sending relay must generate a failure message, which should be in the format of a DSN.
7.7.9.
Image File Format
The Sending Internet Fax devices MUST be able to write minimum set TIFF files, according to the rules for creating minimum set TIFF files defined in TIFF for Facsimile (the S profile), which is also compatible with the specifications for the minimum subset of TIFF-F in F Profile for Facsimile, RFC 2306. The Receiving Internet Fax devices must be able to read minimum set TIFF files.
259 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
7.8.
Communication Protocols
The set of conventions necessary to achieve facsimile-compatible service covers basic data transport, document data formats, message (document) addressing, delivery confirmation, and message security. Protocol supported by the your Panasonic Device is as follows:
SMTP Command & Reply Procedure SMTP Server (sv2.labo.mgcs.com)
your Panasonic Device (ef1.labo.mgcs.com) TCP 3 Way Handshake & Opening Session [5 minutes]
Opening TCP Connection (TCP Port No. 25) 220 sv2.labo.mgcs.com Service ready
SMTP Command
HELO sv2.labo.mgcs.com 250 ef1.labo.mgcs.com MAIL FROM: [5 minutes]
250 OK RCPT TO:
[5 minutes]
250 OK DATA
[2 minutes]
250 Start mail out;end with .
DATA BLOCK
DATA BLOCK 1 [3 minutes] [3 minutes] DATA BLOCK n CR/LF . CR/LF [10 minutes] Closing
DATA BLOCK 2
250 OK QUIT 221sv2.labo.mgcs.com Service closing transmission channel Closing TCP Connection (TCP Port No. 25)
According to RFC1123, there are two approaches for time-outs in the sender-SMTP: 1. limit the time for each SMTP command separately, or 2. limit the time for the entire SMTP dialogue for a single mail message. A sender-SMTP SHOULD use option (a), per-command timeouts.Timeouts SHOULD be easily reconfigurable, preferably without recompiling the SMTP code. The value of timer [ ] shown above are recommended by RFC1123.
260 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
7.8.1.
Opening and Closing
At the time the transmission channel is opened there is an exchange of commands to ensure that the hosts are communicating with the hosts they think they are. The following two commands are used in the transmission channel for opening and closing: HELO: QUIT: In the HELO command, the host sending the command identifies itself; the command may be interpreted as saying, “Hello, I am ”.
7.8.2.
Mail (MAIL)
This command is used to initiate a mail transaction in which the mail data is delivered to one or more mailboxes.
7.8.3.
RECIPIENT (RCPT)
This command is used to identify an individual recipient of the mail data; multiple recipients are specified by multiple uses of this command.
7.8.4.
Data (DATA)
The receiver treats the lines following the command as mail data from the sender. This command causes the mail data from this command to be appended to the mail data buffer. The mail data may contain any of the 128 ASCII character codes. The mail data is terminated by a line containing only a period, that is the character sequence “.”. This is the end of mail data indication.
7.8.5.
Send
This command is used to initiate a mail transaction in which the mail data is delivered to one or more terminals. This command is successful if the message is delivered to a terminal.
7.8.6.
Reset (RSET)
This command specifies that the current mail transaction is to be aborted. Any stored sender, recipients, and mail data must be discarded, and all buffers and state tables cleared. The receiver must send an OK reply.
7.8.7.
Verify (VRFY)
This command asks the receiver to confirm that the argument identifies a user. If it is a user name, the full name of the user (if known) and the fully specified mailbox are returned.
7.8.8.
Quit (QUIT)
This command specifies that the receiver must send an OK reply, and then close the transmission channel.
7.8.9.
Reply Codes from SMTP Server
SMTP is independent of the particular transmission subsystem and requires only a reliable ordered data stream channel. The SMTP design is based on the following model of communication: as the result of a user mail request, the sender-SMTP establishes a two-way transmission channel to a receiver-SMTP. The receiver-SMTP may be either the ultimate destination or an intermediate. SMTP commands are generated by the sender-SMTP and sent to the receiver-SMTP. SMTP replies are sent from the receiver-SMTP to the sender-SMTP in response to the commands.
261 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
7.8.10. 211 220 221 250 251 354 421 450 451 452 500 501 502 503 504 550 551 552 553 554
NUMERIC ORDER LIST OF REPLY CODES System status or system help reply Service ready Service closing transmission channel Requested mail action okay# completed User not local; will forward to Start mail input; end with . Service not available: closing transmission channel [This may be a reply to any command if the service knows it must shut down] Requested mail action not taken: mailbox unavailable [E.g.# mailbox busy] Requested action aborted: local error in processing Requested action not taken: insufficient system storage Syntax error# command unrecognized [This may include errors such as command line too long] Syntax error in parameters or arguments Command not implemented Bad sequence of commands Command parameter not implemented Requested action not taken: mailbox unavailable [E.g.# mailbox not found# no access] User not local; please try Requested mail action aborted: exceeded storage allocation Requested action not taken: mailbox name not allowed [E.g.# mailbox syntax incorrect] Transaction failed
262 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
7.9. 7.9.1.
POP (Post Office Protocol Version 3) Introduction
On certain types of smaller nodes in the Internet it is often impractical to maintain a message transport system (MTS). For example, a workstation may not have sufficient resources (cycles, disk space) in order to permit a SMTP server and associated local mail delivery system to be kept resident and continuously running. Similarly, it may be expensive (or impossible) to keep a personal computer interconnected to an IP-style network for long amounts of time. The Post Office Protocol - Version 3 (POP3) is intended to permit a workstation to dynamically access a mail drop on a server host in a useful fashion. Usually, this means that the POP3 protocol is used to allow a workstation to retrieve mail that the server is holding for it. For more detail, please refer to URL of http:// www.imc.org/rfc1939
7.9.2.
Basic Operation
Initially, the server host starts the POP3 service by listening on TCP Port No. 110. When a client host wishes to make use of the service, it establishes a TCP connection with the server host. When the connection is established, the POP3 server sends a greeting. The client and POP3 server then exchange commands and responses (respectively) until the connection is closed or aborted. Commands in the POP3 consist of a case-insensitive keyword, possibly followed by one or more arguments. All commands are terminated by a CRLF pair. Keywords and arguments consist of printable ASCII characters. Keywords and arguments are each separated by a single SPACE character. Keywords are three or four characters long. Each argument may be up to 40 characters long. Responses in the POP3 consist of a status indicator and a keyword possibly followed by additional information. All responses are terminated by a CRLF pair. Responses may be up to 512 characters long, including the terminating CRLF. There are currently two status indicators: positive ("+OK") and negative ("ERR"). Servers MUST send the "+OK" and "-ERR" in upper case. Responses to certain commands are multi-line. In these cases, which are clearly indicated below, after sending the first line of the response and a CRLF, any additional lines are sent, each terminated by a CRLF pair. When all lines of the response have been sent, a final line is sent, consisting of a termination octet (decimal code 046, ".") and a CRLF pair. If any line of the multi-line response begins with the termination octet, the line is "byte-stuffed" by pre-pending the termination octet to that line of the response. Hence a multi-line response is terminated with the five octets "CRLF.CRLF". When examining a multi-line response, the client checks to see if the line begins with the termination octet. If so and if octets other than CRLF follow, the first octet of the line (the termination octet) is stripped away. If so and if CRLF immediately follows the termination character, then the response from the POP server is ended and the line containing ".CRLF" is not considered part of the multi-line response. A POP3 session progresses through a number of states during its lifetime. Once the TCP connection has been opened and the POP3 @server has sent the greeting, the session enters the AUTHORIZATION state. In this state, the client must identify itself to the POP3 server. Once the client has successfully done this, the server @acquires resources associated with the client’s mail drop, and the session enters the TRANSACTION state. In this state, the client requests actions on the part of the POP3 server. When the client has issued the QUIT command, the session enters the UPDATE state. In this state, the POP3 server releases any resources acquired during @the TRANSACTION state and says goodbye. The TCP connection is then closed. A server MUST @respond to an unrecognized, unimplemented, or @syntactically invalid command by responding with a negative status @indicator. A server MUST respond to a command issued when the session is in an incorrect state by responding with a negative status indicator. There is no general method for a client to distinguish between a server which does not implement an optional command and a server which is unwilling or unable to process the command.
263 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
A POP3 server MAY have an inactivity auto logout timer. Such a timer MUST be of at least 10 minutes’ duration. The receipt of any command from the client during that interval should suffice to reset the auto logout timer. When the timer expires, the session does NOT enter the UPDATE state--the server should close the TCP connection without removing any messages or sending any response to the client.
7.9.3.
POP3 Command Summary
Minimal POP3 Commands: USER name PASS string QUIT
valid in AUTHORIZATION state
STAT LIST [msg] RETR msg DELE msg NOOP RSET QUIT
valid in the TRANSACTION state
Optional POP3 Commands: APOP name digest
valid in AUTHORIZATION state
TOP msg n UIDL [msg]
valid in the TRANSACTION state
POP3 Replies: +OK -ERR Note: With the exception of the STAT, LIST, and UIDL commands, the reply given by the POP3 server to any command is significant only to "+OK" and "-ERR". The client may ignore any text occurring after this reply.
From:
To:
Sample of a POP3 Protocol Log
264 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
POP 3 Command & Reply Procedure your Panasonic Device (ef1.labo.mgcs.com) TCP 3 way handshake & Opening Session
AUTHORIZATION
TRANSACTION
UPDATE
TCP 3 way handshake & Opening Session
POP 3 Server (sv2.labo.mgcs.com)
Opening TCP Connection (TCP Port No. 110) +OK POP Server ready <[email protected]> USER s50055 +OK Password required for s50055 PASS !xxxx +OK s50055 has 2 messages (126040 octets). STAT +OK 2 126040 QUIT +OK POP Server at sv2 signing off. Closing TCP Connection (Port No. 110)
Opening TCP Connection (TCP Port No. 110) +OK POP Server ready <[email protected]> USER s50055 +OK Password required for s50055
AUTHORIZATION
PASS !xxxx +OK s50055 has 2 messages (126040 octets). TOP 1 1 +OK 69762 octets Text DATA Text DATA PETR 1 +OK 69752 octets Text DATA Text DATA Text DATA :end with .(period)
TRANSACTION
DELE 1 +OK Message 1 has been deleted. TOP 2 1 +OK 1 56288 octets Text DATA Text DATA PETR 2 +OK 1 56288 octets Text DATA Text DATA Text DATA :end with .(period) DELE 2 +OK Message 2 has been deleted. QUIT +OK POP Server at sv2 signing off.
UPDATE
Closing TCP Connection (Port No. 110)
265 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
7.10. Troubleshooting from a PC Troubleshooting is an art of seeking out the cause of a problem and eliminating the problem by managing of eliminating the cause. No matter what the problem is on your network, the OSI Reference Model serves as an excellent reference tool to help you locate the area of trouble. One of the simplest tools available, is the DOS command-line prompt from your Windows PC. Listed below are the most often used command-line prompts that you can use at the customer’s network PC. Some commands are available as an option for checking with more detail. Command Sample Ping Ping 192. 168. 1. 30
Ipconfig /all
Tracert
Netstat
Net view Nslookup
Purpose Checking for physical connection between your PC and the target destination (192.168.1.30) Ipconfig /all Checking for current network configuration (Host Name, DNS server, IP address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway, MAC address, WINS etc) For Windows 95/98, please type “winipcfg” instead of Ipconfig/all Tracert 192.168.2.245 Checking for the datagram route between your PC and the target destination (192.168.2.245) NetstatNetstat -nr Active connection list Active route for your subnet. All special assigned IP addresses are also shown Net view Checking for the current file sharing Host Name Nslookup Checking for the DNS server IP address. This command is available for Windows NT only.
Note: Before taking corrective action, you must check the physical connections or wiring first.
266 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
7.11. Verifying the Configuration and Mail Account Type (SMTP or POP) START
Is the LAN connected to an ISP
Yes
No No DHCP Client?
Is this a Dialup connection ?
No
Is static IP address available ?
Yes Not supported
Yes Is G3 Gateway function being used ?
Yes
Is there a MX and A Record entry for your Panasonic Device in the DNS table ? No
Yes Yes
No Yes
Not supported
Is POP account available ?
Is POP account available ? No
No
Is there a MX and A Record entry for your Panasonic Device in the DNS table ?
No
Yes
Not supported
Yes Set network parameters for POP receiving
If not ready Ask the Network Administrator to setup a new POP account.
Set network parameters for SMTP receiving If not ready Check the host name by using the DOS command-line "ping" and "nslookup".
Set network parameters for POP receiving and set G3 Gateway parameters for your Panasonic Device If not ready Ask the Network Administrator to setup a new POP account. Check the host name by using the DOS command-line "ping" and "nslookup".
Important Notice: The customer who supposed to operate G3 Gateway function at MGCS models, the total Network Security such as Anti Spam Mail protection must be aware how the system performs sufficient security levels as designed. So you may ask Security Policy Manager to allow relay message by changing configuration of Massage Transfer Agent like Sendmail. Otherwise the system denied any relay operation.
267 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
7.12. Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) - Extended Feature DHCP is based on the Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP), adding the capability of automatic allocation of reusable network addresses and additional configuration options. The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) provides configuration parameters to Internet hosts. The Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP) is a UDP/IP-based protocol which allows a booting host to configure itself dynamically and without user supervision. BOOTP provides a means to notify a host of its assigned IP address, the IP address of a boot server host, and the name of a file to be loaded into memory and executed. Other configuration information such as the local subnet mask, the local time offset, the addresses of default routers, and the addresses of various Internet servers can also be communicated to a host using BOOTP. DHCP consists of two components: a protocol for delivering host-specific configuration parameters from a DHCP server to a host and a mechanism for allocation of network addresses to hosts. DHCP supports three mechanisms for IP address allocation. In "automatic allocation", DHCP assigns a permanent IP address to a client. In "dynamic allocation", DHCP assigns an IP address to a client for a limited period of time (or until the client explicitly relinquishes the address). In "manual allocation", a client’s IP address is assigned by the network administrator, and DHCP is used simply to convey the assigned address to the client. A particular network will use one or more of these mechanisms, depending on the policies of the network administrator. "DHCP client" A DHCP client is an Internet host using DHCP to obtain configuration parameters such as a network address. "DHCP server" A DHCP server is an Internet host that returns configuration parameters to DHCP clients. Table 1 describes a DHCP message and its purpose of use. Message Use DHCPDISCOVER Client broadcast to locate available servers. DHCPOFFER Server to client in response to DHCPDISCOVER with offer of configuration parameters. DHCPREQUEST Client message to servers either (a) requesting offered parameters from one server and implicitly declining offers from all others, (b) confirming correctness of previously allocated address after, e.g., system reboot, or (c) extending the lease on a particular network address. DHCPACK Server to client with configuration parameters, including committed network address. DHCPNAK Server to client indicating client’s notion of network address is incorrect (e.g., client has moved to new subnet) or client’s lease as expired DHCPDECLINE Client to server indicating network address and in use. DHCPRELEASE Client to server indicating network address and canceling remaining lease. DHCPINFORM Client to server, asking only for local configuration parameters; client already has externally configured network address. Table 1: DHCP messages and purpose of use
268 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
Following figure shows the timeline diagram of messages exchanged between DHCP client and servers when allocating a new network address.
Client
Server (not selected)
Server (selected)
Begins initialization Determines configuration
DHCPDISCOVER
DHCPDISCOVER
Determines configuration
DHCPOFFER DHCPOFFER Collects replies Selects configuration DHCPREQUEST
DHCPREQUEST
Commits configuration
DHCPACK Initialization complete
Graceful shutdown Discards lease
DHCPRELEASE
Timeline diagram of messages exchanged between DHCP client and servers when allocating a new network address
Following figure shows the timeline diagram of messages exchanged between DHCP client and servers when reusing a previously allocated network address.
Server
Client
Server
Begins initialization Locates configuration
DHCPREQUEST
DHCPREQUEST
DHCPACK
DHCPACK
Locates configuration
Initialization complete Subsequent DHCPACKS ignored
Timeline diagram of messages exchanged between DHCP client and servers when reusing a previously allocated network address
269 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
Several options have been defined so far. One particular option - the "DHCP message type" option - must be included in every DHCP message. This option defines the "type" of the DHCP message. Additional options may be allowed, required, or not allowed, depending on the DHCP message type.
INITIALIZATION
INITIALIZE/ REBOOT
DHCPNAK/ Restart
-/Send DHCPREQUES
DHCPACK (not accept.)/ Send DHCPDECLINE
-/Send DHCPDISCOVER DHCPNAK, Lease expired/ Halt network
DHCPNAK/ Discard offer
SELECTING DHCPOFFER/ Collect replies
REBOOTING
Select offer/ send DHCPREQUEST
REQUESTING
REBINDING
DHCPOFFER/ Discard
DHCPACK/ Record lease, set timers T1, T2
DHCPNAK/ Halt network
DHCPACK/ Record lease, set /timers T1,T2
DHCPACK/ Record lease, set /timers T1,T2
T2 expires/ Broadcast DHCPREQUEST
BOUND
DHCPACK/ Record lease, set timers T1, T2
T1 expires/ Send DHCPREQUEST to leasing server T1 expires/ Send DHCPREQUEST to leasing server
RENEWING
The client maintains two times, T1 and T2, that specify the times at which the client tries to extend its lease on its network address. T1 is the time at which the client enters the RENEWING state and attempts to contact the server that originally issued the client’s network address. T2 is the time at which the client enters the REBINDING state and attempts to contact any server. T1 MUST be earlier than T2, which, in turn, MUST be earlier than the time at which the client’s lease will expire. To avoid the need for synchronized clocks, T1 and T2 are expressed in options as relative times.
State-transition diagram for DHCP clients
More detailed information, please refer to RFC2131 document available from following URL. http://www.ietf.org/rfc.html.
270 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
7.13. Message Disposition Notifications (MDN) - Extended Feature The confirmation of delivery and processing are extensions to "Simple Mode of Facsimile Using Internet Mail" [RFC2305]. These are designed to be interoperable with the existing base of mail transfer agents (MTAs) and mail user agents (MUAs), and take advantage of existing standards for advanced functionality such as positive delivery confirmation and disposition notification. The following two features are combined. (1) Delivery confirmation (required) (2) Additional document features (optional) In Internet Mail, the operations of Delivery (to the mailbox) and Disposition (to paper or a screen) may be separated in time (due to store and forwarding of messages) and location (due to separation of delivery agent (MTA) and user agent (MUA)). The confirmations of these two operations are supplied by two different standards-track mechanisms: Delivery Status Notifications (DSN) [RFC1891, RFC1894] and Message Disposition Notifications (MDN) [RFC2298], respectively. MGCS supports MDN. Delivery Status Notification (DSN) A DSN can be used to notify the sender of a message of any of several conditions: failed delivery, delayed delivery, successful delivery, or the gatewaying of a message into an environment that may not support DSNs. MGCS Iternet FAX does not request DSN while sending.
fail SMTP Server
SMTP Server
DSN
DSN returned to sender by Reporting MTAs (Message Transfer Agent) if fail of delivery is occurred.
Message Disposition Notifications (MDN) A MDN can be used to notify the sender of a message of any of several conditions that may occur after successful delivery, such as display of the message contents, printing of the message, deletion (without display) of the message, or the recipient’s refusal to provide MDNs.
SMTP Server
SMTP Server
MDN
Recipient notifies that the message contents have been displayed properly.
The MDNs are expected to serve several purposes such as allow mail user agents (Outlook Express) to keep track of the disposition of messages sent, by associating returned MDNs with earlier message transmissions.
271 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
For example, you may configure the MDN parameter from Options menu of Outlook Express.
MDN request
MDN notify
Additional Document Capabilities Section 4 of "A Simple Mode of Facsimile Using Internet Mail" [RFC2305] allows sending only the minimum subset of TIFF for Facsimile "unless the sender has prior knowledge of other TIFF fields or values supported by the recipient." A recipient may support any or all (or any combination) of the TIFF profiles defined in RFC 2301, in addition to profile S. As a consequence, a sender may use those additional TIFF profiles when sending to a recipient with the corresponding capabilities. MDN Response Read Receipt Capabilities
(1) MDN Request
Internet FAX
(3)
SMTP Server
SMTP Server
(2)
Internet FAX
Additional Document Capabilities Exchanging Process
(1) Request If the sender (Internet FAX) desires processing confirmation, the sender must request Message Disposition Notification when sending the message itself. Sender provides the Disposition-Notification-To field on address as following formula.
272 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
MDN Request Sample Mime-Version: 1.0 X-Mailer: Internet FAX, MGCS Content-Transfer-Encoding: 7bit Date: Wed, dd Mmm yyyy 15:20:00 -0500 Message-Id: <[email protected]> From: "MGCS Internet FAX" Subject: IMAGE from Internet FAX To: [email protected] Disposition-Notification-To: Content-Type: multipart/mixed; boundary="+-+-+-MGCS-+-+-+"
(2) Recipient’s MDN Response Recipient (Internet FAX) starts printing process when the message is received properly. If the Disposition-Notification-To field is contained in message, recipient generates MDN capability response after successful delivery and sends to the address indicated on Disposition-Notification-To field as convey. However, the envelope-from (Return-Path: address) of original sender does not match with address indicated on Disposition-Notification-To field, and then no MDN response is sent. MDN Response Sample
MESSAGE HEADER
BODY TEXT
Mime-Version: 1.0 X-Mailer: Internet FAX, MGCS Content-Transfer-Encoding: 7bit Date: Wed, dd Mmm yyyy 15:42:00 -0500 Message-Id: <[email protected]> From: Subject: Read Receipt:IMAGE from Internet FAX To: [email protected] In-Reply-To: <[email protected]> References: <[email protected]> Content-Type: multipart/report; report-type=disposition-notification; boundary="+-+-+-MGCS-+-+-+"
**********
Read Receipt
**********
This message was opened by ’[email protected]’ dd Mmm yyyy 15:42 ******************************************
ATTACHED FILE
Final-Recipient: rfc822;[email protected] Original-Message-ID: <[email protected]> Disposition: automatic-action/MDN-sent-automatically; dispatched Media-Accept-Features: (& (type="image/tiff") (color=Binary) (image-file-structure=TIFF-minimal) (MRC-mode=0) (ua-media=stationery) (paper-size=[A4,B4,letter,legal]) (image-coding=[MH,MR,MMR]) (| (& (dpi=200) (dpi-xyratio=[200/100,1]) ) (& (dpi=204) (dpi-xyratio=[204/98,204/196,204/391]) ) (& (dpi=408) (dpi-xyratio=408/391) ) ) )
273 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
(3) Processing Confirmation The processing confirmation provided by recipient is received and take specific services for expected several conditions respectively. This is unit independent issue. To see more detailed information, please refer to RFC2532 document.
274 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
7.14. Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) - Extended Feature The protocol is designed to provide access to directories supporting the X.500 models, while not incurring the resource requirements of the X.500 Directory Access Protocol (DAP). This protocol is specifically targeted at management applications and browser applications that provide read/write interactive access to directories. When used with a directory supporting the X.500 protocols, it is intended to be a complement to the X.500 DAP. X.500 is an overall model for Directory Services in the OSI world. The model encompasses the overall namespace and the protocol for querying and updating it. A major part of X.500 is that it defines a global directory structure. It is essentially a directory web in much the same way that http & html are used to define & implement the global hypertext web. Anyone with an X.500 or LDAP client may peruse the global directory just as they can use a web browser to peruse the global Web. From the "Start" menu of Windows client PC, you can search for people on the Internet, using of server at directory services.
7.15. Lightweight Challenge-response Mechanism POP (APOP) - Extended Feature The base POP3 specification (POP3) also contains a lightweight challenge-response mechanism called APOP. APOP is associated with most of the risks associated with such protocols: in particular, it requires that both the client and server machines have access to the shared secret in clear text form. ChallengeResponse Authentication Mechanism (CRAM) offers a method for avoiding such clear text storage while retaining the algorithmic simplicity of APOP in using only MD5. Normally, each POP3 session starts with a USER/PASS exchange. This results in a server/user-id specific password being sent in the clear on the network. For intermittent use of POP3, this may not introduce a sizable risk. However, many POP3 client implementations connect to the POP3 server on a regular basis to check for new mail. Further the interval of session initiation may be on the order of five minutes. Hence, the risk of password capture is greatly enhanced. An alternate method of authentication is required which provides for both origin authentication and replay protection, but which does not involve sending a password in the clear over the network. The APOP command provides this functionality. A POP3 server which implements the APOP command will include a timestamp in its banner greeting. For example, on a UNIX implementation in which a separate UNIX process is used for each instance of a POP3 server, the syntax of the timestamp might be: where "process-ID" is the decimal value of the process’s PID, clock is the decimal value of the system clock, and hostname is the fully-qualified domain-name corresponding to the host where the POP3 server is running.
275 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
Client
Server Establish TCP connection (TCP port No. 110)
Challenge Response <[email protected]> Digest parameter, Challenge + PASSWD <[email protected]>PASSWD
+OK POP3 server ready <[email protected]> APOP USER c4c9334bac560ecc979e58001b3e22fb +OK maildrop has 1 message (369 octets)
Produces a 16 octet digest value of c4c9334bac560ecc979e58001b3e22fb
Possible Responses: +OK -ERR permission denied
STAT +OK 1 Continue to follow the POP3 procedure
APOP overview
The POP3 client makes note of this timestamp, and then issues the APOP command. The "name’’ parameter has identical semantics to the "name" parameter of the USER command. The "digest" parameter is calculated by applying the MD5 algorithm to a string consisting of the timestamp (including anglebrackets) followed by a shared secret. This shared secret is a string known only to the POP3 client and server. Great care should be taken to prevent unauthorized disclosure of the secret, as knowledge of the secret will allow any entity to successfully masquerade as the named user. The "digest" parameter itself is a 16-octet value which is sent in hexadecimal format, using lower-case ASCII characters. When the POP3 server receives the APOP command, it verifies the digest provided. If the digest is correct, the POP3 server issues a positive response, and the POP3 session enters the TRANSACTION state. Otherwise, a negative response is issued and the POP3 session remains in the AUTHORIZATION state. Note that as the length of the shared secret increases, so does the difficulty of deriving it.
276 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
7.16. SMTP Service Extension for Authentication (SMTP Auth) - Extended Feature SMTP is widely deployed and high-quality implementations have proven to be very robust. However, the Internet community now considers some services to be important that SMTP AUTH is an SMTP service extension (ESMTP) whereby an SMTP client may indicate an authentication mechanism to the server, perform an authentication protocol exchange, and optionally negotiate a security layer for subsequent protocol interactions. This extension is a profile of the Simple Authentication and Security Layer (SASL). To use SASL, a protocol includes a command for identifying and authenticating a user to a server and for optionally negotiating protection of subsequent protocol interactions.
Client
Server Establish TCP connection (TCP port No. 25) 220 smtp.example.com ESMTP server ready EHLO jgm.example.com 250-smtp.example.com 250 AUTH LOGIN DIGEST-MD5 CRAM-MD5 AUTH CRAM-MD5 334 PENCeUxFREJoU0NnbmhNWitOMjNGNndA ZWx3b29kLmlubm9zb2Z0LmNvbT4=
ZnJlZCA5ZTk1YWVlMDljNDBhZjJiODRhMGMyYjNiYmFlNzg2ZQ== 235 Authentication successful Continue to follow the SMTP procedure
SMTP AUTH overview
The AUTH command indicates an authentication mechanism to the server. If the server supports the requested authentication mechanism, it performs an authentication protocol exchange to authenticate and identify the user. Optionally, it also negotiates a security layer for subsequent protocol interactions. If the requested authentication mechanism is not supported, the server rejects the AUTH command with a 504 reply. Challenge Response 334 PENCeUxFREJoU0NnbmhNWitOMjNGNndAZWx3b29kLmlubm9zb2Z0LmNvbT4= BASE64 decoded string
Produces a Challenge
Genrates Digest parameter Challenge + PASSWD with HMAC (keyed-Hashing for Message USER Authentication Code) roduces a 16 octet digest value of: 9e95aee09c40af2b84a0c2b3bbae786e Fred BASE64 encoded string ZnJlZCA5ZTk1YWVlMDljNDBhZjJiODRhMGMyYjNiYmFlNzg2ZQ==
The authentication protocol exchange consists of a series of server challenges and client answers that are specific to the authentication mechanism. A server challenge, otherwise known as a ready response, is a 334 reply with the text part containing a BASE64 encoded string. The client answer consists of a line
277 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
containing a BASE64 encoded string. If the client wishes to cancel an authentication exchange, it issues a line with a single "*". If the server receives such an answer, it must reject the AUTH command by sending a 501 reply. If the server cannot BASE64 decode the argument, it rejects the AUTH command with a 501 reply. If the server rejects the authentication data, it should reject the AUTH command with a 535 reply unless a more specific error code, such as one listed in Error Codes below, is appropriate. Should the client successfully complete the authentication exchange, the SMTP server issues a 235 reply. The service name specified by this protocol’s profile of SASL is "smtp". Error Codes The following error codes may be used to indicate various conditions as described. 432: A password transition is needed This response to the AUTH command indicates that the user needs to transition to the selected Authentication mechanism. This is typically done by authenticating once using the plain authentication mechanism. 538: Encryption required for requested authentication mechanism This response to the AUTH command indicates that the selected authentication mechanism may only be used when the underlying SMTP connection is encrypted. 454: Temporary authentication failure This response to the AUTH command indicates that the authentication failed due to a temporary server failure. 530: Authentication required This response may be returned by any command other than AUTH, EHLO, HELO, NOOP, RSET, or QUIT. It indicates that server policy requires authentication in order to perform the requested action.
278 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
7.17. Direct SMTP Transfer - Extended Feature Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is to transfer mail reliably and efficiently. An important feature of SMTP is its capability to transport mail across networks, usually referred to as SMTP mail relaying by employing SMTP server. Direct SMTP transfer allows you to transmit documents to another Internet Fax directly employing no SMTP server. To enables this feature, you must configure its static IP address, subnetmask, default gateway and etc. accordingly. Domain Name System (DNS) must be required to run the system, so that hosts and some additional records must be properly existed in DNS entries. Please note that the system runs under DHCP dynamic updates with DNS meets its requirement also. In other words, DHCP runs non-Dynamic Updates in the Domain Name System can not be applied for Internet Fax who whish to enables Direct SMTP transfer function. Further more, in common cases only email and web service from the Internet are permitted into the corporate intranet, and corporate network administrators are extremely reticent to open the firewall for other, incoming services, since each opened path represents additional, potential security threats. So the Direct SMTP transfer can be operating throughout the organization’s Intranet. Capability exchanges and content negotiations are also available to take advantageous communication between Internet Fax communications. Several service extensions are newly assigned. (1) The EHLO keyword value associated with this extension is "CONNEG" (2) A parameter using the keyword "CONNEG" is added to the RCPT-TO command Sender
Recipient Establish TCP connection 220 EHLO
Check for Capability
250 Response of CONNEG MAIL FROM: 250
Request for Capability
TCP Port No. 25
RCPT TO: CONNEG 250 Capacity Exchange Continue to follow the SMTP procedure
Direct SMTP Overview
Capability contents sample 250- recipient ok 250-(&(image-file-structure=TIFF-minimal) 250- (MRC-mode=0) 250- (color=Binary) 250- (|(&(dpi=204) 250- (dpi-xyratio=[204/98,204/196]) ) 250- (&(dpi=200) 250- (dpi-xyratio=[200/100,1]) ) 250- (&(dpi=400) 250- (dpi-xyratio=1) ) ) 250- (|(image-coding=[MH,MR,MMR]) 250- (&(imagecoding=JBIG) 250- (image-coding-constraint=JBIG-T85) 250- (JBIG-stripe-size=128) ) ) 250- (size-x<=2150/254) 250- (paper-size=[letter,A4,B4]) ) 250 (ua-media=stationery) )
279 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
8 Installation 8.1.
Function Key
Any function can be started by first pressing pressing
or
FUNCTION and then enter the function number, or by scroll key repeatedly until the desired function appears on the display.
1
Deferred Communication 1 = XMT 2 = Polling
2
Advanced Communication 1 = Not Used 2 = Confidential Communication 3 - 4 = Not Used 5 = LAN Relay XMT
3
Polling 1 = Polling 2 = Polled
6
Print List 1 = Journal (Print/View) 2 = One-Touch/Abbreviated/Directory Search List 3 = Program List 4 = Fax Parameter List 5 = Not Used 6 = Individual XMT Journal 7 = Directory Sheet
7
Set Mode 1 = User Parameters • Date & Time • Time Zone • Logo • Character ID • ID Number (Fax Telephone Number) • IP Address (This is a partial list, for additional Functions, see page 49) 2 = One-Touch/Abbreviated Numbers 3 = Program Keys 4 = Fax Parameters 5 - 7 = Not Used 8 = Maintenance • Cleaning Printer Roller • Toner Order Form
8
Select Mode 1 = Communication Journal = OFF/ON/INC 2 = Delivery Notice = OFF/ON 3 = Cover Sheet = OFF/ON 4 = Password-XMT = OFF/ON 5 = RCV to Memory = OFF/ON 6 - 8 = Not Used 9 = Memory XMT = OFF/ON
9
Edit File Mode 1 = File List (Print/View) 2 = Change Time/Station 3 = Delete File 4 = Print File 5 = Add Document 6 = Retry Incomplete File
280 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
8.2.
Main Unit and Accessories Unpack the carton and check that you have all the accessories illustrated.
Machine
Toner Cartridge
Telephone Line Cable
Power Cord
Recording Paper Tray
Operating Instructions
CD-ROM
281 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
8.3.
Installing the Accessories
Final Installed View
Recording Paper Tray Hook the projections into the square holes on the machine.
Handset [Available as an Option]
Handset Cradle [Available as an Option]
Handset Cord [Available as an Option]
Hook the projections into the square holes on the machine. Connect the cable into the HANDSET jack on the machine.
NOTE
The handset may not be available in certain destinations due to its regulation or specification.
282 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
8.4.
1
Installing the Toner Cartridge Unpack the Toner Cartridge and rock it back and forth as shown 5 or 6 times to even the
Toner Cartridge
toner inside.
2
Remove the protective seal. Note: Pull on the seal slowly and straight ou
3
Open the Printer Cover. Printer Cover
Continued on the next page...
283 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
4
Align the projections on both sides of the Toner Cartridge with the grooves in the machine as shown and insert the Toner Cartridge into the machine. Note: Lock the Toner Cartridge into place by pressing the handle down and then pushing towards the rear of the machine.
5
Close the Printer Cover.
Printer Cover
6
If you are replacing the Toner Cartridge, it is recommended to clean the Printer Roller to maintain good printing quality. To clean the Printer Roller, follow the procedure on next page.
284 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
Cleaning the Printer Roller If you find toner on the back of the recording paper, the printer roller in the fuser unit is probably dirty. To clean the Printer Rollers
1 2
MAINTENANCE ENTER NO. OR
7
(1-9)
8 * PRINTING * CLEANING CHARTS
1
1
The machine will print out 3 Cleaning Charts. Then, return to standby. HOW TO LOAD THE CLEANING CHARTS 1.REMOVE THE PAPER CASSETTE (If multiple cassette configuration, REMOVE THE UPPER PAPER CASSETTE) 2.SET THESE 3 CLEANING CHARTS IN THE CASSETTE FACE DOWN 3.RE-INSTALL THE PAPER CASSETTE 4.PRESS [FUNCTION][7][8][SET][1][SET][2] TO START CLEANING 5.DISPOSE OF THE CLEANING CHARTS
*** SET THIS END TOWARDS THE FRONT, FACE DOWN ***
3 4 5
Load the Cleaning Charts into the cassette face down. (See Note 1) MAINTENANCE ENTER NO. OR
7
(1-9)
8 * CLEANING * PRINTER ROLLER
1
2
The Machine will feed out the charts and clean the printer roller.
NOTE
1. If y ou have installed the optional cass ette(s), load the Cleaning Charts int o the upper c assette.
285 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
8.5.
Loading the Recording Paper How to Load the Recording Paper
1
Lift up the Paper Cassette slightly and slide it out from the machine.
Paper Cassette
2
Remove the Paper Cassette Cover. Cassette Cover
3
1. Remove the Shipping Screw securing the Pressure Plate. 2. Store the screw by attaching it to the post provided under the Paper Cassette Cover for future use.
Shipping Screw
Cassette Cover
286 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
4 Max. Paper Capacity Mark
Paper Width Guide
1. Load the paper into the Paper Cassette. Slide the paper width guide to the left until it lightly touches the stack of paper without bending the paper. The paper must fit squarely and firmly between the Paper Width Guide and the right side of tray. If it does not, the paper may feed into the printer incorrectly resulting in a paper jam. Caution: Make sure that the paper is set under the metal Paper Separation Clips and that it does not exceed the Maximum Paper Capacity Mark. You can load about 250 sheets (20 lb weight). 2. Re-install the Paper Cassette Cover. 3. Slide the Paper Cassette into the machine.
287 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
8.6.
Adjusting the Paper Cassette for the Paper Length How to Adjust the Paper Cassette for the Paper Length The factory default Paper Length setting for the Paper Cassette is on Letter size. To change the paper length to A4 or Legal size, follow the steps below.
1 Release Latch
1. Remove the paper from the Paper Cassette and place the cassette upside down on a flat surface. 2. While pushing down on the release latch, pull out the Paper Length Guide. 3. Turn the Paper Cassette upright. 4. Insert the Paper Length Guide hooks into the appropriate paper length slots (A4 or Legal) and slide the guide towards the back of the cassette until it locks in place. 5. Load the paper into the Paper Cassette.
Paper Length Guide
Slide the paper width guide to the left until it lightly touches the stack of paper without bending the paper. The paper must fit squarely and firmly between the Paper Width Guide and the right side of tray. If it does not, the paper may feed into the printer incorrectly resulting in a paper jam.
Paper Width Guide
Max. Paper Capacity Mark
LTR A4 LGL
Caution: Make sure that the paper is set under the metal Paper Separation Clips and that it does not exceed the Maximum Paper Capacity Mark. You can load about 250 sheets (20 lb weight). 6. Replace the Paper Cassette Cover to the appropriate paper position (LTR, A4 or LGL). 7. Slide the Paper Cassette into the machine.
2
The Recording Paper Size setting of the Fax Parameter No. 23 must match the paper loaded in the cassette. If you change the Recording Paper Size, please change the setting accordingly.
NOTE
1. If you forget to change the Recording Paper Size setting in Fax Parameter No. 23 when different paper is installed in the cassette, the unit will Stop printing after the 1st page of an Incoming Fax and display a "PAPER SIZE MISMATCH" error. Then, the Recording Paper Size setting automatically adjusts to the proper size and the unit resumes printing the Incoming Fax from the 1st page.
288 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
8.7.
Adjusting the Paper Cassette for the Paper Width
How to Adjust the Paper Cassette for the Paper Width The factory default Paper Width setting for the Paper Cassette is on Letter/Legal size. To change the paper width to A4 size, follow the steps below.
1
1. Release the left Paper Separation Clip latch. 2. Pull up the Paper Separation Clip to remove it. 3. Reposition the Paper Separation Clip into the A(A4) slot. 4. Swing the Paper Separation Clip downward to latch it in place.
Paper Separation Clip
2
1. Load the paper into the Paper Cassette. Slide the paper width guide to the left until it lightly touches the stack of paper without bending the paper. The paper must fit squarely and firmly between the Paper Width Guide and the right side of tray. If it does not, the paper may feed into the printer incorrectly resulting in a paper jam.
Paper Width Guide Max. Paper Capacity Mark
Caution: Make sure that the paper is set under the metal Paper Separation Clips and that it does not exceed the Maximum Paper Capacity Mark. You can load about 250 sheets (20 lb weight).
LTR A4 LGL
2. Replace the Paper Cassette Cover to the appropriate paper position (LTR, A4 or LGL). 3. Slide the Paper Cassette into the machine.
3
The Recording Paper Size setting of the Fax Parameter No. 23 must match the paper loaded in the cassette. If you change the Recording Paper Size, please change the setting accordingly.
NOTE
1. If you forge t to change th e Recordin g Paper Si ze setti ng in Fax Parameter No. 23 when di ffere nt paper i s ins talled i n the cassette, the unit will Stop printin g after the 1st page of an Inc oming Fax and dis play a " PAPER SIZE MISMATCH" error. Then, the Recordi ng Paper Size settin g autom ati cal ly adjusts to th e prop er si ze and the unit resumes pri nti ng the Incoming Fax fro m the 1s t page.
289 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
8.8.
Connecting the Telephone Line Cable and Power Cord Power Cord
Plug one end of the power cord into an ordinary 3 prong AC outlet and the other end into the receptacle on the rear of the machine. Warning: This apparatus must be properly grounded through an ordinary 3 prong AC outlet. Do not break off the earth (ground) prong to fit a 2 prong outlet.
Power Cord (Included)
External Telephone (Optional) You can connect an additional standard single line telephone to the machine. To connect the telephone, break off the protective tab on the TEL jack.
RJ-45 LAN Jack (10Base-T/100Base-TX) LINK Lamp Illuminates when connected to the LAN. Lamp will not turn ON if the LAN Cable is defective (contains breaks).
Telephone Line Cable (Included)
ACTIVITY Lamp Blinks when there is data traffic on the LAN.
RJ-11C Telephone Jack
LAN Cable (10Base-T/100Base-TX Cable) Insert the plug until a click is heard. (LAN Cable is not included with the product.) Purchase a Category 5 Cable, compliant with EIA/TIA 568-A-5 standard.
Telephone Line Cable
Plug one end of the telephone line cable into the "RJ-11C" telephone jack supplied by the telephone company and the other end into the LINE jack on the left side of the machine.
Ethernet LAN Cable Ethernet-Token-Ring Bridge (Optional Order No. UE-204006)
10Base-T/100Base-TX Ethernet Hub
NOTE
Ethernet LAN (10Base-T/100Base-TX) Cable (Not included)
1. Your machine uses little power and you should keep it ON at all times. If the power is turned OFF for too long, the clock contents may be lost.
290 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
8.9.
Setting the Internet Parameters Before starting, you will need a completed copy of page 19 (Pre Installation Information). For your machine to be able to operate on the Network properly, the following five (5) Basic Parameters must be preprogrammed into the machine.
. IP Address . Mask . Subnet Default Gateway IP Address . Server Name or IP Address . SMTP Email Address Note:
If DHCP server is available on your network, the IP Address, Subnet Mask and Default Gateway IP Address will be acquired automatically.
1 2
SET MODE ENTER NO. OR
7
(1-8)
1:USER PARAMETERS? PRESS SET TO SELECT
1
3
IP ADDRESS
repeatedly until display shows;
4
Enter the IP Address using the keypad. Press
or
to enter the period ".". (See Note 3) Ex: 1 2 3
1 7 8
2 4 0
3
5
SUBNET MASK
To continue setting other parameters, or press to return to standby.
NOTE
IP ADDRESS 123.178.240.3
STOP
1. To scroll the display to desired User Parameter in Step 3, press or . 2. If the DNS Server is not available, change the setting of the Fax Parameter No. 161 (DNS SERVER) to "Invalid", then enter the IP Address instead. 3. For convenience, you can use Otherwise
to enter a period "." while programming IP Addresses only.
is used to enter an asterisk under other conditions.
291 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
Setting the User Parameters for the LAN Interface Depending on how your machine will be configured to communicate on the LAN, the appropriate parameters listed in the table below must be stored first. No.
1 2 3 4 5 6
7* 8* 9* 10*
11* 12* 13* 14 15* 16* 17* 18* 19* 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
27
Parameter DATE & TIME TIME ZONE
Comments Current Date and Time. The Time Zone is required as part of the Email header information when sending Internet faxes. LOGO Up to 25 characters & digits. CHARACTER ID Up to 16 characters & digits. ID NO. Your Fax Telephone Number. (Up to 20 digits) (MAC ADDRESS) Hardware Address hard-coded into your machine. (If required, can be obtained from the Fax Parameter List printout, by pressing [FUNCTION] [6] [4] [SET]) IP ADDRESS IP Address assigned to your machine by the Network Administrator or the DHCP Server. SUBNET MASK Subnet Mask assigned by the Network Administrator or the DHCP Server. DEFAULT GATEWAY Default Gateway IP Address assigned by the Network Administrator or the IP ADDR DHCP Server. PRIMARY DNS IP Address of the primary DNS Server. If the DNS Server is not available, SERVER IP ADDRESS change the setting of the Fax Parameter No. 161 (DNS SERVER) to "Invalid", then enter the IP Address instead. SECONDARY DNS IP Address of the secondary DNS Server. SERVER IP ADDRESS EMAIL ADDRESS The Email Address assigned to your machine for sending and receiving. (Up to 60 characters) SMTP SERVER NAME The name of the SMTP Mail Server. (Up to 60 characters) SMTP SERVER IP IP Address of the SMTP Mail Server. ADDR SMTP AUTH NAME User name required to login to the SMTP Server before it allow to send email messages. (Up to 40 characters). SMTP PASSWORD Password assigned to your machine. (Up to 10 characters) POP SERVER NAME The name of the POP Mail Server. (Up to 60 characters). POP SERVER IP IP Address of the POP Mail Server. ADDR POP USER NAME User Name assigned to your machine. (Up to 40 characters) POP PASSWORD Password assigned to your machine. (Up to 10 characters) LDAP SERVER NAME The name of the LDAP Server. (Up to 60 characters) LDAP LOG IN NAME Login Name assigned to your machine. (Up to 40 characters) LDAP PASSWORD Password assigned to your machine. (Up to 10 characters) LDAP SEARCH BASE ID for starting the search in the directory on the LDAP server. (Up to 60 Characters) HOST NAME The Host Name assigned to your machine. (Up to 60 characters) DEFAULT SUBJECT The default information to be added to the Subject Line for all outgoing Email (up to 40 characters). To manually input this information before transmission, change the Fax Parameter No. 159 (SUBJECT LINE ENTRY) to "2:Valid". DEFAULT DOMAIN When the outgoing email address is incomplete by SMTP standards, the Frequently Sent Domain specified here will be automatically added to the email address. This feature is also useful as a shortcut when manually entering email addresses to a frequently used Domain. (Up to 50 characters)
292 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
No.
28
29
Parameter SELECTABLE DOMAINS (01) ~ (10) REMOTE PASSWORD
30 31
32
33
RELAY XMT PASSWORD MANAGER’S EMAIL ADDR RELAY DOMAIN (01) ~ (10)
Comments Enter up to 10 Domain Names that can be selected after the Domain "@" key is pressed using the "\/ or /\" key during Manual email addressing. (Up to 30 characters) This is a security password that allows Remote Programming of the Internet Parameters and Auto Dialer or the retrieval of the Journal via an Email. (Up to 10 characters) A password that provides Network security for your Relay Station (used exclusively for G3 relay purposes). (Up to 10 characters) Department Manager’s Email Address for notification of all Internet relayed transmissions for supervision and cost control purposes. (Up to 60 characters) Enter up to 10 Domain Name(s) that have been authorized to access your Internet Fax for Relayed XMT Request. (Up to 30 characters) Relay Domain, a.k.a. Domain Name in your machine. Community Name used for the Network Device Locator.
COMMUNITY NAME (01) ~ (02) 34 DEVICE NAME Device Name used for the Network Device Locator. 35 DEVICE LOCATION Device Location for the Network Device Locator. * Contact your Network Administrator for this Information.
293 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
8.10. Programming or Retrieving Parameters via Email
Using Email to Program or Retrieve Parameters This feature is a powerful tool, which provides a convenient and easy way of retrieving or programming Internet Parameters, One-Touch, ABBR Dialing Numbers, Program keys and Journal retrieval from your PC by sending a text email message to your machine. Using your email application s "Subject:" line as a command-input field, you can request your machine to perform the following commands: "Subject:" Line Command 1 2 3 4 5 Where:
#set parameters(password)# #get parameters(password)# #set abbr(password)# #get abbr(password)# #get jnl(password)#
Function Programs the Internet Parameters Retrieves the Internet Parameters Programs the Auto Dialer Retrieves the Auto Dialer Data Retrieves the current Journal data
"set" is used to program the data "get" is used to retrieve the data "parameters" represents Internet Parameters "abbr" represents Auto Dialer "jnl" represents Journal "password" is the Remote Password programmed in your machine’s User Parameters (i.e. 123456789). Must be enclosed within the parenthesis "( )". The command must be enclosed within the hash (#) signs.
Using a PC to Input the Internet Parameters Remotely This feature provides a convenient and an easy way to input the Internet Parameters right from your PC by sending a text email message to your machine. The following parameters can be input remotely via a PC. The other parameters must be entered from the machine in the User Parameters. . Sender Selection (up to 24 User Names) . Default Domain . Selectable Domains (up to 10 additional Domain Names) . Remote Password . Manager s Email Address . Relay XMT Password . Relay Domain (up to 10 Domain Names authorized for Relay XMT Request) . LDAP Server Name . LDAP Login Name . LDAP Password . LDAP Search Base . Community Name (up to 2 Community Names) . Device Name . Device Location Your machine interprets the command that you enter in the "Subject" line of your email message and performs one of the following functions, it Retrieves or Stores data into the Internet Parameters (User Parameters). The two types of commands that can be entered in the "Subject" line of your email: 1) To Store data, type
:
#set parameters(password)#
2) To Retrieve : data, type
#get parameters(123456789)#
NOTE
: where the "password" is the Remote Password programmed in your machine’s User Parameters (i.e. 123456789). You can enter the Internet Parameters shown above with this command the first time. However, if these fields already contain data, do not use this command as the existing information will be deleted and overwritten. Use the Retrieve command below instead.
1. To activate this feature, change the Fax Parameter No. 158 (PC REMOTE UPDATE) to "Valid".
294 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
To Input the Internet Parameters for the First Time Create a script in the message body of a plain text email and send it to your machine’s email address. The "Subject" line of the email must be as follows: #set parameters(password)#
:
Important
:
where the "password" is the Remote Password programmed in your machine’s User Parameters. For security, always input a Remote Password in the User Parameters. [If the password was not programmed, represent it with "( )" and assign a password now. Ex: #set parameters( )#]. Do not use the above command if these fields already contain data, the existing information will be deleted and overwritten. Retrieve and backup the existing data onto your PC first by following the procedures for Retrieving and Editing the Internet Parameters.
The script sample to input the Internet Parameters is shown below.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4) (a)
(b) (5)
(c) (d) (a)
(b) (c)
(6)
(d) (a) (b) (c)
(1)
To From
: :
Subject
:
(7)
(d)
Your machine’s email address. This field is normally not visible when creating new email message(s). It is your default email address (email application), for retrieving the Internet Parameters and for error message notification. (Can be programmed with the configuration tool of your email program.) To Store data, type: #set parameters(password)#
295 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
To Input the Internet Parameters for the First Time (2)
@sender to @end
:
(3)
@select-domain to @end
:
(4)
@relay-domain to @end
:
(5)
@system to @end
:
(6)
@ldap to@end
:
(7)
@mib to @end
:
NOTE
Defines the Sender information to be set in section (2) between @sender to @end block. Register up to 24 User Names and their Email Addresses for the Sender Selection feature (See page 149). Separate each data field with a semicolon (;). (If the remaining fields are to remain blank, insert a semicolon (;) for each blank field) The data string for each Sender Selection should be defined within a single line. The syntax is: ;; (a) 01 to 24: Indicates the Sender Selection Numbers (b) User Name (25-characters maximum) (c) Email Address (60-characters maximum) Defines the Selectable Domains to be set in section (3) between @select-domain to @end block. Register up to 10 Domain Names that can be selected during manual email addressing. (30-characters maximum) The syntax is: ; Defines the Domain Names to be set in section (4) between @relay-domain to @end block. Register up to 10 Domain Names that have been authorized to access your Internet Fax for Relayed XMT Request. (30-characters maximum) Defines the Internet Parameters to be set in section (5) between @system to @end block. Register the following Internet Parameters. (a) Default Domain (50-characters maximum). The syntax is: domain; (b) Manager s Email Address (60-characters maximum). The syntax is: manager; (c) Relay XMT Password (10-characters maximum). The syntax is: relay; . Quotation marks " " enclosing the password, is required, as shown in the example above. (d) Remote Password (10-characters maximum). The syntax is: remote; . Quotation marks " " enclosing the password, is required, as shown in the example above. Defines the LDAP Parameters to be set in section (6) between @ldap to @end block. Register the following Internet Parameters. (a) LDAP Server Name (60-characters maximum). The syntax is: server; (b) LDAP Login Name (40-characters maximum). The syntax is: login; (c) LDAP Password (10-characters maximum). The syntax is: password;Quotation marks " " enclosing the password, is required, as shown in the example above. (d) LDAP Search Base (40-characters maximum). The syntax is: base; Defines the MIB to be set in section (7) between @mib to @end block. Register the following Internet Parameters. (a) Community Name(1) (32-characters maximum). The syntax is: com_name1; (b) Community Name(2) (32-characters maximum). The syntax is: com_name2; (c) Device Name(32-characters maximum). The syntax is: device; (d) Device Location(32-characters maximum). The syntax is: location;
1. The machine cannot be programmed via email while it is communicating or printing.
296 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
To Retrieve the Internet Parameters for Backup To retrieve the existing Internet Parameters, send a plain text email to the your machine’s email address with the following command in the "Subject" line: #get parameters(password)#
:
where the "password" is the Remote Password programmed in your machine’s User Parameters (i.e. 123456789). For security, always input a Remote Password in the User Parameters. If it was not programmed, signify with "()" (i.e. #get parameters()#). Make sure that the CC..., Bcc... lines and the body of the email message is Blank.
(1)
(1)
To
:
Your machine’s email address.
From
:
This field is normally not visible when creating new email message(s). It is your default email address (email application), for retrieving the Internet Parameters and for error message notification. (Can be programmed with the configuration tool of your email program.)
Subject
:
To Retrieve data, type: #get parameters(password)#
297 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
To Retrieve the Internet Parameters for Backup After receiving the email message requesting the Internet Parameters, your machine sends back an email to the address specified in the "From:" line with the Internet Parameters in the body of the email. Your Machine s Internet Parameters Email Sample
(1)
(8) [Delete this header before sending the email.]
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(1)
(2)
To
:
Your email address that was used to retrieve the Internet Parameters.
From
:
Your machine’s email address.
Subject
:
Your machine s System Parameter List
@sender to @end
:
Defines up to 24 User Names and their Email Addresses programmed in your machine for the Sender Selection in section (2) between @sender to @end block.
298 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
To Retrieve the Internet Parameters for Backup (3)
@select-domain to @end
:
Defines up to 10 alternate Domain Names programmed in your machine for the Selectable Domains in section (3) between @select-domain to @end block.
(4)
@relay-domain to @end
:
Defines up to 10 Domain Names programmed in your machine that have been authorized to access your Internet Fax for Relayed XMT Request in section (4) between @relay-domain to @end block.
(5)
@system to @end
:
Defines the following Internet Parameters programmed in your machine in section (5) between @system to @end block. (a) Default Domain (b) Manager s Email Address (c) Relay XMT Password (d) Remote Password
(6)
@ldap to@end
:
Defines the following Internet Parameters programmed in your machine in section (6) between @ldap to @end block. (a) LDAP Server Name (b) LDAP Login Name (c) LDAP Password (d) LDAP Search Base
(7)
@mib to @end
:
Defines the following Internet Parameters programmed in your machine in section (7) between @mib to @end block. (a) Community Name(1) (b) Community Name(2) (c) Device Name (d) Device Location
:
This header must be deleted before the email is sent to your machine for reprogramming of Internet Parameters. The information following the "#" sign is ignored by your machine, therefore, you can leave it as is, or delete it if you wish.
(8)
To Edit the Retrieved or Backup Internet Parameters File After receiving your machine s email with the Internet Parameters, store the email file as text (.txt) on your PC for backup purposes. To change or update the Internet Parameters, follow the steps below: 1. Create a New Email Message, fill out the "To" and "From" Address line and the Subject line information for section (1) below: To
:
Your machine’s email address.
From
:
This field is normally not visible when creating new email message(s). It is your default email address (email application), for retrieving the Internet Parameters and for error message notification.
Subject
:
To Store data, type: #set parameters(password)#
2. Open the backup, Internet Parameter text file. Copy the body text and paste it on the body of the newly created email message. 3. Delete any headers that may be present in the body of the email, as unsupported data will be rejected. The information following the "#" sign is ignored by your machine. 4. Edit a parameter and/or add additional Sender Name(s) or Domain Name(s). 5. When finished, use the "File/Save as..." command and save the updated file with ".txt" extension as a backup. 6. Send the email message to your machine to update the Internet Parameters.
299 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
To Edit the Retrieved or Backup Internet Parameters File Your Machine s Internet Parameters Email Sample
(1)
(8) [Delete this header before sending the email.]
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(1)
To
:
Your machine’s email address.
From
:
This field is normally not visible when creating new email message(s). It is your default email address (email application), for retrieving the Internet Parameters and for error message notification. (Can be programmed with the configuration tool of your email program.)
Subject
:
To Store data, type: #set parameters(password)#
300 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
To Edit the Retrieved or Backup Internet Parameters File (2)
@sender to @end
:
Defines the Sender information to be set in section (2) between @sender to @end block. Edit, Delete or Register up to 24 User Names and their Email Addresses for the Sender Selection feature (See page 149). Separate each data field with a semicolon (;). (If the remaining fields are to remain blank, insert a semicolon (;) for each blank field) The data string for each Sender Selection should be defined within a single line. The syntax is: ;; (a) 01 to 24: Indicates the Sender Selection Numbers (b) User Name (25-characters maximum) (c) Email Address (60-characters maximum)
(3)
@select-domain to @end
:
Defines the Selectable Domains to be set in section (3) between @select-domain to @end block. Register up to 10 alternate Domain Names that can be selected during manual email addressing. (30-characters maximum) The syntax is: ;
(4)
@relay-domain to @end
:
Defines the Domain Names to be set in section (4) between @relay-domain to @end block. Register up to 10 Domain Names that have been authorized to access your Internet Fax for Relayed XMT Request. (30-characters maximum)
(5)
@system to @end
:
Defines the Internet Parameters to be set in section (5) between @system to @end block. Register the following Internet Parameters. (a) Default Domain (50-characters maximum). The syntax is: domain; (b) Manager s Email Address (60-characters maximum). The syntax is: manager; (c) Relay XMT Password (10-characters maximum). The syntax is: relay; . Quotation marks " " enclosing the password, is required, as shown in the example above. (d) Remote Password (10-characters maximum). The syntax is: remote; . Quotation marks " " enclosing the password, is required, as shown in the example above. (Notice that for the above example, we have changed the Manager s Email Address, Relay XMT Password and the Remote Password)
(6)
@ldap to@end
:
Defines the LDAP Parameters to be set in section (6) between @ldap to @end block. Register the following Internet Parameters. (a) LDAP Server Name (60-characters maximum). The syntax is: server; (b) LDAP Login Name (40-characters maximum). The syntax is: login; (c) LDAP Password (10-characters maximum). The syntax is: password;Quotation marks " " enclosing the password, is required, as shown in the example above. (d) LDAP Search Base (40-characters maximum). The syntax is: base;
(7)
@mib to @end
:
Defines the MIB to be set in section (7) between @mib to @end block. Register the following Internet Parameters. (a) Community Name(1) (32-characters maximum). The syntax is: com_name1; (b) Community Name(2) (32-characters maximum). The syntax is: com_name2; (c) Device Name(32-characters maximum). The syntax is: device; (d) Device Location(32-characters maximum). The syntax is: location;
:
This header must be deleted before the email is sent to your machine for reprogramming of Internet Parameters. The information following the "#" sign is ignored by your machine, therefore, you can leave it as is, or delete it if you wish.
(8)
301 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
Using a PC to Update the Auto Dialer Remotely This feature provides a convenient and an easy way to Update, Backup or Restore the Phone Book data right from your PC by sending a text email message to your machine. Your machine interprets the command that you enter in the "Subject" line of your email message and performs one of the following functions, it Retrieves or Stores data into the Auto Dialer (Phone Book). The two types of commands that can be entered in the "Subject" line of your email: 1) To Store data, type
:
#set abbr(password)#
2) To Retrieve : data, type
#get abbr(123456789)#
NOTE
: where the "password" is the Remote Password programmed in your machine’s User Parameters (i.e. 123456789). You can program any known unused Auto Dialer location(s) with this command for the first time, without having to Retrieve the Phone Book data first. If the desired Auto Dialer location already contains data, your machine will overwrite the existing data, therefore, we recommend that you use the Retrieve command below instead. To edit existing Auto Dialer locations, refer to pages 65 to 66.
1. To activate this feature, change the Fax Parameter No. 158 (PC REMOTE UPDATE) to "Valid".
302 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
Deleting the Entire Auto Dialer If you wish to delete the entire Auto Dialer data in your machine, type the following command in the body of the email message: @command delete @end This command can also be inserted before the @begin to @end block, to erase the entire Auto Dialer data first, then reprogram it with new data. This method will also prevent the "Overwrite Warning Message" that is sent back from your machine, when the current Auto Dialer station is overwritten. To erase the entire Auto Dialer data, type the following command in the "Subject" line of your email: #set abbr(password)#
:
where the password is the Remote Password programmed in your machine’s User Parameters. Retrieve and backup the existing data onto your PC first by following the procedures for Retrieving and Editing.
303 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
To Program One-Touch/ABBR. No. for the First Time Create a script in the message body of a plain text email and send it to your machine’s email address.The "Subject" line of the email must be as follows: :
#set abbr(password)#
where the password is the Remote Password programmed in your machine’s User Parameters.
The script sample to program the One-Touch/ABBR. No. for the first time is shown in the illustration below: First Time Remote Programming of One-Touch/ABBR. No. Sample
(1) (a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e) (2)
Headquarters
(a)
(d)
(c)
(f)
(e) (f)
(h)
(b)
(3) (g)
304 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
To Program One-Touch/ABBR. No. for the First Time Explanation of Contents (1)
To
:
Your machine’s email address.
From
:
This field is normally not visible when creating new email message(s). It is your default email address (email application), for retrieving the Phone Book data and for error message notification. (Can be programmed with the configuration tool of your email program.)
Subject
:
To Store data, type: #set abbr(password)# To Retrieve data, type: #get abbr(password)#
(2)
@begin to @end block
:
Defines the data to be set into the Phone Book between @begin to @end block. Separate each data field with a semicolon (;). (If the remaining fields are to remain blank, insert a semicolon (;) for each blank field) The data string for each station should be defined within a single line. (a) Entry-number: One-Touch, ABBR. No. or Program Keys to be programmed 001 to 100: indicates ABBR. No. 001 to 100 (100 stations maximum) 1001 to 1028: indicates One-Touch numbers from 01 to 28 2001 to 2004: indicates Program Keys (P1 to P4 programmed as One-Touch dialing number) (b) Station-name: Name of the station being programmed (15 alpha-numeric characters maximum) (c) Station-address: email address or telephone number of the station being programmed (d) Routing-subaddress: sub-address to be used for routing (20-digit maximum) (e) Routing-id-number: TSI to be used for routing (20-digit maximum) (f) The End Receiving Station s telephone number is entered after the hash sign (#).
(3)
@program to @end
:
Defines the data to be set into Program Keys as a Group Key or POP Access Key between @program to @end block. (a) Program Key: P01 - P04 (b) Station-name as a Group Key: Name of the station being programmed (15 alpha-numeric characters maximum) (c) GROUP: The syntax used to set the Program Key as a Group Key (d) Entry-number: One-Touch, ABBR. No. or Program Keys to be programmed 001 to 100: indicates ABBR. No. 001 to 100 (100 stations maximum) 1001 to 1028: indicates One-Touch numbers from 01 to 28 2001 to 2004: indicates Program Keys (P1 to P4 programmed as One-Touch dialing number) (e) POP: The syntax used to set the Program Key as a POP Access Key (f) POP User-name: Name of the station being programmed (40 alpha-numeric characters maximum) (g) POP Password: POP Password (10 alpha-numeric characters maximum) (h) Set whether the emails on the POP Server are deleted after retrieving the emails.
NOTE
1. If a POP user account is programmed into the P1 to P4 program keys, the data programmed for this key cannot be deleted, even when the delete command is specified. 2. The email address and the telephone number cannot be programmed via email when: One-Touch Number has been used for communication reservation. Received documents are stored in the image data memory of the machine. While the machine is communicating or printing. 3. When the email address and telephone number are programmed via email, a program result email is sent back. 4. Some email applications automatically insert a line feed in the middle of a line when the number of characters in a line exceed a specific number. Turn "Off" the automatic line feed, or define the number of characters per line to prevent a line feed, or the data will be ignored.
305 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
To Retrieve One-Touch/ABBR. No. Data for Backup To retrieve the existing auto dialer data, send a plain text email to your machine’s email address with the following command in the "Subject" line: :
#get abbr(password)#
where the "password" is the Remote Password programmed in your machine’s User Parameters (i.e. 123456789).
Make sure that the Cc, Bcc lines and the body of the email message is Blank. Retrieving One-Touch/ABBR. No. Data Sample
(1)
(1)
To
:
Your machine’s email address.
From
:
This field is normally not visible when creating new email message(s). It is your default email address (email application), for retrieving the One-Touch/ ABBR. No. data and for error message notification. (Can be programmed with the configuration tool of your email program.)
Subject
:
To Retrieve data, type: #get abbr(password)#
306 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
To Retrieve One-Touch/ABBR. No. Data for Backup After receiving the email message requesting the existing auto dialer data, your machine sends back an email to the address specified in the "From:" line with the auto dialer information in the body of the email. Your Machine s Auto Dialer Email Sample
(1)
[email protected] MMM-dd-yyyy 14:15
(2) Headquarters
(3)
(1)
To
:
Your email address that was used to retrieve the Auto Dialer data.
From
:
Your machine’s email address.
Subject
:
ONE-TOUCH/ABBR. List
(2)
@begin to @end block
:
Defines One-Touch Keys, Abbreviated Dialing Numbers and Program Keys stored as a One-Touch Key programmed in your machine in section (2) between @begin to @end block.
(3)
@program to @end
:
Defines Program Keys stored as a Group Key or POP Access Key programmed in your machine in section (3) between @program to @end block.
307 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
To Edit the Retrieved or Backup One-Touch/ABBR. No. Data File After receiving your machine email with the auto dialer data, store the email file as text (.txt) on your PC for backup purposes. To change or update the auto dialer, follow the steps below: 1. Create a New Email Message, fill out the "To" and "From" Address line and the Subject line information for section (1) below: To
:
Your machine’s email address.
From
:
This field is normally not visible when creating new email message(s). It is your default email address (email application), for retrieving the One-Touch/ ABBR. No. data and for error message notification.
Subject
:
To Store data, type: #set abbr(password)#
2. Open the backup, auto dialer text file. Copy the body text and paste it on the body of the newly created email message. 3. Delete any headers that may be present in the body of the email, as unsupported data will be rejected. The information following the "#" sign is ignored by your machine. 4. Edit and/or add additional One-Touch/ABBR. No. stations. 5. When finished, use the "File/Save as..." command and save the updated file with ".txt" extension as a backup. 6. Send the email message to your machine to update the auto dialer. Your Machine s Auto Dialer Email Sample
(1) (5) [Delete this header before sending email]
[email protected] MMM-dd-yyyy
(a) (b)
(c)
(d)
(e) (2)
(f)
Headquarters
(4) (a) (b) (d) (h)
(f) (g)
(c) (e)
(3)
308 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
To Edit the Retrieved or Backup One-Touch/ABBR. No. Data File (1)
To
:
Your machine’s email address.
From
:
This field is normally not visible when creating new email message(s). It is your default email address (email application), for retrieving the One-Touch/ ABBR. No. data and for error message notification. (Can be programmed with the configuration tool of your email program.)
Subject
:
To Store data, type: #set abbr(password)#
(2)
@begin to @end block
:
Defines the One-Touch Keys, Abbreviated Dialing Numbers and Program Keys stored as a One-Touch Key to be set in section (2) between @begin to @end block. Edit, Delete or Register the information. Separate each data field with a semicolon (;). (If the remaining fields are to remain blank, insert a semicolon (;) for each blank field) The data string for each station should be defined within a single line. The syntax is:;;;; (a) Entry-number: One-Touch, ABBR. No. or Program Keys to be programmed 001 to 100: indicates ABBR. No. 001 to 100 (100 stations maximum) 1001 to 1028: indicates One-Touch numbers from 01 to 28 2001 to 2004: indicates Program Keys (P1 to P4 programmed as One-Touch dialing number) (b) Station-name: Name of the station being programmed (15 alpha-numeric characters maximum) (c) Station-address: email address or telephone number of the station being programmed (d) Routing-subaddress: sub-address to be used for routing (20-digit maximum) (e) Routing-id-number: TSI to be used for routing (20-digit maximum) (f) The End Receiving Station s telephone number is entered after the hash sign (#).
(3)
@program to @end
:
Defines the Program Keys stored as a Group Key or POP Access Key to be set in section (3) between @program to @end block. Edit, Delete or Register the information. (a) Program Key: P01 - P04 (b) Station-name as a Group Key: Name of the station being programmed (15 alpha-numeric characters maximum) (c) GROUP: The syntax used to set the Program Key as a Group Key (d) Entry-number: One-Touch, ABBR. No. to be programmed 001 to 100: indicates ABBR. No. 001 to 100 (100 stations maximum) 1001 to 1028: indicates One-Touch numbers from 01 to 28 2001 to 2004: indicates Program Keys (P1 to P4 programmed as One-Touch dialing number) (e) POP:The syntax used to set the Program Key as a POP Access Key. (f) POP User-name: Name of the POP user account (40 alpha-numeric characters maximum) (g) POP Password: POP Password (10 alpha-numeric characters maximum) (h) Set whether the emails on the POP Server are deleted after retrieving the emails.
(4)
These 2 ABBR. No. stations were added to the list.
(5)
This header must be deleted before the email is sent to your machine for reprogramming of One-Touch/ABBR. No. The information following the "#" sign is ignored by your machine, therefore, you can leave it as is or delete it if you wish.
309 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
Using Email to Retrieve the Journal To retrieve the existing Journal data, send an email to your machine’s email address with the following command in the "Subject" line: #get jnl(password)#
:
where the "password" is the Remote Password programmed in your machine’s User Parameters (i.e. 123456789).
The Journal will be send back to the originating station s email address. After receiving the journal, use a fixed width font (i.e. Courier), in order to align the received journal s contents on the PC. A separate email message is sent by your machine, an "Internet Fax Return Receipt" to the Manager s email address programmed in the User Parameters, informing of the Journal transfer.
NOTE
1. To activate this feature, change the Fax Parameter No. 158 (PC REMOTE UPDATE) to "Valid".
310 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
8.11. Customizing Your Machine General Description Your fac simile machine has a variety of adjustabl e Fax Pa rameter s. Thes e parameters, listed in the Parameter Table, are pr eset for you a nd d o not need to be ch ang ed. If you do want to mak e a change , read th e table careful ly. Some paramete rs, suc h as the Resoluti on and Contrast parameter s, can be temporaril y change d by simp le key op erati on just befor e a tr ans mi ss io n i s made. When t he tr ansm is sion end s, howev er, th ese parameter s return to thei r preset values (Home positi on) . Other parameter s can only be change d by th e pr oc edur e desc ribed b elow.
Setting the Fax Parameters
1
SET MODE (1-8) EN TER NO. OR
7
2
FA X PARAMETER(01-174) NO.=
4
3 4
Enter Fax Parameter numb er fr om the Parameter Table.
5 6
Enter th e new setting value .
FA X PARAMETER(01-174) NO.=01
Ex: 0 1 for CONTRAST
01 CONTRAST 1:NORMAL
01 CONTRAST 2:LIGHTER
Ex: 2 for LIGHTER
02 RESOLUTION 1:STANDARD
To set another par ameter, press sCLEAR to return to ste p 3 or pr ess STOP
NOTE
to return to stand by.
1. To scroll the Fax Parameters in Step 2 or 4, press
or
.
311 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
Fax Parameter Table No.
Parameter
Setting Number
Setting
01
CONTRAST
*1
Normal
2
Lighter
3
Darker
02
RESOLUTION
04
STAMP
05
06
MEMORY
DIALING METHOD
07
08
09
HEADER PRINT
HEADER FORMAT
RCV’D TIME PRINT
10
12
KEY/BUZZER VOLUME
COMM. JOURNAL
1
Standard Setting the home position for the RESOLUTION. Fine
3
S-Fine
4
Halftone (Fine)
5
Halftone (S-Fine)
*1
Off
2
On
1
Off
*2
On
1
Pulse
*2
Tone
*1
Inside
2
Outside
3
No Print
*1
Logo, ID Selecting the header format. No.
2
From To
*1
Invalid
2
Valid
1
Off
*2
Soft
3
Loud
1
Off
*3 AUTO JOURNAL PRINT
Setting the home position of the CONTRAST key.
*2
2
13
Comments
Setting the home position of the STAMP key. To select the stamp function when document is stored in memory, see Fax Parameter No. 28. Setting the home position for memory transmission/ copy mode. (This setting can be temporarily changed by using F8-9 (MEMORY XMT)) Selecting the dialing method. Selecting the printing position of the header. Inside : Inside TX copy area. Outside : Outside TX copy area. No Print: Header is not printed.
Selecting whether the machine prints the received date & time, remote ID, percentage of reduction and page number on the bottom of each received page. Selecting the volume of the Key/Buzzer tone.
Selecting the home position of printout mode for COMM. Journal Off/Always/INC. Always Off : Does not print Inc. Only Always : Always prints Inc. Only: Prints only when communication has failed.
1
Invalid
*2
Valid
Selecting whether the machine prints the journal automatically after every 32 transactions.
312 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
No.
Parameter
Setting Number
Setting
17
RECEIVE MODE
1
TEL
*2
FAX
3
FAX/TEL SW.
4
TAM/FAX
*1
20 sec.
2
30 sec.
3
40 sec.
4
50 sec.
1
1 sec.
---
---
60
60 sec.
18
OPERATOR CALL TIMER
19
20 22
23
24
25
OGM LENGTH (TAM I/F)
SILENT DETECTION (TAM I/F)
1
Invalid
*2
Valid
SUBSTITUTE RCV
1
Invalid
*2
Valid
1
A4
*2
Letter
3
Legal
1
Fixed
*2
Auto
70
70%
----
----
*100
100%
RECORDING PAPER SIZE
PRINT REDUCTION
REDUCTION RATIO
26
POLLING PASSWORD
27
POLLED FILE SAVE
28
STAMP AT MEM. XMT
(----) *1
Invalid
2
Valid
1
Invalid
*2
Valid
Comments
Setting the receive mode.
Selecting the length of time that your machine signals (rings) for an incoming voice call in Fax/Tel Auto Switching mode.
Setting for the OGM length of your TAM from 1 to 60 seconds. The machine will not start to detect SILENCE until the time setting has lapsed. (Default = 20 sec.)
Selecting the Silent Detection Mode. Selecting whether the machine receives to memory when recording paper runs out, toner runs out or recording paper is jammed. Setting the recording paper size installed in your machine.
Selecting print reduction mode. Fixed:Reduce received document according to setting of Parameter No. 25. Auto :Reduce received document according to the length of received documents. Selecting fixed print reduction ratio from 70% to 100%. This parameter functions only when fixed print reduction is selected on Fax Parameter No. 24. Setting a 4-digit password for secured polling. Selecting whether the machine retains the polled document in memory even after the document is polled once. Selecting whether the machine stamps the original documents when storing the documents into memory. (Depending on the Stamp setting on the Control Panel)
313 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
Setting Number
Setting
Comments
INCOMPLETE FILE SAVE
*1
Invalid
2
Valid
Selecting whether the machine retains the document in memory if the document is not successfully transmitted.
COPY REDUCTION z
1
Manual
*2
Auto
ENERGY SAVER MODE
1
Off
2
EnergySaver
DAYLIGHT TIME
1
Invalid
*2
Valid
*1
Invalid
2
Valid
Select a ring pattern for automatic answering. 1: A Standard ring pattern. 2: B Double ring pattern. 3: C Triple ring pattern (Short-Short-Long). 4: D All other triple ring patterns, except the type C described above.
No.
Parameter
31
32
34
35
36
RING PATTERN DETECT (DRD) (See Note 2)
Selecting whether the machine performs the copy reduction ratio automatically or manually. Manual :The machine will prompt you for the Zoom ratio (100% to 70%) when making copies. Auto :The machine will automatically determine the reduction ratio according to the length of the original document. To reduce the power consumption in standby, select either Energy-Saver or Sleep mode and specify the Delay Time (1 to 120 minutes) for the machine to enter into the selected mode. The Delay Timer setting is only available in the Energy-Saver or Sleep Modes. Off : The unit will remain in standby mode and consume more energy than when in Energy-Saver or Sleep modes. Energy-Saver Mode: Saves energy by consuming less power than when in standby mode by turning off the fuser unit after the specified time. Selecting whether the clock adjusts for Daylight Saving Time automatically. The built-in clock will advance 1 hour at 2:00 am on the first Sunday in April and fallback 1 hour at 2:00 am on the last Sunday in October. All ring patterns.
37
RCV TO MEMORY
(----)
Enter a 4-digit password used to print out the received document in memory by using F8-5 (RCV TO MEMORY). When F8-5 is set to On, this parameter will not be shown on the LCD display.
38
ACCESS CODE
(----)
Enter a 4-digit Access Code to secure the machine from unauthorized use.
39
PIN CODE ACCESS
*1
None
2
Suffix
Selecting the access method (Prefix or Suffix) to dial a number with PIN Code.
3
Prefix
*1
Invalid
2
Valid
42
CONF. POLLED FILE SAVE
Selecting whether the machine saves the confidential polled file even after the file is polled once.
314 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
No.
Parameter
Setting Number
Setting
Comments
43
PASSWORD-XMT
*1
Off
2
On
Setting a 4-digit XMT-Password and selecting whether the machine performs and checks the XMT-Password of the receiving station when transmitting.
*1
Off
2
On
*1
Invalid
2
Valid
1
Invalid
*2
Valid
*1
Invalid
2
Valid
44
PASSWORD-RCV
46
SELECT RCV
47
REMOTE RECEPTION
51
REMOTE DIAGNOSTIC
Setting a 4-digit RCV-Password and selecting whether the machine performs and checks the RCV-Password of the transmitting station when receiving. Selecting whether the machine performs selective reception. Selecting whether or not the machine accepts remote reception command. Selecting whether or not the machine accepts to update the firmware or Remote Diagnostics from the remote station. Please ask your Panasonic Authorized Dealer for details.
52
DIAGNOSTIC PASSWORD
(----)
Setting the password for Remote Diagnostic Mode. Please ask your Panasonic Authorized Dealer for details.
53
SUB-ADDRESS PASSWORD
(----)
Setting a 20-digit password for secured sub-address communication.
54
FAX FORWARD
56
COVER SHEET
58
LANGUAGE
*1
Invalid
2
Valid
*1
Off
2
On
*1 2
65
PRINT COLLATION
82
QUICK MEMORY XMT
Selecting whether the machine performs Forwarding to the specified destination.
Fax
Setting the home position of the Cover Sheet parameter in the Select Mode.
A-English Selecting the language to be shown on the display C-French and reports.
3
Spanish
1
Invalid
*2
Valid
1
Invalid
*2
Valid
Selecting whether the machine prints out documents in sequence. Selecting whether the machine performs Quick Memory Transmission. Invalid: Stores all documents into memory first before dialing the telephone number. Valid : Starts dialing the telephone number immediately after storing the first page.
99
MEMORY SIZE (Flash Memory)
-
-
Displays the amount of base and optional memory installed. (Base Memory + Optional Memory)
140
LAN RELAY XMT REQUEST
*1
Invalid
2
Valid
Selecting whether the machine performs LAN Relay XMT Request.
RELAY XMT (a.k.a. LAN RELAY STATION on UF-770i)
1
Invalid
*2
Valid
142
Selecting whether the machine accepts and performs G3 relayed transmission. (Relay Station Functions)
315 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
No.
Parameter
143
RELAY XMT REPORT
Setting Number
Setting
1
Off
*2 3
Setting how the COMM. Journal for relayed Always transmission is sent to the originator. Off : Don’t send. Inc. Only Always : Always send. Inc. Only : Send only if communication has failed.
144 EMAIL CHARACTER SET
*2
145
SENDER SELECTION
*1
Invalid
2
Valid
POP TIMER
----
0 to 60 min.
Setting the time interval for the machine to check for email on the POP Server. (0 = Does not check the POP Server for email.)
1
Invalid
*2
Valid
Selecting whether the machine automatically downloads an email from the POP Server.
1
Invalid
*2
Valid
DELETE POP ERR EMAIL
*1
Invalid
2
Valid
IFAX RETURN RECEIPT
1
Invalid
*2
Valid
1
All
*2
Subject/ From/To
3
Off
SUB-ADDRESS ROUTING
*1
Invalid
2
Valid
TSI ROUTING
*1
Invalid
2
Valid
146
1
Comments
Japanese Selecting the Character Set when receiving or sending English email text.
3 147 148 149
AUTO POP RCV DELETE POP RCV EMAIL
150 151
EMAIL HEADER FORMAT
152 153
154
ROUTING HEADER FORMAT
*1
PRINT ROUTED DOCUMENT
*1
155
156 PRINT FORWARDED DOCUMENT
2
2 *1 2
Selecting a pre-programmed sender’s name and email address before each transmission.
Selecting whether the email will be deleted automatically after retrieval from the POP Server. Selecting whether to delete the email that includes an incompatible file attachment from the POP Server. Selecting whether to send a return receipt when receiving from another Panasonic Internet Fax. Selecting the header information to print when an email is received. (Normally used for Troubleshooting. It shows the path of the email transmission before arriving at your machine.) Selecting whether to automatically route a received fax or email using ITU-T Sub-address. Selecting whether to route a received fax to a telephone number or an email address preprogrammed in Phone Book using the originating fax’s Numeric ID (TSI frame information).
Originator Selecting the type of email header to be included in the "From" field of each routed faxes. Relay Station Originator : The originating fax machine’s TSI will appear in the "From" field of the routed email. Relay Station: The routing station’s email address will appear in the "From" field of the routed email. Inc. Only Selecting whether a received fax to be routed is Always always printed or only when the routing operation fails. Inc. Only Selecting whether a memory received fax or email to Always be forwarded is always printed or only when forwarding is incomplete.
316 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
Setting Number
Setting
Comments
TRANSACTION JOURNAL
*1
Invalid
2
Valid
Selecting whether the machine sends a transaction journal to the pre-programmed email address.
PC REMOTE UPDATE
*1
Invalid
2
Valid
SUBJECT LINE ENTRY
*1
Invalid
2
Valid
DEFAULT DOMAIN
1
Invalid
*2
Valid
1
Invalid
*2
Valid
1
None
*2
English
3
English+ Japanese
*1
Invalid
2
Valid
No.
Parameter
157 158
159 160
161 162
163
164
DNS SERVER TIFF VIEWER URL
ROUTING HEADER
IFAX XMT HEADER (Email only)
*1
DHCP CLIENT
1
Invalid
*2
Valid
*1
Invalid
2
Valid
*1
Invalid
2
Valid
169
170
SMTP AUTHENTICATION (See Note 3)
171 POP BEFORE SMTP (See Note 3)
2
Selecting whether the machine will accept commands from an email application, to: (a) Program the Internet Parameters (b) Program the Auto Dialer (c) Allow retrieval of the Journal Selecting whether the "Subject" line programmed during each transmission.
can
be
Selecting whether the machine accepts to insert the Default Domain when entering Manual Number Dialing. Selecting whether to use the DNS Server for the Internet communication. Selecting whether to include the URL address in the email message body.
Selecting whether to add the Header Print information of the Routing Station on the top edge of each routed pages.
Included Selecting whether to include the header when sending a document to an addressee in the same Domain as Not Included specified in the Default Domain parameter. (This is useful when using the machine to scan documents back to your PC) Note: When sending to a Domain other than as specified in the Default Domain parameter, the header will be included regardless of the selection. Select whether the machine would automatically acquire the Network Parameters from the DHCP Server. (Such as IP Address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway IP Address, etc.) Note:If you change the setting of this parameter, the machine will reboot automaticaly. Selecting whether your SMTP Server (Outgoing Mail Server) requires authentication with a user name and password before accepting email. After change the setting to "Valid", you can enter the user name and password assigned to your machine by your network administrator. Selecting whether your SMTP Server (Outgoing Mail Server) requires authentication by first retrieving incoming email from the POP Server before accepting email. (Please consult with your network administrator).
317 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
No.
Parameter
Setting Number
Setting
Comments
172
DIRECT IFAX XMT
*1
Invalid
2
Valid
Selecting whether to be prompted during One-Touch/ ABBR registration if the station you are programming is to receive Internet Fax directly without going through a Mail Server.
1
Off
*2
On
*1
Invalid
2
Valid
173
174
DELIVERY NOTICE (HOME)
APOP AUTHENTICATION (See Note 3)
NOTE
Setting the home position of requesting a Delivery Notice (MDN) on the Function Select Mode (F8-2) when sending an email/Internet Fax. The delivery notice received will not be printed. It is used to update the communication status on the Transaction Journal of the original email sent. Selecting whether to use APOP authentication method when retrieving email/Internet Fax from the POP Server. (This setting is server dependant; consult with your network administrator).
1.Setting number marked with an asterisk (*) indicates the factory standard setting. 2.This parameter supports an optional telephone service "Distinctive Ring Service" provided by your local telephone company. It allows up to 4 different telephone numbers to be assigned on a single telephone line with a distinctive ring for each telephone number. By selecting the appropriate ring pattern associated with the telephone number assigned for your fax machine. It can differentiate and answer the incoming call on the fax number. All other calls on the other telephone numbers will not be answered. This optional service from your local phone company is also called Custom Ringing, Distinctive Ringing, Ident-a-call, Ident-a-ring, Personalized Ringing, RingMaster, RingMate, Selective Ringing, Smart Ring or something similar. Check with your local telephone company on the availability of this service in your area. 3."Valid" can be selected when the SMTP server or the POP server support the capabilities.
318 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
9
Options and Supplies
9.1
Options and Supplies
Please contact your local Panasonic dealer for availability. 1. Options Order No.
Picture
Description
UE-403176
Handset Kit
UE-409070
250 Sheet Letter / Legal / A4 Size Paper Cassette with the Feeder Unit
UE-410046 UE-410047
Expansion Flash Memory Card, 2 MB Expansion Flash Memory Card, 4 MB
UE-410048
Expansion Flash Memory Card, 8 MB
2. Supplies Order No. DZHT000027 (For USA / Canada)
Picture
Description
Verification Stamp
DZHT000004 UG-5510 (For USA / Canada) Toner Cartridge UG-3350
Note: For some destinations, the Handset Kit may not be available because of the destination’s regulation or specification.
319 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
9.2
Installing Optional 250 Sheet Paper Cassette (UE-409070)
1. Contents Qty. 1
Description 250 Sheet Paper Cassette with Feeder Unit
Part No. UE-409070
Remarks
2. Installation Note: Install this Feeder Unit as the 2nd Feeder Unit only. (3)
(2)
(5) (1) (4)
(1) Disconnect the Telephone Line Cable (1009) and the Power Cord (1008). (2) Remove the Recording Paper Tray Assembly (1107). (3) Open the Printer Cover (106). (4) Remove the Paper Cassette from the machine. (5) Remove the Toner Cartridge from the machine.
(6) Remove 1 Screw (B1). (7) Remove the Connector Access Cover (114).
(7) (6)
(9)
(10)
(8)
(8) Place the machine on its Rear side over a clean cloth to prevent damaging the Rear Cover. (9) Break off the protective tab on the machine. (10) Remove 4 Screws from the top of the 250 Sheet Paper Cassette. (11) Remove the shipping tape and place the CST2SNS2 Harness (1035) to the outside of the cassette.
(11)
320 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
(12) Insert the 250 Sheet Paper Cassette into the machine. (12)
(15) (13)x4
(16)
(13) Secure the 250 Sheet Paper Cassette with the 4 screws removed in step 10. (14) Place the machine upright. (15) Connect the CST2-SNS2 Harness (1035) into the Connector CN66 on the SC PC Board. (16) Re-install the Connector Access Cover (114). (17) Re-install the Recording Paper Tray Assembly (1107), Paper Cassettes and the Toner Cartridge. (18) Re-connect the Telephone Line Cable (1109) and the Power Cord (1108). (19) Print some pages from the Optional Paper Cassette to confirm its operation.
321 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
9.3
Installing Handset Kit (UE-403176)
1. Contents Qty. 1 1 1
Description
Part No. DZDU000031 DZFN000066 DZML000436
Handset Handset Cord Cradle Assembly
Remarks
2. Installation (1) Disconnect the Power Cord (1108) and the Telephone Line Cable (1109). (2) Break off the protective tab on the TEL/HANDSET Jack on the machine.
(2)
(1)
(1) (3)
(4)
(3) Hook the projections of the Cradle Assembly into the holes on the Left Cover. (4) Connect the Cradle Cable (123) to the TEL/HANDSET Jack on the rear of the machine. (5) Connect the Handset Cable (121). (6) Re-connect the Telephone Line Cable (1109) and the Power Cord (1108).
(5)
322 Edition 1.0
APR 2002
DX-600/800
10 Schematic Diagram 10.1. General Circuit Diagram A
B
C
D
CN50 1
3
10 11
3
GND
LCD
5
pPNLRD
LANC
1
nWAKUP
1
8
pPNLRST
Sensors
9
pBZCLK
10
nBPNT
PNL1
11
DZEP000648
51
1
*LAN
LEDV
52
2
GND
LEDV
53
3
GND
GND
54
4
GND
A16
55
5
D15
A15
56
6
D7
A14
57
7
D14
A13 2
(B8B-PH-K-M)
RD+ 58
8
D6
A12
59
9
D13
A11
3 4
N.C.
5
RD7
N.C 60
8
1
N.C 5
6
10
D5
6
A10
N.C 7 61
11
D12
A9
62
12
D4
A21
63
13
Vcc
*WE
64
14
Vcc
*RESET
65
15
D11
A20
66
16
D3
A19
67
17
D10
A18
8
2
Keys
A-Point
Keypad
B-Point
One-touch keys
B4 Width
Program keys
S-Door
e.t.c
CN30 CN7
TD-
4
CN201
1-50
TD+
3
RJ-45
LMP202C10-FR
LANB
DZEP000649
2
FR
1
FCK1
(S8B-PH-K-M)
2
FCK2
3
FSG
4
AGND
CCD
5
+5V
6
DOS
DZYC0539C
7
OS
8
FBX8703 2
Link
Activity
+24V
1
68
18
D2
A17
69
19
D9
A8
70
20
D1
A7
71
21
D8
A6
72
22
D0
A5
73
23
*OE
A4
CN1
nLEDON
2
(B2B-PH-K-M)
CN202
3
CN5 (B4B-PH-K-S)
(B4B-PH-K-S) 1 2 3 4
RX-
5
RX+
6
TX-
MTnB
1 2
4
CN200
74
24
GND
A3
75
25
GND
A2
76
26
Vdd
A1
77
27
Vdd
Vdd
78
28
A15
Vdd
79
29
A14
*CE
80
30
A13
D0
81
31
A12
D1
3
MTpB
TRANSMIT
MTnA
MOTOR
MTpA
4
FBX8705 FG
(42S1S22D6NB)
7
TX+
8
FBX8751
* OPTION
Handset Kit
CN28
CN23
CN90
(B2(3)B-PH-K-S) 3
1 82
32
A11
CN12
83
33
A10
D3
84
34
A9
D4
3
35
A8
D5 7
MEMORY CARD
36 537
FROM
39 56
57 41 58
59
25 43
60
61 45 62 46 63
(68-pins)
47 64
(A32-068-020-BGBB)
65
31 49
66
51 68
D10
ID0
GND
40
A3
5
4
3
2
4
3
2
1
1
6
1
(Not Mounted) (T2)
3
(T1)
4
EXT.TEL
D10
91
41
A2
D11
92
42
A1
D12
93
43
Vdd
D13
94
44
Vdd
D14
95
45
AEN
D15
96
46
ARDY
*WR
97
47
GND
*RD
6
CN20 (T2)
1
(L2(T))
3
(L1(R))
4
USA, CAN:DZEP000499
5
Others
(T1)
98
48
GND
RESET
99
49
GND
INTR0
100
50
GND
GND
LINE
* SRU :DZEP000168
6
4
nWEL
RDY/nBSY
MJR
nWEH +5V
17 34
CN91 6
D2 A22
16 33
DZEP000168
A15 D1
A21
15 32
50 67
DZEP000499
A14 D0
A20 D9
(AI)
A9 A1
D8 14
(AIS)
5
6
CN21
A10
A19
13 30
48
4
3
SRU
2
A2
ID1
29
(N.C.)
3 4
A12 A3
A18
12
HLIN2
(HLIN2)
3
5
nOE A4
ID2
28
5
(AIS)
(B6B-PH-K-S)
A11
RSV
11
2
nCE1
RSV N.C
27
11
4
2
5
A5
RSV 10
D9
90
A6
N.C
9 26
44
D8
A4
pHKOF
(T1) (N.C.)
HLIN1
D7
nCE2 nMB4
A5
39
pCTON
3
(HLIN1)
2
A7
N.C 8
38
89
pCMLD
2
(T2)
1
D6
D15
7 24
42
88
GND
CN29 1
FBX8702
A8
RSV
8
D5
D14
6 23
D7
+5VP
(N.C.) 3
D4
A13
N.C
22 40
*:Option
D6
A6
9
A16
D13
5
A7
37
10
A17
D12 N.C
21
55
36
87 D3
D11 N.C
4
86
GND
nCD
3 20
1-17 18-34
N.C
GND
197
38
2MB,4MB,8MB
N.C 2
37 54
GND
1 18
+24V
1
Shield
35-51 52-68 35 52
L1(R)
(B8(11-2.4.5)B-PH-K-S) 6
85
(AI)
1
D2
CN18
(31 5027 068 030 833)
L2(T)
MIC(+)
2
LINK
RCV(+)
3
1
+5V
RCV(-)
2
(A4:LNR304713 / B4:LNR314707)
(S8B-PH-K-S)
ACTIVITY
MIC(-)
1
LED ARRAY
FBX8701
CN97
(B3B-PH-K-S)
4
16
7
DZEP000616
(Solenoid:TDS-SY5-21M)
15
14
6
nPWSAVE
FBX8704 51-100
13
4
pPNLSD
(3-pins) (B3B-PH-K-S)
12
GND
nSTAMPON
CN93
11
V5
Stamp
2
(FX8C-100P-SV2)
(FX8C-100S-SV5)
1
10
+5V
CN96 CN3
+24V
9
+5V
9
8
GND
8
7
DB7
(B11B-PH-K-M)
6
DB6
(B2B-PH-K-M)
7
5
DB5
CN14
4
DB4
6
(2-pins)
+5VP
3
DB3
5
2
DB2
4
CN9
2
DB1
1
2
FAP8706
(S50C26C-1)
DZEP000712
1
GND
(S11B-PH-K-M)
DB0
3
pSPKOT
Speaker
1
+5V
E
2
GND
R/W
1
RS
SC
+5V GND
DZEP000635
(Continued on the next page)
Model DX-600 / 800
Edition 1.0
323
Drawing Name General Circuit Diagram (1/2)
APR 2002
DX-600/800
A
B
C
D
DZEA000057 (120V) DZEA000058 (230V) CN6
FBX8700
(B11B-PH-K-S)
+24V
1
3
GND
4
4
GND
5
SC
+3.3V
6
+5V
7
-5V
8
DZEP000712
(B16B-PH-K-S)
2
GND
3
1
CN103
1
+24V
2
+5VP
9
Voltage
7
Power
8
Supply
1
10
nSSR
11
Low
6
9
nMPOFF
10
5
11 12 13
CN53
14
(B10B-PH-K-S)
+24VM
15
nDRCK
16
1 2
4 5
1
nHSYNC
2
Tranfer
7
FBX8728
Laser Unit
T
T
T
CN202
FG
6
GND
7
200M
5
nVIDEO
6
Supply
(B7B-PH-K-S)
4
nLDON
5
Power
nTR0
3
GND
4
Voltage
nCR1
2
L+5V
3
LSU
CN68
nS/H
1
(B7B-PH-K-S)
High
nCRCK
3
Toner
Development
Cartridge
CN201
D
D
Charge
1
C
(B5P-VH)
C
(White)
3
2
2 nPMCK
1
1
nPMRY
2
(179123-5)
CN69
DZEP000620A
4
+24VM
5
Fuser Unit
3
MGND
4
(173981-5)
2
nPMON
3
5
CN102
5
Thermal Fuse
Termostat
ACI
(B2P3-VH-M)
FBX8729
HEAT1
1
(Green)
Black/L
(LPA1602F02)
Black
Fuser Lamp
CN101
HEAT2
1
White/N
MMpA
1
(173979-6)
CN52
CN54
CN118
2
4
Motor
5
TH2
2
N
AC Line
E
(White) 3
Thermistor
WHITE/N
INLET
(PHR-2)
3
MMpB
FBX8738
4
+24VM
5
MMnB
6
(B2B-PH-K-S)
(B6B-PH-K-S)
White L
(B2P3-VH)
FBX8720
2
MMnA
3
Main
1
+24VM
TH1
1
BLACK/L
Not Mounted FBX8739
6
FAP8708 1
(55SPM25D7NA2)
2
DZEP000427A
FG
CN86 SNS4
(B2B-PH-K-S) CN56 3
CN58
(B2B-PH-K-S)
+24VM
Pick Up
(B6B-PH-K-M)
1
nCCHK1
1
GND
2
nADF1
2
Solenoid
nRSEN
3 4
+5V
5
(TDS-F08G-21B)
nESEN
6
CN87 1
(B6B-PH-K-M) CN85
3
nCCHK1
1
(B4B-PH-K-M)
4
2
5
3
6
4
GND nRSEN LDRE
Paper Exit Sensor
FBX8713
(B4B-PH-K-M) 1
SNS1
2 3
(B3B-PH-K-M)
FAP8715
CN57 (B2(3)PH-K-M)
ILS
1
+24V
nCCHK1
1
GND
2
Timing Sensor CNA1003
1
LDSC1
3
USA, CAN:FBX8727 Others
3
Printer Cover Sensor
+24VD
DZEP000377
CN82
CN80
4
CNA1003 DZEP000650
3
DZEP000376
CN81
2
(B3B-PH-K-M) 1
SNS2
2 3
Casette Detect Sensor CNA1003
:FAP8727
3
DZEP000408
CN83 FBX8717
CN59
CN73
(B5B-PH-K-M)
nPCHK1
1
LDSP1
2
(S2(3)B-PH-K-S)
GND
3
TONER
4
+5V
5 6
(B5B-PH-K-M) 1
SNS3
2 3
No Paper Sensor
4 5
1
CNA1003
FAP8725
2
CN66
3
(B7B-PH-K-M) 1
2
3
4
5
6
CN84
7
GND TONER +5V
FAP8724
1
Toner Sensor
2 3
(S-3B-ZR-SM3A-TF)
(B3B-PH-K-S) (TS0505ANA-83CE)
DZEP000406
1
2
3
5
6
nOP
nCCHK2
pADF2
nPCHK2 4
DZFAP8730
7
CN82
(B7B-PH-K-M)
Pick-Up Solenoid
+5V
* 2nd Cassette Option
GND
4 +24VM
4
+24VM nADF2
CST2
1
CN74
CN70
(B3B-PH-K-M)
2
1 2 3
CN71 (B2B-PH-K-S)
No Paper Sensor
nCCHK2 GND SNCMN
DZEP000377
(B3B-PH-K-M) 1
SNS2
2 3
DZFAP8732
Casette Detect Sensor CNA1003
CNA1003
Model DX-600 / 800
Edition 1.0
324
Drawing Name General Circuit Diagram (2/2)
APR 2002
DX-600/800
10.2. SC PC Board A
B
C
D
nSDRAS 002:A4;003:A2
nSDRAS
002:A4;003:A2
nSDCAS
002:A3;003:A1
SDCLK
003:A1
SDCKE
002:D2;003:A1;004:A1;014:B2
A[23-1]
nSDCAS SDCLK
50MHz
SDCKE
nREVCK
007:C4
nLTCK
007:C4
A[23]
A[22]
A[21]
A[20]
A[19]
A[18]
A[17]
A[16]
A[15]
A[14]
A[13]
A[11]
A[12]
A[8]
A[10]
A[7]
A[9]
A[6]
A[5]
A[4]
A[1]
D[15-0]
A[3]
002:A2;003:A1;004:A3;014:A2
A[2]
+3.3V C4
R12
47K
R13
47K
0
47K
0
R11
0
47K
0
47K
R10
0
1 R9
16V
22uF
2
+3.3V
1
1
R474
R473
R472
R471
R470
C5
25V 0.1uF
C6
25V 0.1uF
C7
25V 0.1uF
C8
14
D[3]
2
D[4]
13
D[5]
12
D[6]
11 10
D[7] D[8]
7
D[9]
6
D[10]
5
D[11]
4
D[12]
3
D[13]
2
D[14]
1
D[15]
144
JW15
JW14
JW13
JW78
+3.3V
25V
D2/PDL2
47K
47K
47K
47K
47K
47K
47K
47K
47K
47K
47K
47K
47K
47K
47K
47K
47K
R22
R23
R24
R18
R25
R26
R27
R28
R30
R31
R32
R33
R34
R35
R36
R37
AVDD/AVREF
R20
GND
71
61
134
CVDD
124
98 VDD
VDD
81 VDD
VDD
47 VDD
112
37 VDD
VDD
27 VDD
VDD
8
108
109
110
D1/PDL1
PCD2/*LBE/*SDCAS
D0/PDL0
PCD1/SDCLK
114
111
PAH9/A25
PAH8/A24
PAH7/A23
115
0.1uF
116
PAH6/A22
117
JW77
JW76 118 PAH5/A21
119
120
PAH4/A20
PAH3/A19
121 PAH2/A18
PAH1/A17
PAH0/A16
122
126
123
PAL15/A15
127 PAL14/A14
128
129
PAL13/A13
PAL11/A11
PAL12/A12
130
JW11
JW10 131
132
PAL10/A10
PAL8/A8
PAL9/A9
133
JW9
JW8
JW7 PAL7/A7
PAL6/A6
136
JW6
JW4
JW5
137
138
139
PAL5/A5
PAL4/A4
PAL3/A3
JW2
JW3 140
141
25V 0.1uF
PCD3/*UBE/*SDRAS
15
D[2]
25V 0.1uF
C9
C10
PCD0/SDCKE
16
PAL2/A2
TL2 143 17
D[1]
PAL1/A1
PAL0/A0 D[0]
142
JW1
JW12
GND
107 nFROMP
PCS0/*CS0 106
nSDRAM
PCS2/*CS2/*IOWR PCS3/*CS3/*RAS3
PCS7/*CS7
D9/PDL9
97
JW17
96
JW18
PCT4/*RD 94
D12/PDL12
PCM0/*WAIT 90
*1
005:A3
nRESET
003:C1;004:A2;014:B2
Mounts at the technical trial production.
18 *2
JP1
R21
GND
Mounts when DSW1 is not mounted
47K
58
47K
57
CVSS
AVSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
pMVOL0
64
72
135
125
113
99
82
48
38
9
28
70
69
68
67
66
3
TL4
+3.3V
nRESOUT
0
002:A4
*1
Serial I/F
GND
1
4
2
3
*1
B7B-PH-K-S D1
3
1
1 CN98
Vpp
MA704
7.8V
KHS02C GND 47K
GND
65
5.000MHz*10
56
C3
005:A3
36
47K
nBPNT
pMVOL1
+3.3V
DSW1
PROGRAM MODE
NORMAL MODE
1-4 PIN
OFF
ON
2-3 PIN
ON
OFF
R17
002:D4;012:B4
005:A3
35
47K
CID0
007:C4
pMVOL2 34
R16
014:C3
011:A1
pBRING 33
47K
CID1
011:A1
26
R14
014:C3
011:A2
pCR1
DSW1 CKSEL=0:PLL MODE
R390
CID2
pCR0
pTR0
R15
R5
R4
R3
R2
R1 nCDOPT
004:C1
*1
GND
014:C3
nFRPRST
25
GND
AT-49-5.000MHz
014:C3
005:D2
24
*2
VSS
2
MODE0
VSS
X1
TXD0/SO0/P40
X2
RXD0/SI0/P41
CKSEL
*SCK0/P42
63
50.0V
5.000MHz 27pF
47K
47K
47K
47K
C2
50.0V
1
+3.3V
62
330
X1
MODE1
TL34
R7
PWM1/P10
MODE2_VPP/MODE2
55
0.022uF
GND
27pF
GND
*RESET
TXD1/SO1/P43
60
RXD1/SI1/P44
59
TL33
25.0V
54
1K
C1
47K
R6
012:B4
nMDMRST
23
+3.3V
*SCK1/P45
16.0V
0.1uF
47K
P77/ANI7
53
C263
TI010/INTP010/P11 (pRBT)
P76/ANI6
SO2/INTP130/P30
nLANOPT
INTP011/P12
P75/ANI5
52
014:A2
144-pins
P74/ANI4
SI2/INTP131/P31
73
TO01/P13
*SCK2/INTP132/P32
74
P73/ANI3
TXD2/INTP133/P33
75
PWM0/P00
51
nOP
P72/ANI2
50
nESEN
012:B4
TI000/INTP000/P01
49
012:B1
76
INTP001/P02
P71/ANI1
46
nRSEN
TO00/P03
V850E/MA1
P70/ANI0
TI020/INTP020/P21
012:B1
77
CPU
45
+24LVL
011:C4
pPNLRST
83 P52/TO03 (nPDOR2)
INTP021/P22
TONER
P51/INTP031
*DMAAK1/PBD1
44
012:B3
nPWOFF
84
RXD2/INTP120/P34
79
013:A3
85
*DMAAK2/PBD2
*DMAAK0/PBD0
002:A3
USBENB 86
PCM5/SELFREF P50/INTP030/TI030
(n3CRST)
INTP121/P35
1K
78
009:B2
PCM4/*REFRQ
*DMARQ0/INTP100/P04
INTP122/P36
80
GND R78
3
32
002:A3
nHLDRQ 87
uPD703105GJ(mask)
TO02/P23
BATIN THERM
PCM3/*HLDRQ
*DMARQ1/INTP101/P05
43
012:B1 011:A3
47K
002:A3
nHLDAK 88
*DMARQ2/INTP102/P06
ADTRG/INTP123/P37
31 R8
014:A4
SYSCLK
BLM11A121S
PCM2/*HLDAK
uPD703105GJ
*TC0/INTP110/P24
nPCHK1
50MHz
NF1 89
*DMARQ3/INTP103/P07
42
nCCHK1
012:B3
014:B4
LANRDY
91
*TC1/INTP111/P25
012:B1
pLANRST
92
(PWSVCNCL)
30
002:A4;003:A2
TL3
PCT6/*OE PCT7/*BCYST
D15/PDL15
NMI/P20
TL1
002:D1;003:A1;004:A1;014:A3
nWE 93
(nG3RST)
D14/PDL14
*DMAAK3/PBD3
nRD JW19
PCT5/*WE
D13/PDL13
uPD70F3107GJ-UEN(flash) 29
2
95
D11/PDL11
47K +3.3V
002:D1
nWRU_DQMU002:A3;003:A1;014:B4
PCT1/*UCAS/*UWR/UDQM
47K
22 R80
nI_O2
nWRL_DQML 002:A3;003:A1;004:C1;014:B2
PCT0/*LCAS/*LWR/LDQM
D10/PDL10
*TC2/INTP112/P26
pADF1
002:D1;003:C3
D8/PDL8
*TC3/INTP113/P27
010:C4
21
002:D1
nFROMI 100
D7/PDL7
41
nPCHK2
nI_O1 101
PCS6/*CS6/*RAS6
40
nCCHK2
012:B4
002:D1;003:A3
102 PCS5/*CS5/*IORD
D6/PDL6
39
012:B4
002:D1;004:C2
nSRAM
PCS4/*CS4/*RAS4
D5/PDL5
R19
20
014:B3
nFROMC 103
D4/PDL4
R29
19
nFROML 104
D3/PDL3
PCM1/CLKOUT/BUSCLK LANINT
002:D1;003:A1
105
IC1 014:B4
003:C1
JW16
PCS1/*CS1/*RAS1
2
4
CN98
nRESET
CN98
DBGTXD
CN98
DBGRXD
CN98
DBGCLK
4
3 4 5 005:B4
nBZHIGH
005:A3
nMNTON
005:B2
nMDMINT
6 CN98
BOOT GND
CN98
GND
7
002:D4
nPRTINT
PNLTXD
012:B3
002:D4
nSCNINT
PNLRXD
012:B3
002:D3
nPCINT
PNLCLK
012:B2
002:A3
nSYSINT
Model DX-600 / 800
Edition 1.0
325
GND
Drawing Name SC PC Board (1/14)
APR 2002
DX-600/800
A
B
C
D
+3.3V for USB i/f
AT-49-8.9806MHz 50.0V
TC7SU04FU 2
R73
2
50V
C20
X5
1M
15.975MHz
LAL02VD2R2K GND
C29
R71
50V
1
Not Mounted GND
5pF
C21
75
50V
R65
C26
0.01uF
0
0
GND
47K
47K
25V
D3
001:D2;003:A1
nRD
001:D2;003:A1;004:A1;014:A3
A[23-1]
001:A1;003:A1;004:A1;014:B2
pMPOW
009:A3
PLSD
006:D1;007:C3
pSTAMP
010:C2
nHKOF
006:D4
pCMLD
006:B4;007:C3
R55
47K
D[14]
81
R56
47K
D[15]
80
A[1]
A[3]
A[4]
A[5]
A[6]
A[7]
A[8]
A[9]
A[10]
A[2]
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
A23
*RD
*CS1
*CS3
*CS4
*CS5
*CS6
*CS7
FR
*SHB
*LEDON
TST0
TST1
CVDD(2.5V) CVDD(2.5V)
106
R492
0
157
R493
0
181
R494
0
C32
50V
D14 0.01uF
D15
005:B2
nMODEM
PLLGND
*IO1
CPOUT1(PWM)
42 014:A4
nLANC
GND
15 *IO0
41
*IO2
16
R74
5.1K
17
R77
VCOIN1(PWM)
43 TL5 44 TL6
GND
*IO4
IC3
*IO5
DZAC000273
158
45 TL7
BOFST0/ID4
46 TL8
*IO6
BOFST1/ID5
*IO7
BOFST2/ID6
SCANENB
BOFST3/ID7
*WR
BOFST4/ID8
47 TL9 115 013:A3
SCANENB 36
003:A3;005:B2
nWR 107
001:D2;003:A1;004:C1;014:B2 nWRL_DQML
SHINE
*WRL/*DQML 108
001:D2;003:A1;014:B4nWRU_DQMU
*WRU/*DQMU
DATA8
76 001:D3
nHLDAK
DATA7
*HLDAK 77
001:A1;003:A1
SDCLK
001:D2
SYSCLK
DATA6
SDCLK
(System Handling and Image Navigation Engine)
103 SYSCLK
DATA5
35
3
003:A3;005:B2
nUBE
*UBE
DATA4
*LBE
DATA3
34 +3.3V
003:A3;005:B2
nLBE
DATA2 37 001:D3
nHLDRQ
004:C2
nDIRD
004:D2
nDIRV
208-pins
*HLDRQ 100
47K
001:A4
IC2
*SELIN
DIR1
*AUTFD
nSYSINT
*SYSINT
*STRBE
+3.3V
1K
R59
DBT1R
010:A2
IOBR1
010:A2
IOBR0
010:A2
PHBR
4
159
VOUT 2
IN OUT GND 1
TL13 160 TL14 161 TL15
GND
162 TL16
GND DATA[8-1]
203
DATA[8]
202
DATA[7]
201
DATA[6]
200
DATA[5]
198
DATA[4]
197
DATA[3]
196
DATA[2]
195
DATA[1]
204 nSELIN nAUTFD
013:A2
nSTRBE
013:A2
pPERR
013:A2
206 207 4 nACK pBUSY
013:A1
nFAULT
013:A1
8 pSELECT
013:A1
pBUSOUT
013:A1
nPCINT
001:A4
9 119 155
*INIT MMP3
MMP2
013:A2
nCTON
006:D3
MMP0
010:A3
MMP1
010:A4
13
12
nINIT 140
*CTON
R72
VSCD[7]
VSCD[0]
VSCD[1]
VSCD[2]
VSCD[3]
VSCD[4]
013:A2
5 6
MMP2 VSCD[5]
013:A2
205
GND
VSCD[6]
013:A1
3
*PCINT
MMP1/MMON
MMP0/*MMRDY 11
10
*HSYNC
*PMRY 163
30
*ZCRS
VDO/LDCTL 31
19
S/H
PMON
*PMCK 23
21
20
DRCK/HVBCNT 29
28
SSR
LDON
*PRTINT 24
118
*BPNT
VREQ 133
MCLK
*SCNINT 122
117
127
CKVG/DREQ1
MACK/*MOE 141
136
*VSDA 138
*VSEN
*VSCK
*SYNC 137
139
VGSD0/ID3 135
149
VGSD1/ID2
VGSD2/ID1 148
VGSD4/*DACK0
VGSD5/*DACK1
VGSD3/ID0 147
146
145
PHAR
142
IOAR1
DATIR
IOAR0 187
189
190
188
IOBR0
PHBR 191
192
IOBR1
DBTIR 193
194
VSS
CVSS
VSS
VSS 3
14
25
26
VSS 27
VSS 38
58
VSS
CVSS
VSS 78
VSS
VSS 79
87
95
VSS
VSS 102
VSS
VSS 110
120
CVSS
VSS 130
131
VSS
VSS 132
153
VSS 165
VSS
VSS
VSS
1
*WE
144
VGSD6/DREQ0
3
114
R58
1
BUSOUT
*SDCAS
TL12
LM1117MPX-2.5
3
47K
nWE
010:A2
*SDRAS 113
174
nSDCAS
112
182
nSDRAS
001:D2;003:A2
*FAULT
186
nRESOUT
R57
R40 001:D3
MA786
3
MA786 D3
D2
47K
GND
001:A1;003:A2
BUSY
SELECT
GND
001:A1;003:A2
*ACK
+3.3V
47K
=44.9ms
*RESET
*RESOUT
47K
td=0.69*6.5M*C12
129
39 0.1uF
C13
R3112Q29C
47K
*PWRDWN
25V
GND
PERR
32
R39
OUT
199
R38
DATA1
DIR0 101 116
7.5
C34
*IO3
IC6
+5V C35
nFRIP
25V
004:C1
+2.5V
PLLVDD(2.5V)
1
82
16V
D[13]
D12
22uF
47K
CVDD(2.5V)
D11
0
C42
R54
D10
0
R491
2
83
0
R490
1
84
D[12]
R489
53
22uF
D[11]
47K
2 18
2
47K
R53
CVDD(2.5V) PLLVDD(2.5V)
0.1uF
R52
PT6/ID15
D8 D9
16V
85
C41
88
D[10]
173
25V
89
D[9]
47K
2
172
C40
D[8]
47K
R51
PT5/ID14
0.1uF
47K
R50
PT4/ID13
25V
R49
D5 D6
0.1uF
90
25V
91
D[7]
TL35 171
C39
D[6]
47K
170
25V
47K
R48
PT3/ID12
0.1uF
R47
D4
C38
92
40
0.01uF
nSDRAM
NCU I/F : positive logic (pPLSD)
TL11
25V
93
D[5]
DAA I/F : negative logic (nPLSD)
169
0.1uF
D[4]
47K
D13
25V
001:D2;004:C2
168
0.1uF
47K
R46
PT2/ID11
D7
0.1uF
001:D2;003:A3
nFROMC
167 PT0/ID9 PT1/ID10
C37
R45
RS/RB/*CISCLK
D2
2
VCOIN0(SYNC)
PLLGND
SCNCLK
CPOUT0(SYNC)
XIN0
CLK48
XIN1
XOUT0
XOUT1
DP
DM
VDD3
VDD3
VDD3
VDD3
VDD3
VDD3
VDD3
VDD3
VDD3
VDD3
VDD3
96
VDD3
D[3]
VDD3
47K
VDD3
97
R44
VDD3
98
D[2]
VDD3
99
D[1]
47K
VDD3
D[0]
47K
R43
VDD3
47K
R42
VDD3
R41
D1
50V
001:D2
nSRAM
D[15-0]
D0
C11
001:D2;003:C3
48
49
50
51
54
55
56
59
A[11] 62
61
63
60
A[12]
A[18]
A[20]
A[21]
A[19]
64
65
66
67
A[22]
A[23] 69
68
75
111
74
109
73
72
TL10 134
71
126
125
124
R67
123
128
178
179
183
164
184
154
175
176
151
152
7
1
33
52
22
57
70
86
94
104
105
121
143
150
156
166
177
185
208
R66
25V R64
C23
GND
C12
nFROMI
0.1uF
25V
0.1uF
4
001:D2
nI_O1
GND
20K
C22
0.1uF
2
008:D1
nI_O2
25V
180
C19
4
008:D1
FR
0.1uF
25V 0.1uF
VDD
008:D4
RS
25V 0.1uF
25V 0.1uF
C18
CD
L1
25V 0.1uF
C17
3
3pF
25.0V
GND
R482
0 R481
R480
0
0 R479
0
R478
0 R477
R476
0 C16
1
50.0V
1
C30
R75
47K 2
C31 0
1000pF
X4
1M
C36 R76
pLEDON
GND
001:A1;003:A1;004:A3;014:A2
5pF
+3.3V
R475
R511
47K
DM
47K
013:A4
50V
0
R512
DP
50.0V
1
C27
GND 013:A4
R70
1 3 NC
4.7K
27pF
1
C28
2
IC4
50V
R62
0.01uF
50.0V
4 0
R63
C25
7.9312MHz
5
R68
1M
X3
GND
1 3 NC
AT-49-15.975MHz
R510
TC7SU04FU
27pF 4.7K
27pF
C33
3pF IC5
+3.3V
50.0V
2
R60
1
1
AT-49-7.9312MHz C24
R61
8.9806MHz
50.0V
AT-49-48.000MHz(8pF)
2
0
1M
X2
27pF
C15
5 4
0.01uF
C14
GND
010:A3
MMP3
010:A4
pHSYNC
009:C3
nPMRY
009:C2
010:A2
DAT1R
010:A1
IOAR1
pS_H
009:C4
010:A1
IOAR0
pVDO
pPMON
009:C1
009:C3
pPMCK
009:C2
010:A1
PHAR
008:B4
nSYNC
pSSRA
011:A3
008:D3
nVSCK
pLDON
009:C3
008:D4
nVSEN
nPRTINT
001:A4
008:D3
nVSDA
008:B4
MACK
DRCK
4
011:A2
nBPNT
001:A4;012:B4
nVREQ
004:C1
JW20
008:D4
VSCD[7-0]
Model DX-600 / 800
Edition 1.0
326
MCLK
004:C1
nSCNINT
001:A4
Drawing Name SC PC Board (2/14)
APR 2002
DX-600/800
A
D
D[15-0] A[23-1] +3.3V
nRD
JW46
+3.3V 0
C47
1
37
25V
001:D3;004:A2;014:B2
nRESET
0.1uF
+3.3V
13
0
0
47 +3.3V
nSDRAM
001:D2;002:A4
nWE
001:A1;002:A4
nSDCAS
001:A1;002:A4
nSDRAS
15 19 LDQM 0.0 16 *CS
*RAS
DQ3
DQ2
64Mbit
128Mbit
A[1]
23
A[2]
24
A[3]
25
A[4]
26
A[5]
29
A[6]
30
A[7]
31
A[8]
32
A[9]
33
BANK1
A22
A23
A[10]
34
BANK0
A21
A22
A[11]
22
A[12]
64Mbit
128Mbit
JP2
35
A[23]
*1
JP2
A[22]
*1
JP3
JP3
*1
JP4
*1
JP5
JP4 A[21]
JP5
0
21
#
20
A1 A2
DQ5 DQ6 DQ7 DQ8 DQ9 DQ10
A4
DQ11
A5
DQ12
A6
DQ13
A7
DQ14
A8
DQ15
A9
R497
2 4
RA1
5
RA1
7
RA1
8
RA1
10
RA2
11
RA2
13
RA2
42
RA2
44
RA3
45
RA3
47
RA3
48
RA3
50
RA4
51
RA4
53
RA4 RA4
4
5
3
6
2
7
1
8
4
5
3
6
2
7
1
8
4
5
3
6
2
7
1
8
4
5
3
6
2
7
1
8
D[0] 33 33
#
D[1] D[2]
33
D[3]
33
D[4]
33
D[5]
WORK,PAGE MEMORY GND
SDRAM 64M
A10/AP
25
A[2]
24
A[3]
23
A[4]
22
A[5]
21
A[6]
20
A[7]
19
A[8]
18
A[9]
8
33
D[7]
A[10]
7
33
D[8]
A[11]
6
33
D[9]
A[12]
5
33
D[10]
A[13]
4
33
D[11]
A[14]
3
33
D[12]
A[15]
2
33
D[13]
A[16]
1
33
D[14]
A[17]
48
33
D[15]
A[18]
17
A[19]
16
A[20]
9
33
#
A[21]
JP6
10 0
52
NC *BYTE
IC9 90.0ns
#
1
*CE *OE *WE
RY/BY
*RESET NC
DQ0
A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7
DQ1 DQ2 DQ3 DQ4 DQ5 DQ6 DQ7 DQ8 DQ9
A8
DQ10
A9
DQ11
A10
DQ12
A11
DQ13
A12
DQ14
A13
DQ15
A14
15
TL17
29
D[0]
31
D[1]
33
D[2]
35
D[3]
38
D[4]
40
D[5]
42
D[6]
44
D[7]
PROGRAM FROM 16M
30
D[8]
32
D[9]
34
D[10]
36
D[11]
39
D[12]
41
D[13]
43
D[14]
45
D[15]
2
A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 NC GND GND 46
VSS FROM JP6 JP25
0
:Mounted :Not Mounted
0
D[6]
VSSQ 46
BA0
14
A[1]
12
A11 BA1
JP25
33
6
0 0
DQ4
A3
28
*1:table
A0
41
2
DQ0 DQ1
40 NC
1K
0.1uF
17 *WE 18 *CAS 36
SDRAM
49
UDQM
R82
0.1uF C46 25V
VDDQ 43
CKE
12
25V
54
001:D2;002:D1
C45
9
25.0V
39
3
IC7
0.022uF
SDCKE
001:D2;002:A3;014:B4nWRU_DQMU
28 11
C48
37
CLK
HY57V641620HGT-P
001:A1
38
SDCLK
R496
VDD 001:A1;002:A3
26
nFROMP
27
14
1
001:D2
VCC
25V
R495
0.1uF
001:D2;002:A3;004:C1;014:B2 nWRL_DQML
C50
001:A1;002:D2;004:A1;014:B2 001:D2;002:D1;004:A1;014:A3
C
MBM29LV160B-90PFTN-SFKS
001:A1;002:A2;004:A3;014:A2
B
16Mbit MBM29LV160B
32Mbit MBM29DL32XBD
Not Mounted
Mounted
27
GND
GND 004:C4;005:B1;014:B4
DD[15-0]
004:C1;005:B1;014:A4;014:C1
AD[15-1]
+3.3V
JW47
37
#
3
41 17
nWR
002:A3;005:B2
nUBE
002:A3;005:B2
nLBE
40 39
*CE *OE *WE
4
4
A[3]
3
A[4]
2
A[5]
1
A[6]
44
A[7]
43
A[8]
42
A[9]
27
A[10]
26
A[11]
25
A[12]
24
A[13]
21
A[14]
20
A[15]
19
A[16]
18
nRDD
28 11 12
IC8
R83
15.0ns
*BHE I/O1
*BLE
I/O3
A0 A1
I/O4
CY7C1021V33-15ZCT
A[2]
5
004:C2;005:B2;014:B4
26
VCC
VCC
I/O2 A[1]
nFROMI
1K
# 25.0V
002:A3;005:B2
nSRAM
001:D2;002:D1
A2 A3 A4 A5 A6
I/O5 I/O6 I/O7 I/O8 I/O9 I/O10
A7
I/O11
A8
I/O12
A9
I/O13
A10
I/O14
A11
I/O15
A12
I/O16
A13 A14 A15
N.C. N.C. N.C. VSS 12
7
D[0]
8
D[1]
9
D[2]
10
D[3]
13
D[4]
14
D[5]
15
D[6]
16
D[7]
29
D[8]
30
D[9]
31
D[10]
32
D[11]
35
D[12]
36
D[13]
37
D[14]
38
D[15]
0.022uF
001:D2;002:D1
6
47 +3.3V
0.1uF
33
11
for CODEC SRAM 1M GND
22
14 0
AD[1]
25
AD[2]
24
AD[3]
23
AD[4]
22
AD[5]
21
AD[6]
20
AD[7]
19
AD[8]
18
AD[9]
8
AD[10]
7
AD[11]
6
AD[12]
5
AD[13]
4
AD[14]
3
AD[15]
2
A[16]
1
A[17]
48
A[18]
17
A[19]
16
A[20]
9
23 28
JP26
A[21]
#
JP7
10 0
VCC NC *BYTE
IC10 90.0ns
*OE *WE
RY/BY
*RESET NC
DQ0
A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7
DQ1 DQ2 DQ3 DQ4 DQ5 DQ6 DQ7 DQ8 DQ9
A8
DQ10
A9
DQ11
A10
DQ12
A11
DQ13
A12
DQ14
A13
DQ15
A14
15
TL18
29
DD[0]
31
DD[1]
33
DD[2]
35
DD[3]
38
DD[4]
40
DD[5]
42
DD[6]
44
DD[7]
30
DD[8]
32
DD[9]
34
DD[10]
36
DD[11]
39
DD[12]
41
DD[13]
43
DD[14]
45
DD[15]
IMAGE FROM 16M
A15 A16
4
A17 A18 A19 NC GND GND 46
# Not mounted FROM JP7 JP26
GND
16Mbit MBM29LV160B
32Mbit MBM29DL32XBD
Not Mounted
Mounted
27
GND
Model DX-600 / 800
Edition 1.0
3
*CE
VSS 34
25V
25V
0.1uF C44 25V
C49
#
C43
13
C51
#
MBM29LV160B-90PFTN-SFKS
JW28
0.1uF
+3.3V
327
Drawing Name SC PC Board (3/14)
APR 2002
DX-600/800
A
001:A1;002:D2;003:A1;014:B2
A[23-1]
001:D2;002:D1;003:A1;014:A3
nRD
B
C
D
AV[2-1]
1
008:D4
IC16 *G
A[1] AD[15-1]
2
003:C3;005:B1;014:A4;014:C1 A[2]
1
1
2
A[2]
4
A[3]
6
A[4]
8
+3.3V
Y1
A2
Y2
A3
Y3
A4
Y4
4
IC14 *G
A[1]
A1
6
A1
Y1
A2
Y2
A3
Y3
A4
Y4
18
AD[1]
16
AD[2]
18
AV[1]
16
AV[2]
14
8
nRDV
008:D4;014:C3
nWLV
008:D4;014:C3
12
001:D2;002:A3;003:A1;014:B2 nWRL_DQML
TC74VHCT244FT 14
AD[3]
12
AD[4]
To: 19
1
FRIP5
IC16 *G
11
20 IC14
002:A2
nFRIP
001:D3
nFRPRST
002:D4
MCLK
IC14
002:D4
nVREQ
A[5]
11
A[6]
13
A[7]
15
A[8]
17
9
AD[5]
7
AD[6]
Y3 Y4
5
AD[7]
3
AD[8]
25V
1
Y2
A[11]
6
A[12]
8
A3
Y3
A4
Y4
AD[10]
16 14
AD[11]
12
AD[12]
TC74VHC244FT
25V
A2
4
5 VCC GND
IC42 TC7S04FU
3
2
A[17]
4
A[18]
6
A[19]
8
20
19
TC7S04FU
VCC GND
GND
IC15
A[13]
11 A1
A[14]
13
A[15]
15
A2 GND
9
AD[13]
7
AD[14]
5
AD[15]
A3
Y3 Y4
Y2
A3
Y3
18
AV[16]
16
AV[17]
14
AV[18]
12
AV[19]
nFROMCV
014:C3
pRESET
012:B2
Y4
To:
TC74VHCT244FT
FROM CARD
19
IC17 *G
GND
11
A[21]
13
A[22]
15
nFROMC
A1
Y1
A2
Y2
A3
Y3
A4
Y4
9
AV[20]
7
AV[21]
5
AV[22]
2
3
TC74VHCT244FT
Y2
A4
Y1
A2
17 001:D2;002:D1
Y1
17
A1
IC17
10
*G
3
014:C1
TC74VHCT244FT
A[20]
IC11
AV[22-15] IC17
A4
5 VCC GND
A[16]
+5V
0.1uF
Y1
25.0V
A1
008:D4
*G
10
C58
GND
AD[9]
18
0.1uF
2
008:B4
nVREQV
3
TC74VHCT244FT
GND
+3.3V A[9]
+3.3V
0.1uF
IC16
LAN CONTROLLER
IC15 *G
10
Y4
20 VCC GND
FROM CARD 1
TC74VHC244FT
A[10]
C52
0.1uF
MODEM
20
C277
25V
IMAGE FROM
C56
0.1uF
To:
IC15
A4
TC74VHCT244FT
TC74VHC244FT
GND
008:B4
MCLKV
+5V
+3.3V
VCCL
008:D4
nFRPRSTV 5
Y2
A3 A4
nFRIPV 7
Y2 Y3
17
Y1
A2 GND
Y1
A2 A3
15
A1
2
A1
*G
10
9
13
19
TC74VHC244FT
25V
GND
C57
VCCL
C55
0.1uF
25V
TC74VHC244FT
3 nRDD
GND
003:C3;005:B2;014:B4
TC74VHC244FT
GND 2 001:D3;003:C1;014:B2
4
nRESET
+3.3V 1
IC11
+5V R498
R499
TC7S04FU
0
NC 002:A3
nDIRV
002:A3
nDIRD
2
C59
4
1
0.1uF
IC42
0
25V
C61
1
25V
0.1uF
24
TC7S04FU VCCA
GND
NC
22 001:A1;002:A2;003:A1;014:A2
D[15-0]
VCCB 23 NC
*G
D[15-0]
GND
IC18
2
To: *DIR(BA)
FRIP5 FROM CARD
TC74LVXC3245FS D[0]
4
19 *G
RA13
To: 1
D[1]
MODEM LAN CONTROLLER
1
8
RA5
3
D[1] D[2]
RA5
D[3] +3.3V
RA5
VCCL
C53
0.1uF
25V
D[4]
GND
RA6
D[5]
20 IC12 TC74VHC245FT
RA6
D[6]
RA6
D[7]
3
6
4
5
1
8
2
7
3
6
10
9
8
7
5
4
3
4
5
A1
33 33 33 33 33 33
16 15 14 13 12 11
33
1
3 B2
A2
B3
A3
B4
A4
B5
A5 A6
B6 B7
A7
B8
A8
4 5 6 7 8 9
RA9 RA9 RA10 RA10 RA10
3 4
5
1
8
2
7
3
6
DD[1]
4
5
RA10
33 33 33
RA14
D[5]
DD[2]
D[6]
DD[3]
D[7]
RA14 RA14
10
DD[5]
33
3
6
2
7
1
8
4
5
3 2 1
6 7 8
RA14
DD[4]
33
9
8
7
5
4
3
20
4 33
B2
A3
B3
19 18
6 B4
A4
33
7
33
17 A5
B5
A6
B6
A7
B7
16
8
33 33
A2 5
33
15
9 10
14 A8
33
11
B8
3
4
5
7
8
9
6
6
1
1
19 *G
+3.3V
C60
12
D[8]
1
6
D[9] RA7
D[10]
RA7
D[11]
RA7
D[12]
RA8
D[13]
RA8
D[14]
RA8
D[15]
RA8 9
8
7
5
8
2
7
3
6
4
5
RA18
DV[2] DV[3]
33
DV[4]
33
DV[6]
33
DV[7]
33
+5V
3
4
5
7
8
9
10
1
RA27
6
0
4
3
2
B1
33
2
7
3
6
GND
25V
4
5
1
8
2
7
3
6
4
5
33 33 33 33 33 33
16 15 14 13 12 11
B2
A2 A3
B4
A4 A5 A6
B7
A7
B8
A8
TC74VHC245FT
4 5 6 7 8 9
RA11 RA11 RA11 RA12 RA12 RA12 RA12
DD[8]
8
D[8]
1
33
2
7
3
6
4
5
1
8
2
7
3
6
4
5
33 33 33 33 33 33
DD[9]
D[9]
DD[10]
D[10]
DD[11]
D[11]
DD[12]
D[12]
DD[13]
D[13]
DD[14]
D[14]
DD[15]
D[15]
RA15 RA15 RA15 RA16 RA16 RA16
33
RA16 2
3
4
5
7
8
9
10
10
9
8
7
5
4
3
3
8
RA15
33
2
7
3
6
4
5
1
8
2
7
3
6
4
5
21
33 33 33 33 33 33 33
20 A2
B2
A3
B3
A4
B4
5
19
6
18 17
7
10K 6
1
1
6
16 A6
B6
9
15 A7
B7
10
14 A8
B8 GND
2
12
8
2
7
RA19 RA19
3
6
RA19 RA20 RA20 RA20 RA20
DV[8] 33
4
5
1
8
2
7
3
6
4
5
DV[9] 33
DV[10]
33
DV[11]
33
DV[12]
33
RA24
RA26
GND
DV[14]
33
DV[15]
33 2
3
4
5
7
8
9
10
13
10K GND 6
1
1
6
RA28
003:C3;005:B1;014:B4
DV[15-0]
GND
008:D4;014:C1
GND
Model DX-600 / 800
328
4
DV[13]
33
10K
DD[15-0]
GND
B5
A5 8
1 RA19
B1
A1 4
11
RA22
GND 23
NC
TC74LVXC3245FS 1 RA11
B3
B6
VCCB
IC19 *G
2
3
B5
0.1uF
*DIR(BA)
A1
17 33
24
VCCA
1
10K
Edition 1.0
3
DV[5]
33
2
C62
1
22
GND
2
18
8
RA7
TC74VHC245FT
10
5
1
33
13
25V
0.1uF
RA23
IC13
20 IC13
4
DV[1] 33
R501
*DIR[BA] 25V
RA18
6
GND
+3.3V
1
GND
0.1uF
RA18
0
GND
C54
RA18
7
3
10K
RA25
10
GND
4
RA17
2
10K
RA21
GND
RA17
10K 2
10K
10
RA17
DD[7]
33
GND
GND
33
GND
2
R500
VCCL
DV[0]
8
RA17
B1
A1
DD[6]
33
TC74VHC245FT
2
RA13
D[4]
7 6
RA13
D[3]
33
2 RA9
DD[0]
8
RA9
17
7
RA6
10
B1
33
2 RA5
2
RA13
D[2]
IC12 18
33
1
IMAGE FROM
*DIR[BA]
D[0]
21
3
5
Drawing Name SC PC Board (4/14)
APR 2002
DX-600/800
B
C
D
R159
for Intel Endian mode: Host UB ----- Modem LB Host LB ----- Modem UB
GND
3.3K
0
0 R487
0 R486
0 R485
R484
53 REGOUT2
AD[6]
93
DPA06/A06
MINTEST
46
AD[7]
94
DPA07/A07
INTEST
48
AD[8]
95
DPA08/A08
MODE0
49
AD[9]
96
DPA09/A09
MODE1
50
AD[10]
98
DPA10/A10
*RESET
41
AD[11]
100
DPA11/A11
IC22 MN195006
DD[8]
2
DPD00/D00
EYECLK
57
DD[9]
4
DPD01/D01
EYEDAT
58
DD[10]
6
DPD02/D02 59
ASPCLK
60
ATXD
63
DD[14]
12
DPD06/D06
ARXD
61
DD[15]
13
DPD07/D07
BBITCLK
65
DD[0]
14
DPD08/D08
BSPCLK
66
DD[1]
16
DPD09/D09
BTXD
69
DD[2]
18
DPD10/D10
BRXD
67
IC21 *G3
DD[3]
19
DPD11/D11
DD[4]
20
DPD12/D12
GPIO0/A12
76
A[0]
DD[5]
22
DPD13/D13
GPIO1/A13
DD[6]
24
DPD14/D14
GPIO2/A14
DD[7]
25
DPD15/D15
GPIO3/A15
81
GPIO4/A16
82
GPIO5/A17
83
14 MAGND
4
Z
BLM11A601S R172
VEE
-5VA
007:D1
C92
50V
TP1
nMDMRST 001:D3
1000pF
TP2
GND
EYE PATTERN MONITOR CHECK LAND ABITCLK
006:D2;007:D2
ASPCLK
006:D2;007:D2
ATXD
006:D2;007:D2
ARXD
006:D2;007:D2
+3.3V
TL21
R175
47K
77
R176
47K
79
R177
47K
*1
R178
47K
*1
R179
47K
3 nCOMRST 006:D2;007:D2 ID_0 ID_1
AFE_CLASS0 AFE_CLASS1
VSS
VSS
DAA I/F
NCU I/F
JP15
5
11
VSS
VSS
VSS
17
23
VSS
*1:table
#
#
JP16 R173 R178 R174
25V
R158 2
6.8K
0.022uF
2
R160 3
33K 6
R161 47K
5
+5V 0V
A +
7
R163
R164 1K
10K 1
+5V MAGND
0V -5V A class AMP
to Speaker B2B-PH-K-M C91 1
BA4558F
10k Q3
Q5 2SD1992A 340 1
IC20 -
3 DTC114EKA
+5V
3
1
16V 2 47uF
Q4 2SB1321A 340 2
CN9
pSPKOT
CN9
GND
4
25V
25V
:Mounted :Not Mounted 47K
#
0.1uF
220K
MAGND
1K
C93
C79
2200pF
C77
50V
R156
Gi:30min nBZHIGH
R180
R162
0V
0.047uF
001:A4
AFECLK
R179 3V -3V
10K
006:D2
GND
C78
4
*1
25V
MAGND
R155
2
DAACLK
24.576MHz
GND
0.1uF
pBZCLK
*1 0 0
GND
7 TC74HC4053AF
012:B4
50.0V 5pF GND
JP15
47K
# JP16
R165
Z1
C95
NF2
*1 *1
15
Y
24.576MHz
47K
X
2
9
52
REGOUT1
21
42
62
45
ABITCLK
Z0
C76
VDD2
VDD2
VDD2
VDD2
VDD2
86
VDD2
VDD3
97
3
15
VDD3
VDD3
30
44
VDD3
VDDREG
54
55
68
VDD3
VDDREG
AVDD
51
SCANNT
DPD05/D05
C
3
LON
DPA05/A05
DPD04/D04
Y1
5
DPA04/A04
91
DPD03/D03
Y0
9
001:D3 pMVOL2
90
AD[5]
8
B
1
CNT
AD[4]
7
X1
2
DPA03/A03
37
VSS
13
43
10
X0
10
CLKOUT
40
6.8K
MAGND 001:D3 pMVOL1
DPA02/A02
88
VSS
2.2K
12
87
AD[3]
VSS
2.2K
R154
AD[2]
100K
R151
38
50.0V 8pF
TL20
R157
R148
39
CXOUT
AVSS
11
001:D3 pMVOL0
CXIN
DPA01/A01
DD[13]
47K R152 001:A4 nMNTON
3
DPA00
85
DD[12]
MAGND
6
84
AD[1]
DD[11]
for Intel Endian mode: D-BUS Up Side Down
+3.3V MAGND
MAGND
28
47
C75
50V
1 1uF 2
R145
R142
GA
-3V
TDO
56
0V
100K
16 VCC IC21 GND TC74HC4053AF 8
C94
*UB
VSS
470K
AT-49-24.576MHz (7pF)
47K
71
35
R146
25V
2
3V
0.1uF
R150
47K
R171
TDI
VSS
R153
MA152A
+3.3VA
+5VA
1
MAGND
47K
2SC2412K Q1 560 1
2
2SC2412K Q2 560 1
C73
3
100K
MAGND
D4
3
R170
*LB
64
BA4558F
47K
47K
31 29
70
IC20
TCK
47K
R169
72
VSS
1
A
*DPWR/*WR
73
R168
TL19
X6 1
nLBE
33
47K
002:A3;003:A3
TMS
47K
nUBE
36
*DPRD/*RD
74
R174
002:A3;003:A3
27
PLLON
*DPCS/*CS
47K
0V
DBGMOD 75
47K
R173
nWR
+3.3V R167
R166
002:A3;003:A3
3
R144
+5VA
+
+5V
-5V
6800pF
3
nRDD
6.8K
1K
150K
2200pF
C65
2
R143
003:C3;004:C2;014:B4
R149
10V 1uF
100K 50V
0
MAGND
50V
R140
C70
C68 R513
nMODEM
26, 29, 31, 33-pins: for Emulation board JTAG I/F
26
T3IRQ/*IRQ
VSS
330K
-1.5V
nMDMINT
1
*DBGREQ
1
80
0V
GND
89
50V 100pF
001:A4 002:A2
25V 0.1uF 25V 0.1uF 25V 0.1uF 25V 0.1uF GND
34
0.1uF
DD[15-0]
16V 2
C87
C90
MAGND
R147
2
003:C3;004:C4;014:B4
47uF C86 1
C89
99
1.5V
AOUT
AD[15-1]
+1.8V
C88
VDD3
IC20 BA4558F
4 C74
C80 003:C3;004:C1;014:A4;014:C1
MAGND
C71
006:D3;007:C3
C82 C81
A
25V MAGND
MAGND
C83
-5VA
0.1uF
C72
C69
0.1uF
25V
16V 2 C67 1
0.1uF
C66
47uF
25V
1 2 47uF
C64
16V
8 V+
+5VA
V-
-5VA
R141
R139
+5VA
25V
10
10
1
16V 1 25V 0.1uF 25V 0.1uF 25V 0.1uF 25V 0.1uF 25V 0.1uF
78
47uF C85 2 C84
92
-5V
VDD3
+5V
R483
0
+3.3V
32
A
2
-5V GND
10k 1
#
Not Mounted
MAGND
Model DX-600 / 800
Edition 1.0
329
Drawing Name SC PC Board (5/14)
APR 2002
DX-600/800
B
C
#
33K
C107
250.0V 1800pF
#
50.0V 1000pF 250V 0.022uF
0
R217
47
SCLK
3
R218
47
VD
4
DCT
2
13
VA
IGND#
3
12
GND#
11
C1A
SDO
5
R219
47
10
M1
SDI
6
R220
47
FC/*RGDT
7
9
AOUT *RESET
R221
1K
VREG2
6
VREG
QB
7
QE
8
D10 5.6 2 1 MMSZ5232B D11
50V 0.1uF 50V 0.1uF C111
0.1W 10
D12
RNG2
R211
DE0807B151K-KH 250V # C121 150pF 250V # C120 150pF
#
8
4 IGND
1
C125
GND
005:D3;007:D2
ARXD
005:D3;007:D2
ATXD
005:D3;007:D2
2
nCOMRST 005:D3;007:D2
50V
AOUT
005:A2;007:C3
nCTON
002:D4
2200pF
JP17 0
Line side
005:D3;007:D2
ABITCLK
DSP side
C272
#
005:D2
ASPCLK
50.0V 2200pF
3
DAACLK
Si3021
C126
REF
10
DE0807B151K-KH C118 250V 150pF C119 250V 150pF #
0.1W 10
10.0V
11
R207
1uF
5
2
4
3 MA157A
C1B
1 D13 5.6 2 1 MMSZ5232B C123
REXT
REXT2 RNG1
50V 10pF
13 12
Si3015-KS
C109
R199
C101
JP28
2
C122
R200
M0 *FSYNC
2
10K
50V 0.68uF 215
QE2
50V 0.01uF 50V 0.01uF
RX
1
*RGDT/FSD
C114
FILT
14
*OFHK MCLK
14
C113
15
IC24 16 15
+3.3V
50.0V 1000pF 50.0V 1000pF
78.7 402 1%
R197
R196
50V 1800pF 50V 1800pF C100
K PTZ43A 150 A
R194
#
GND #
C98
C271
16V 0.22uF C110
50V 0.1uF
FILT2
002:D2;007:C3
+3.3V
1
C270
C102
16
PLSD (nPLSD)
+5V
1
GND
2.2K
IC23
#
C269
100
C103 Q7 2SC3588
R503
150pF
3 MA157A
0.1W
R195
50V 1uF
100 R189
#
C108
R198
50V 1000pF C267
2 R184
250mW 1% 250mW 1% 4.87K 250mW 1% 4.87K
4.87K
1
2
3
MA152A 3 D31 1
Q9 2SD2136-R
3 R187
3
100
1
1
MA157A
2
Not Mounted
DE0807B151K-KH C116 250V 150pF 250V # C117
25.0V
5
R188
1
+3.3V
0.1uF
CN18
C268
N.C. (No Pin)
4
R206
9
D9
CN18
DE1007E222M-KH C273 2200pF DE1007E222M-KH C274 2200pF
N.C. (No Pin)
Not Mounted
2.2K
2
D24 3
K D8
1SR154-400 C99 50V 0.01uF R183 120K
A
A
1SR154-400
K
D6 C97
R182
#
0.1W 10
DSSA-P3100SB 3
100K
1 A D7
1SR154-400
K
K
1SR154-400
R79
#
250mW 1% 4.87K R185 250mW 1% 4.87K R186 250mW 1% 4.87K
CN18
0.022uF
Q6 2SA1400K
CN18
L1(R)
250V
TL36
N.C. (No Pin)
C266
# VA1
2
1000pF
2
CN18
#
1
10M
L2(T)
#
A
R181
to MJR PCB
C96
D5
10M
1000pF
4
2
Q8 2SC3588
R205
B8(11-C1)B-PH-K-S
15K
#
R204
#
R203
0
33K
R193
250V 1000pF
R505
R192
C106
2 22uF 1 C128 50V 1000pF
#
Not mounted the parts of this circuit as for S3000i.
10.0V 1uF 16V
#
1
15K
C127
Not Mounted
R202
47K
250V 1000pF
R504
C105
DAA Circuit
50V
250.0V 1800pF
1000pF
#
C104
C265
33K
250V
33K
R191
D
1000pF
R190
C112
A
3 +24V
+5VP
CN18
GND
CN18
6
+3.3V
+5VP 7
*4:Mounted as for S3000i.
8
10K
CN18
R208
+24V
3
GND
R209
2
pCTON
DTC114EKA
1000pF
pCTON
CN18
10
Q10 10k
GND
1
Gi:30min
*4
+3.3V
R213
GND
007:C3
pHKOF
*4 *5
50V
2.2K GND
3 2
10k DTC114EKA
11
22K
CN18
R210
pHKOF
R201
4
22K
Q11 10k 1
Gi:30min
*5
002:D2
nWAKUP
012:B3
4
GND
*4 *5
nHKOF +5VP
10K
007:C3
3 10k
R215
002:D2;007:C3
1000pF
50.0V
2.2K
*4 pCMLD
C124
C264
100
10K
R502
R212
9
50V
CN18
C115
pCMLD
1000pF
GND
3
GND 2
2SC2412K Q12 560 1
* :Mounted when having the function, the hook-off detection of the handset in the saving energy mode.
R214 22K
GND
Model DX-600 / 800
Edition 1.0
330
Drawing Name SC PC Board (6/14)
APR 2002
DX-600/800
A
B
C
D
16.0V
+3.3VA
7
B +
C140
10V
V11
6
R242
3.3
5
4.3K
31
7
C +
27
IC26 LMV324MT
28
R249 22K 13
R248
MAGND
22K 12
MAGND
-
30
14
C +
29
10 2
AVDD
1 11 12 13 14 22 23 24 NC
NC
5
MCM
AUXIN-
XTALOUT XTALIN/MCLK
IN+ IN-
SCLK
IC27
FS DIN
STLC7550TQF7
DOUT
+
R245
+5VA
MAGND
C138
25.0V
0.1uF B C139
8 V+ V-
2% 10K
VCM
VCM
0.1uF -5VA
MAGND
20
pHSDT
CN8
pEAKD
CN8
pPLSD
CN8
pTCKD
CN8
pCMLD
CN8
2 4
R224
5 C130
7
100
50.0V
6
100
50.0V
21
6
0
R257
0
45
R258
0
15
2012
CN17
pATELDC
CN17
pBTEL
CN17
pBTELDC
CN17
pBRING
CN17
2
R234
1K
3
R235
1K
4
R236
1K
5
R237
1K
R238
1K
R239
1K
6
005:D3;006:D2
ASPCLK
005:D3;006:D2
ATXD
005:D3;006:D2
ARXD
005:D3;006:D2
16 42 18 43
TL23
41
GND
R259
17
NC
37 38 46 47 48
#
nCOMRST 005:D3;006:D2
1K
2
GND
#
Not Mounted
# JP18
AOUT
005:A2;006:D3
GND
pCTON
006:B4
pHKOF
006:B4
PLSD
002:D2;006:D1
pCMLD
002:D2;006:B4
3
pATEL
008:D2
pATELDC
008:D3
pBTEL
008:D3
pBTELDC
008:D3
pBRING
001:D3
nLTCK
001:D1
nREVCK
001:D1
+3.3V
9
50.0V
0.22uF
C133
0.1uF
#
R232 nLTCK
C142 R233
CN17
+5V
CN17
#:Not Mounted
GND
CN17
560K 1K
C143 1
9
50.0V
1000pF R240
8 +5V
GND
560K
7
2012 nREVCK
11
CN17
MAGND
50.0V
4
1000pF GND
NCU Interface Circuit Mounted the parts of this circuit,only S3000i. (excluded C155,C156,R252,R253)
GND
Model DX-600 / 800
Edition 1.0
ABITCLK
52806-0920
25.0V
CN8
0.22uF
50.0V AGND
C132
#
3 25.0V
CN8
33
R256
44
005:D2
to NCU PCB (for Japan)
pATEL
1
C129
4
GND
AGND2 AGND1 DGND
4
AFECLK
(pPLSD) R225
C131
+5VP CN8
NC
0
1000pF
+24V
+5VP
*PWRDWN
R255
8
GND
CN8
*RESET
VCM
3
13
1000pF
+24V
VREFN
TL22
0.1uF
CN8
TSTD1
VREFP
9
JP24
C136
3
pHKOF
TS M/*S
7 8
0
0 CN8
OUT-
MAGND
AOUT
pCTON
32
HC0
25 26 34 35 36
IC25 BA4558F
4
25.0V
0.01uF
50.0V
3
10K
C
HC1
OUT+
0.1uF
IC26 LMV324MT
2%
40
22.0uF C153 16.0V 1 2 C154 25.0V
1
10V
0.22uF
39
0.1uF
C141
C147
2% 10K
C150 16.0V 2 1 22.0uF
+
R231
3
2%
19
22.0uF C151 16.0V 2 1 C152 25.0V
IC25 BA4558F
2
2%
10K 10K
0.1uF C149 25.0V
B
R244
2%
-
1
2% 560
2
10K
R223
-
R251
R246
TX
2
C144 2% 62K
25.0V
0
1
DVDD
AUXIN+
IC26 LMV324MT
R250
C145
R226
2% 10K 25.0V 560pF
560pF
R241 50.0V 390pF R228
25.0V
0.1uF C158 16.0V 1 2 22.0uF
VCM
C134
C157
Mounted
MAGND -
VCM
R229
IC26 LMV324MT
27K 47K
0.22uF
IC25 BA4558F
VCM
C
25.0V
0.1uF C156 16.0V 2 1 22.0uF
47K
-
R253 C155
4 V+
R243
1
10K
+3.3VA
47K
5
R227
50.0V 1000pF
3.3
R261
10K
# C146
+3.3V R252
R260
CN8
10K
MAGND
D14
HYBSR
6
R222
2
R230 RX 10
+3.3VA
IC26 LMV324MT
50.0V
50.0V 2200pF
3 MA157A
C135
+
R247
1
1
C
10
D15
0.1uF
1000pF
C137
C159
12
8
0.1uF C148 25.0V
CN8
-
100K
HYSIG
+3.3V
9
1.8
52806-1320
R254
2
to NCU PCB
3 MA157A
+3.3VA
331
Drawing Name SC PC Board (7/14)
APR 2002
DX-600/800
A
B
C
D
CCD I/F B8B-PH-K-M
LMD[7]
FETD2
AGUR2
*VSDA
23
LMA[12]
2
109
LMA[13]
26
108
LMA[14]
1
A8
I/O4
A9
I/O5
A10
I/O6
A11
I/O7
A12
I/O8
A13 A14
GND
4 116
R291
100K
R297
100K
10K
10K
10K
10K
10K
10K
10K
25V
10K 0.1uF
LMD[0]
LMD[3] LMD[4]
17
LMD[5]
18
LMD[6]
19
LMD[7]
2
14 #:Not Mounted GND
R292
100K
R293
100K
121 9
R298
100K
R299
100K
R300
100K
7 6 R294
100K
R295
100K
119
007:C3
pATELDC
007:C3
pBTEL
007:C4
pBTELDC
007:C4
pBATCHK
012:B1
+5V R303
8
5
pATEL
R301
100K
R302
100K
100K
pADF2
012:B4
PNLDIR
012:B2
nVSDA
002:A4
nVSCK
002:A4
nVSEN
002:A4
3
GND
MCLKV
VSCD[7]
VSCD[6]
VSCD[5]
VSCD[4]
VSCD[3]
DV[7]
DV[6]
DV[5]
DV[4]
DV[3]
DV[2]
DV[1]
DV[0]
VSCD[0] 004:D1
AV[2]
nSYNC
VSCD[2]
JW52 VSCD[1]
+5V
2
nFRPRSTV
R289 1K
C177
50V
004:D1
nVREQV
004:D1
VSCD[7-0]
002:A4
DV[15-0]
004:D4;014:C1
AV[2-1]
004:D1
pLEDON
002:D1
nFRIPV
004:D1
nWLV
004:D1;014:C3
nRDV
004:D1;014:C3
4
GND
MGND
#:Not Mounted
Model DX-600 / 800
Edition 1.0
#
100K
123
118
#
LMD[2]
124
LBP7
#
16
125
120
#
LMD[1]
126
10
#
15
127
122
#
100K
115 114
R296
#
13
+5V
TL31 R290
#
12
106 98
R311
LMA[11]
GND
I/O3
R310
21
A7
R309
LMA[10]
I/O2
R308
24
A6
11
R307
LMA[9]
I/O1
R306
LMA[8]
TL30
A5
R305
3 25
A4
R304
LMA[7]
A2 A3
51
*VSCK
*VSEN
50
*VREQ
49
47
VSCD7
VSCD6
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
69
70
71
72
73
VSCD5
LBP6
MAST
VSCD4
NCO
100
*WE CY7C199L-15VC A0 IC31 A1
C178
LMA[13]
LMA[12]
LMA[11]
LMA[10]
LMA[9]
LMA[8]
LMA[7]
LMA[6]
LMA[5]
LMA[14] 105
LMA13 LMA14
2
LMA12
102
103
LMA11
LMA10
104
LMA9
96
97
LMA8
LMA7
88
LMA6
LBP5 VSCD3
LBP4
DVSS
6
*OE
1000pF
1 3
10K
2SD592A Q14 340 1
10K
LMA[4]
DVSS
MACK
002:A4
Q16 Gi:30min
2
89
LBP3
LMA[4]
+5V
VCC
R270
50V #
C163
50V
#
0.22uF
4
90
DVDD
AV[1]
R276
10K DTC114EKA
LMA5
LBP2
VSCD2
LBP1
DVDD
JW50 002:A4
3
2
C162
CN1
91
AVSS
VSCD1
LBP0
VSCD0
AVDD
D7
LAP7
D6
*DACK
D5
LAP6
D4
LAP5
OFOUT2
D3
OFHC2
D2
LAP4
7
107
LAP3
VINIG2
8
LMA[3]
5
111
LAP2
FRIP5
AGDR2
#:Not Mounted
1K
+24V 1
0.22uF
nLEDON
CN1
LMA4
LAP1
LMA[2]
*CS
AGND
GND
B2B-PH-K-M
LMA3
LAP0
AGOUT2
9
4
110
LRA11
FETG2
10
LMA[1]
LMA[6]
112
LRA12
+5V
+24V
92
94
93
LMA2
LMA1
LMA0
MN86075 L-mode
FETS2
0 -5VC
to LED ARRAY
LMA[3]
LMA[2]
LMA[1]
LMD[6]
LMD[5]
LMD[4]
LMD[3]
LMA[0] 95
LMXD7
11
12
LMXD6
LMXD5
13
LMXD4
14
15
LMXD3
LMXD2
16
TL29 LMXD1
79
17
18
SENTIM
LMXD0
TL28 81
84
80
FR2
FR1
FSG
FCK2
TL26
TL27 82
83
FCK1
43
LRA10
LMA[0]
LMA[5]
113
*LROE *LRWE
VREFL
3 -5V
AGND
44
MN86075
ADIN2
D1
87
ADIN1
74
1
25V
100
0.1uF
117 100K
IC30
# JP8
R275
25V
22
99 101
LSID7
VREFH
MACK
V-
R286 0.1uF
IC28 LM6172IM
2
8 V+ 4
C165
1
+5V
C173
0.1uF
25V
22
D
65
AGND
LSID6
D0
R274
C164
64 128
FETS1
75
33
+5VC
22uF C172 16V
+5V
LSID5
76
10
LSID4
FETD1
A1
30
R281
FETG1
67
MA724
48
+5VF
3
DA1
2
21 +5V
LSID3
A0
23
AGOUT1
*CS
24
AGND
0.1uF
LSID2
*WR
25
AGND
AGUR1
68
26
# 25V
LSID1
63
27
AGDR1
61
29
22
3
LMD[2]
JW51 28
LSID0
*RD
25V
35
VINIG1
62
31
*LMCE
80/68
36
OFHC1
*RESET
R267
AGND
28 20
OFOUT1
*MCLKI
330
IC28 LM6172IM
C170
+5V
GND
*LMOE *LMWE
60
#
38
32
C176
3.9K
100
R265
220K
R278
1.5K
2
7
D +
2.2K
R287
34
-
5
R269
1
#
37
220K
D -
40
150K
AGND
R283
+
3
22K
41
1
1K
6
150K
39
C175 16V 2 1 22uF
DA1
R263
42 R285
AGND
4
8
R277
AGND
LM6172IM IC28
50.0V 100pF
R273
CN7
1K
C168
MA724
3.9K CN7
#
50.0V 2200pF
R271
R264 DOS OS
1K
C166
TL25
50V 1 R284
#
R262
20
ABC
77
C174 2
46 19
1uF
-5V
2
TL24
*SYNC
1
78
Q17
*PEAK2
2.7K R280
R266
10K
R268
AGND
2SC2412K
MCM1
2
85
10K
R279
3
66
25V
+5VF +5VF
45
R272
Q13 560 1
LMA[0-14]
27
CLAMP
2
2SC2412K
+5V
1K
AGND
LMD[1]
GND 2
Q15 560 1
3
7
002:D1
LMD[0-7] IC29 TC7SET08FU
LMD[0]
0.1uF C169
1uF
3
5 VDD
3 2SC2412K
5
10K
CN7
+5V
GND
0.1uF
AGND
BLM21P300S
C167
C160
25V
NF3
25V
6 0.1uF C161 10V
CN7
002:D1
FR
1 +5V
+5V
RS
+5V
*PEAK1
JW80
MCM0
2
TC7SET08FU
86
CN7
JW79
2
680
CN7
FCK1
JW49
3
+3.3V
1
IC29
R288
FCK2
4
4
0.1uF
CN7
JW48
0.1uF
FSG
1
25V
CN7
C171
1
FR
332
Drawing Name SC PC Board (8/14)
APR 2002
DX-600/800
A
B
C
1
#
D
Not Mounted
JP9
+24V
1
0.1W
+24VM
0
173981-5 5
NF5
10K
A C192
SAS-101KD07
47K
001:A3
1
25V 0.1uF
C187
1
GND
#
4
LSU I/F
IC34 TC7SET04FU
L+5V
3
B7B-PH-K-S 3
2
pVDO
+24V
V-
1
6
2
CN68
nVIDEO
CN68
nLDON
3
4.7K
D16
1
IC33
IC32 BA10393F
5 VCC GND
100
2 TC7SH14FU
IC35 TC7SH14FU
1 GND
DTC143ZKA
GND 002:D4
pS_H
2
3
4 MGND
laser
R328
4 +3.3V 25V
3
GND
IC35
002:D4 pHSYNC
CN68
nHSYNC
CN68
nS/H
CN68
GND
CN68
GND
50V
2 TA78M05F OUT GND
0.1uF
2.0W
IN
0.1uF
1
1
2.0W
47K
SCHMITT INVERTER for Jitter-Free Output
25V
82
L+5V
2
82
3
C186
R322
82
MA152A
22uF C185 16V
R321
2.0W
C190
1 R320
1
S Q20 2SJ327-Z
R330
+24VM
35V
G
3
+5V
47K
100pF
10uF
25V
2
pLDON
C188
E
002:D4
C184
50V C182
2012
0.22uF
C181 50V
GND
8 V+
0.22uF
2012
L+5V
Q23
D
+24V
R314 GND
NF4
5 DTC143ZKA
22uF
33K
+24VM: High Voltage Power Supply Main Motor Paper Clutch LSU
2
+
R315
IC32 BA10393F
CN68
BLM11A601S
2
33K 1
E
C183
-
3.3K
R312
10K
3
R318
pMPOW
1
NC
47K R313 002:D2
4 1 IC34 TC7SET04FU
2
MGND
2
GND 002:D4
3
CN69
GND
GND GND
nPMCK
MGND
+5V 5 VCC
#
#
to CPU P73 (5V Pressure Proof)
10K
10K
3 DTC114EKA Q18
+24LVL
1K
CN69
polygon
1000pF
Q22 R325
1 A K RD8.2S C193 50.0V
VA2 4.7K
2
pPMCK
3 VA3
002:D4 R319 47K
2
DTC143ZKA
560.0
R324
+5V
GND
100pF
GND
3
nPMRY
+5V #
SAS-101KD07 D18
2 2012
CN69
2012
2
50V
GND
nPMON
#
100
1 Q19 2SA1037AK
CN69
2012
R326
nPMRY
C189
10K
2012
R323
#
C180
50V
#
R316
2
D17
47K 002:D4
#
R327
1.0W 2.7K
GND
GND
INTERLOCK SW (DOOR SENSOR)
50V
47K
0.22uF
+3.3V
0.22uF
4.7K
K
2
Q21
R516
2.7K
1.0W 2.7K
R514
3
33K
CN57
+24VD
(No Pin)
R317
+24VD
2
50V
CN57
1
0.22uF
N.C.
1
C179
CN57
0.22uF
+24V
pPMON
1 1.0W
+24V
002:D4
560.0 3
DTC114EKA Q51
R515
2
to ILS PCB B2(3)B-PH-K-S
2
C191
22K 3
+24VM
#
50V
R506 +5V
1 Q52 2SA1037AK
3 RD30S
R507
3 DTC143ZKA
CN69
BL02RN1-R62
#
2
3
4.7K Q24 4
47K
7
1
GND
GND
4
GND
4
#:Not Mounted
Model DX-600 / 800
Edition 1.0
333
Drawing Name SC PC Board (9/14)
APR 2002
DX-600/800
A
B
C
D
+24V
#:Not Mounted
F0805B1R50FW
1
D19
A
F1
+5V
K
1
SFPB54
+3.3V
750mA
*ST: Mounted with the stamp function.
1
Gi:30min
0.68
10K
5 12 13
400mA
GND
GND
ON
#
#
8
ON
N.C.
CN3
nSTANPON
0.22uF 2012
2
2012
ON ON
ON
C210
50V 2SD874A Q35 340 3
R386
*ST ON
*ST
2 1
ON
7
3
50V
R384
4
*ST
CN3
*ST
2SC2412K Q32 560 1
47uF
R375
3
6
R353
10k
2 ON
5
1K
R365
2
680
DTC114EKA Q26
1 ON
4
10
10k
2
DBT1R
4
ON
16
SENSR
COMPI PLSTM GND
I1
3
250mW
470
I0
1
R369
R344
PHASE
ON
GND
ON
The rotation direction is CW, as seen from the mounted surface side
R371
7
2
25V 820pF
9
1K
OB
1
15
25V 820pF
1K
R338
3 002:A4
R352
1K
R337
OA
step
14
C199
IOBR1
8
R336
REF IC37
2
4
3
C201
150 002:A4
10K
10K IOBR0
R348
PHBR
002:A4
R346
002:A4
VA
3
16V 2
+24V
0.22uF
4.7K
*ST
VB VCC
2
C211
R378
002:D2 pSTAMP
TEA3718SDP 6
*ST C209 1
*ST
3
2012
2
11
*ST
TM
+3.3V
2
*ST
R385
R372
1
CN3
K
2)
+5V
D22
MTpB (
F0805B0R75FW
A
CN5
B3B-PH-K-S 1
F2
1SR154-400
4)
250mW
1)
MTnB (
150
3)
MTpA (
CN5
10K
100K
MTnA (
CN5
*ST
47K
50V
0.22uF
1
500mA
2012 0.22uF
0.68
C203 2
680
Gi:30min
2
CN5
to Stamp
*ST *FN
+24V
47K
1
C204
10k
R351
Q25
10K
10K
DTC114EKA
47uF C202 35V
2
5 12 13
4
1K
R364
50V
10
COMPI PLSTM GND
I1
1
10k
2
DAT1R
I0
470
3 002:A4
R350
7 R343
4
16
250mW
1K
1
R368
R335
9
SENSR
R370
1K
REF OA IC36 OB PHASE
3
25V 820pF
IOAR1
R334
8
15
25V 820pF
IOAR0
002:A4
1K
B4B-PH-K-S
14
VA
C200
002:A4
R333
to TX MOTOR
3
VB VCC
C198
PHAR
11
R347
002:A4
R345
10K
150
TEA3718SDP 6
JP10
0.1W 0
MGND
+3.3V
+5V +24VM
4) 001:A3
4.7K
3
16V 2
2
47uF
1
47K
1W
R376
R367
R366
MGND 1
2SC2412K Q33 560 1
3
2 1
MM
COM MGND
C208 1
R377
pADF1
50V
(
GND
2SD874A Q36 340 3
nADF1
#
#
2012
2012
4
MGND
2 COM
4
MGND
MGND step 1
MGND
#:Not Mounted
1
2
ON
ON
2
ON
3 4
Edition 1.0
CN56
0.22uF
MMnB
C212
CN54
500mA
50V
2)
K
(
D23
MMpB
1SR154-400
CN54
2
+24VM
A
3)
250mW
1)
(
220
(
MMnA
CN56
0.22uF
6
MMpA
CN54
300mA
C213
15
CN54
R387
0.22uF
47K
1 C206
4
MA152A
REFB OUT*B GA GB
3
(Com)
1
OUTB
1
2012
6
(Com)
+24VM
47K
RSB
1 10
+24VM
CN54
B2B-PH-K-S 1
10K
2SC2412K Q28 560.0 1
OUTA OUT*A
CN54
+24VM
R388
4.7K
RSA REFA
5
4 12
82
R342
13
IC38
2
R359
MMP3
R357
002:D4
150
3 2
9
1W
R358 MGND
2.2K
3
50V 2200pF
1
50V 470pF 50V 470pF
MGND
2.2K C196
R363
100mW
4.7K
R362
7
50V 2200pF
C197 +5V
470
MMP1
C194
002:D4
2SC2412K Q27 560.0 1
C195
3 2
R340
TDA TDB
+5V
B6B-PH-K-S
D21
11
INB
to Paper Clutch to MAIN MOTOR
2012
3
2
8 VS
R381
14
INA
R374
50V
47K R355
47K R354
47K
47K
47K R341
R339
5
0.22uF
MMP2
SMA7029M(LF1060)
50V
002:D4
3
K
SFPB54
2
MMP0
D20
47uF C205 35V
002:D4
R332
R331
47K
A
C207
3
4
GND
3
4
ON ON
ON
ON ON
334
Model
Drawing Name
DX-600 / 800
SC PC Board (10/14)
APR 2002
DX-600/800
A
B
C
D
1
1 B5B-PH-K-S
High Voltage Power Supply I/F
3 4.7K
C215
DTC143ZKA Q40
1
4.7K
1
50V C230
3 4
1
22uF 16V
3
3.3K
C214
4
R402
DTC143ZKA Q44 47k 1
GA
3 DTC114EKA Q47 Gi:30min
10k 1
GND
GND
220K R399
012:B3
nPWSAVE
2
DTC114EKA
3 2
Q45 Gi:30min
10k
2SC2412K Q43 560 1
1
GND
220K
2SC2412K Q42 560 1
10k
3 001:D3
nPWOFF
2
10k DTC114EKA Q46 Gi:30min
10k 1 GND
Edition 1.0
nMPOFF
10k
10K
1
16V
4.7K
R400
100
CN6
3
2
R395
nSSR
3 2
R403
47uF
7
-
GND
50V
2
CN6
GND
6.8K
1
D25
E
+3.3V
GND
0.01uF
CN52
-5V
2
0.1uF
6
2
IC32
+
3 TH2
GND
CN6
22K
R401
10K
5
GND
0.1uF
C276
#
3
R398
3
1 16.0V
CN52
10
BA10393F
16.0V
2 MA153A
B2B-PH-K-S TH1
C275
+3.3V
Thermistor I/F
R397
1K
GND
+5VP
C222
MA152A 1
D26
+3.3V
R396
CN6
25V
8 11
10K R394
THERM
GND
0.1uF
C226
-5V
2
pSSRA
C225
AGND
+3.3V
001:A3
GND
CN6
0 5
3
CN6
2
JP14
GND 002:D4
+5V
0.22uF
C229 50V
0.1W 0
#
GND
Gi:50min
CN6
25V
JP13
DTC143ZKA Q41 47k
+3.3V
0.1uF
C223
2
7
C227
nDRCK
25V
CN53
3
0.1uF
2
Low:10mA Max
CN6
25V
BL02RN1-R62
C224
Development
+5VP
0.22uF
0.22uF
1
+5V
NF8
GND
CN6
Low Voltage Power Supply I/F
25V
0
Gi:50min
DRCK
9
6
0.1W
#
1
1
+24V
2012
BL02RN1-R62
JP12
22uF 16V
2
pCR0
47k
002:D4
nCRCK
+24V
CN6
2012
NF7 CN53
CN6
0.1uF
Low:10mA Max
GND
2
3
#
C228
Electrification
2012
2
0.1uF
+3.3V
Gi:50min
#
2
1
2
22uF 16V
DTC143ZKA Q39
C217
pCR1
4.7K
1
2
47k
001:D3
+5VP
nCR1
CN53
0
#
25V
001:D3
4
Low:10mA Max 3
C218
Electrification GND
C221
Gi:50min
0.1W
2012
0.1uF
1
C216
47k
50V
DTC143ZKA Q38
22uF 16V
pTR0
4.7K
2
001:D3
2
C219
3
50V
nTR0
CN53
1
NF6 JP11
0.22uF
Low:10mA Max
+24VM
CN53
BL02RN1-R62
C220
5
22uF 35V
1 Transcription
B11B-PH-K-S
+24V
2
+24VM
4 #:Not Mounted
GND
335
Model
Drawing Name
DX-600 / 800
SC PC Board (11/14)
APR 2002
DX-600/800
A
B
C
D
1
1
+3.3V
001:A3
1
R419
100 nCCHK1
001:A3
(Casette Check Sensor) 3
R420
nRSEN
001:A3
(Resist Sensor) 008:D3 6
R421
100
CN58
nESEN
560.0
2
25V
CN14
100
25V
*1
A1
100
R468
100
4
47K
5
47K
470
470 R409
R408
R455
47K
6
R456
47K
7
R457
47K
8
R458
47K
9
*1 *1
R414
R422
100
R423
100
nPCHK1
001:A3
TONER
001:A3
47K
*1
(Toner Sensor) 50V
50V
CN59
B3 B4
A5
B5
A6
B6
A7
B7
A8
B8
GND
47K
R461
47K
CN4
pPNLCK
CN4
pPNLSD
CN4
pPNLRD
100pF
*1
*1
*1
14
R462
47K
13
R463
47K
12
R464
47K
11
R465
47K
GND
+5V
*1 *1 *1 *1 *1
5 VDD GND
IC39 8
TC7SET08FU
3
GND
IC39
GND 4
R433
5
100
2
CN14
pPNLSD
PNLTXD
7 C245 TC7SET08FU
50V 100pF
+5V 47K
GND
C235
C232
R460
15
1
R429 GND
16
50V
+3.3V
100pF
3
100pF
001:D4
B2
A4
47K
TC74VHCT245AFT
R428
(Paper Check Sensor)
A2 A3
R459
25V
47K
R454
17
0.1uF
R453
*1
+3.3V
4
GND
3
*1
1
CN59
47K
*1
2
CN59
R452 *1 +3.3V
CN59
TONER
GND
B1
C239
CN59
nPCHK1
CN4
5
*1
R467
18
2
PNLCLK
+5V 5
LDSP1
GND
2
GND
C261 +5V
GND
4
*1 R469
GND
CN14
*DIR[BA] IC41
001:D4
CN14 4
*G 1
B5B-PH-K-M
CN4
1
*1
GND
(NO PAPER SENSOR)
0.1uF
25V +5V
10
47K
PNLDIR
+5VP
TC74VHCT245AFT
R466
pRESET
008:D3
0.1uF
GND
C244
GND
IC41
19 004:D2
CN4
+5VP 3
VCC
GND
to SNS3 PCB
+5V
3
*1
2
CN4 JW54
20 0.1uF
C260
50V
100pF
C237
50V
50V
100pF
C231
GND
100pF
*1
2
+5V
+5VP 1
C234
CN58
CN14
Q48
4 CN58
1
2 DTC114EKA
10k
+5V
GND
B11B-PH-K-M
+5V JW53
001:A3
(Exit Sensor)
N.C.
PNL I/F
3 10k
2
GND
pBATCHK
*2
*1
C243
nESEN
330K *BT
*1
100
CN58
R432 330K
*BT
*BT *1
nRSEN
BATLVL
Mounted when the Battery is used.
2
220K
R431
R427
R416
CN58
R413
nCCHK1
CN4 *BT:
*1 R410
CN58
B13B-PH-K-M
1
*BT
5 +5V
3
BATIN
+5V
PNL I/F (for S3000i)
*2:Not Mounted as for S3000i.
Q49
2SA1037AK
*1
47K
47K
B6B-PH-K-M
47K
*BT (PAPER EXIT SENSOR)
*1
*1:Mounted as for S3000i.
to SNS4 PCB
R437 001:D4
6
100
PNLRXD
CN14
pPNLRD 6
+5VP
C240 R430
3
50V 100pF
22K
3
GND
R438 011:C4
CN14
nPWSAVE 12
C241
2nd Casette I/F
+3.3V
B7B-PH-K-M
50V
47K
47K
47K
R434 006:D4
CN14
CN4
pPNLRST
9 C246
50V 100pF
R418
R415
R411
CN66
nWAKUP
nWAKUP
+5V
nPCHK2
CN4
8
100
nWAKUP
3 CN66
nPWSAVE
GND
CN66
+5V
CN4
100pF
+24VM 1
+24VM
7
100
nPWSAVE
Option
4
R424
100
6
R425
100
R435 nPCHK2
001:A3
001:D3
100
R439
100
9
pPNLRST
CN14
pPNLRST 11
C247 nCCHK2
CN66
pADF2
CN66
5
R426
nCCHK2
001:A3
pADF2
008:D3
50V 100pF
100
GND R436 005:B4
10
220
pBZCLK
CN14
pBZCLK
7
10 001:A3
CN4
100pF
50V
50V
50V C238
GND
100pF
CN66
C236
GND
C233
2
100pF
nOP
47K
CN66
R412
nOP
pBZCLK
+3.3V
001:A4;002:D4
nBPNT
R440
47K
R441
100
11 CN14
nBPNT 13
C242
50V
CN4
nBPNT
100pF
4 GND
4
GND GND
Edition 1.0
336
Model
Drawing Name
DX-600 / 800
SC PC Board (12/14)
APR 2002
DX-600/800
A
B
+3.3V side
C250
JW55
C251
C252
25V 0.1uF
25V 0.1uF
C253
25V 0.1uF
002:D3
pSELECT
002:D3
nFAULT
002:D3
pBUSY
002:D3
nACK
002:D3
pPERR
002:D4
nINIT
002:D3
nSTRBE
002:D3
nAUTFD
002:D3
nSELIN
DATA[1]
8
DATA[2]
9
DATA[3]
11
DATA[4]
12
DATA[5]
13
DATA[6]
14
DATA[7]
16
DATA[8]
17
DIR
*2
A1
4 5 6 20 21 22 23 19
+5V
24
40 38
A4
B4
37
A5
B5
36
A6
B6
35
A7
B7
33
B8
32
A9
Y9
47
A10
Y10
46
A11
Y11
45
A12
Y12
44
A13
Y13
43
A14
C14
29
R443
100
A15
C15
28
R444
100
A16
C16
27
A17
C17
26
PLHin
PLH
30
HLHin
25
IC40
2
2 JW67
3 4
JW57 JW68
5 6
JW58
7
JW69 JW59
8 JW70
9
JW60
13 32
JW71
11
JW61 JW72
10 12
JW62 JW73
31 1
JW63 JW74
14 36
JW64
18
GND
#
GND C254
39 34 15 10
1
R41-2181C JW56
B3
HLH
TL32
41
B2
A8
3
B1
GND
A3
A2
2
1
Centronics i/f Centronics Connector
+5V
HD
*2:Not Mounted as for S3000i.
+5V side
50V 100pF 50V 100pF
48
pBUSOUT
VCC VCC
1
D
*1:Mounted as for S3000i.
42 31 18 7
74LVX161284MTD 002:D3
25V 0.1uF
DATA[8-1]
VCC-cable VCC-cable
002:D3
+5V
JW75
C255
+3.3V
C
GND GND
15 D27
33
1
20
2
19
3
18
4
17
5
16
6
15
7
14
34 35 JP22 JP23
17
0
FG
20 21 22 23 24
11
10
16 19
12
9
25 26
74F1071MTC
27 28 29
GND
DATA1
CN91
DATA2
CN91
DATA3
CN91
DATA4
CN91
DATA5
CN91
DATA6
CN91
DATA7
CN91
DATA8
CN91
pSLCT
CN91
nFAULT
CN91
pBUSY
CN91
nACK
CN91
pPE
CN91
nINT
CN91
nSTB
CN91
nAFTX
CN91
nSELIN
CN91
PLH
CN91
NC NC
CN91 CN91
NC
CN91
NC
CN91
FG
CN91
GND
CN91
GND
CN91
GND
CN91
GND
CN91
GND
CN91
GND
CN91
GND
CN91
GND
CN91
GND
CN91
GND
CN91
GND
CN91
GND
CN91
GND
2
0
13
8
CN91
30
#:Not Mounted GND
3
3 *1
Printer Terminal Board i/f to PRTA PCB
+3.3V
001:D3
R445
USBENB
2SK680A Q50 1
3 22K
52806-2220
USB i/f
2
22 20
USB Connector
18
67068-0001
002:A1
1
R451
SCANENB
15K
DP
27
NF9
4 1%
8
0.1uF
25V C259
2
10 1 19
3 2
CN92
4
D+
6 2
3 2
CN92
17
D-
21
2 NNCD6.2MF
1 6.2
3
#
D28
5pF
50.0V
5pF
50.0V
#
12
VBUS
PLP3216S121SL2
27
C256
4
DM
C257
002:A1
R447
14
CN92
1 1
22uF 16V
0
C258
# JP19
R450
1%
R448
R446
33K
1.5K
002:A3
16
#
0 JP20
3 7 5 4
JP21
CN92
9
GND
11
0 GND
FG
13 GND
15
Not Mounted
CN94
DATA1
CN94
DATA2
CN94
DATA3
CN94
DATA4
CN94
DATA5
CN94
DATA6
CN94
DATA7
CN94
DATA8
CN94
pSLCT
CN94
nFAULT
CN94
pBUSY
CN94
nACK
CN94
pPE
CN94
nINT
CN94
nSTB
CN94
nAFTX
CN94
nSELIN
CN94
PLH
4
CN94 CN94 CN94 CN94
GND
Edition 1.0
337
Model
Drawing Name
DX-600 / 800
SC PC Board (13/14)
APR 2002
DX-600/800
A
B
C
D
Option FLASH Memory Card I/F 2M,4M,8M 003:C3;004:C1;005:B1;014:A4
AD[15-1]
004:D1,004:D1,004:D1,004:D1,004:D1,004:D1,004:D1,
AV[22-15]
31 5027 068 030 833
1
004:D4;008:D4
AD[1]
29
AD[2]
28
AD[3]
27
AD[4]
26
AD[5]
25
AD[6]
24
DV[15-0]
AD[7]
23
AD[8]
22
AD[9]
12
CN12
A1
CN12
A2
CN12
A3
CN12
A4
CN12
A5
CN12
A6
CN12
A7
CN12 +3.3V AD[10]
47K
1 CN93
*LAN
LEDV
CN93
CN93
GND
LEDV
CN93
CN93
GND
GND
CN93
CN93
GND
A16
CN93
CN93
D15
A15
CN93
52
D[14]
57
D[6]
58
D7
A14
CN93
CN93
D14
A13
CN93
CN93
D6
A12
CN93
CN93
D13
A11
CN93
59
D[5]
60
D[12]
61
D[4]
62
CN93
D5
CN93
D12
CN93
D4
A10
CN93
A9
CN93
A21
CN93
*WE
CN93
63 Vcc
CN93
Vcc
*RESET
CN93
0.1uF
C249
25V
66
D[10]
67
CN93
D11
A20
CN93
CN93
D3
A19
CN93
CN93
D10
A18
CN93
CN93
D2
A17
CN93
69
D[1]
70
D[8]
71
CN93
D9
A8
CN93
CN93
D1
A7
CN93
CN93
D8
A6
CN93
CN93
D0
A5
CN93
72
D[0]
001:D2;002:D1;003:A1;004:A1
nRD
CN93
*OE
A4
CN93
CN93
GND
A3
CN93
CN93
GND
A2
CN93
CN93
Vdd
A1
CN93
CN93
Vdd
Vdd
CN93
CN93
A15
Vdd
CN93
74 75
GND
AD[15]
78
AD[14]
79
AD[13]
80
AD[12]
81
3
AD[10]
83
AD[9]
84
AD[8]
85
AD[7]
86
AD[6]
87
AD[5]
88
AD[4]
89
AD[3]
90
AD[2]
91
A14
*CE
CN93
A13
D0
CN93
CN93
A12
D1
CN93
CN93
A11
D2
CN93
+3.3V
A10
D3
CN93
CN93
A9
D4
CN93
A8
D5
CN93
CN93
A7
D6
CN93
CN93
A6
D7
CN93
CN93
A5
D8
CN93
CN93
A4
D9
CN93
CN93
A3
D10
CN93
CN93
A2
D11
CN93
CN93
A1
D12
CN93
93 CN93
Vdd
D13
CN93
CN93
Vdd
D14
CN93
CN93
AEN
D15
CN93
94 95 002:A3
nLANC 96
001:D2
LANRDY
CN93 0.1uF
25V
AV[22]
50
A[12]
ARDY
*WR
CN93
*RD
CN93
9
A[11]
10
A[10]
DV[0]
11
A[9]
DV[1]
31
12
A[21]
DV[2]
32
DV[3]
2
DV[4]
3
nRESET
GND
CN93
GND
RESET
CN93
A[20]
CN93
GND
INTR0
CN93
99
A[19]
17
A[18]
18
A[17]
(to FROM for Program)
AD[15-1]
DV[6]
5
DV[7]
6
DV[8]
64
19
A[8]
DV[9]
65
20
A[7]
DV[10]
66
21
A[6]
DV[11]
37
A[5]
GND
A17 A18
CN12
A19
CN12
A20
CN12
A21
CN12
A22
CN12
GND (Not used A23)
CN12
D0
CN12
D1
CN12
D2
CN12
D3
CN12
D4
CN12
D5
2
CN12
D6
CN12
D7
CN12
D8
CN12
D9
CN12
D10
CN12
D11
CN12 23
A[4]
DV[13]
39
24
A[3]
DV[14]
40
A[2]
DV[15]
A[1]
D12
CN12
D13
CN12
D14
CN12
D15
CN12
*CE1
CN12
*CE2
CN12
*OE
CN12
*WEL
CN12
*WEH
41 +5V R138
+3.3V
100K
7 42
004:D2
nFROMCV 9
nFROML 30
DD[0]
31
DD[1]
001:D2
004:D1;008:D4
nRDV 15
004:D1;008:D4
nWLV 33
DD[2]
33
DD[3]
34
DD[4]
35
DD[5]
36
DD[6]
37
DD[7]
38
DD[8]
39
DD[9]
40
DD[10]
41
DD[11]
42
DD[12]
43
DD[13]
44
DD[14]
45
DD[15]
59 CN12
*MB4
CN12
RDY/*BSY
CN12
*CD
CN12
*ID0
CN12
*ID1
CN12
*ID2
16
+3.3V R134
3
100K 36
001:A4
nCDOPT
001:A4
CID0
001:A4
CID1
001:A4
CID2
R135
100K 67
R136
(to LAN Controller)
100K 63
R137
100K 62
44 Card ID
Panasonic
ID0
ID1
ID2
H
L
L
HP
H
L
H
PB
H
H
L
Others
H
H
H
CN12
nRDD
003:C3;004:C2;005:B2
pLANRST
001:D2
LANINT
001:A3
RSV
45 CN12
RSV
CN12
RSV
CN12
RSV
CN12
+5V
57 60
nWRU_DQMU001:D2;002:A3;003:A1 +5V 17 51
50 GND
A16
CN12
38
DV[12]
49
CN93
A15
CN12
4
DV[5]
48
100
A14
CN12
30
001:D3;003:C1;004:A2
CN93
GND 003:C3;004:C1;005:B1;014:C1
GND
nWRL_DQML 001:D2;002:A3;003:A1;004:C1
47 CN93
98
CN12
53
46
97
C248
A[13]
32
CN93
A13
48
AV[20]
CN93
92
AD[1]
47
29
CN93
(to LAN Controller)
46
AV[19]
28
82
AD[11]
AV[18]
8
27
CN93
A12
CN12
19
7
16
A11
CN12
20
49
26
77
14
AV[21]
25
76
AD[15]
A[14]
22
73
13
6
15
68
D[9]
A[15]
14
65
D[3]
A[16]
13 CN93
64
D[2]
A10
CN12 GND
5
CN93
AD[14]
DD[15-0]
003:C3;004:C4;005:B1
25V
56
D[11]
21
0.1uF
+3.3V
10
AD[13]
C63
2
AD[12]
AV[17]
4
55
D[7]
D[13]
8
AV[16]
3
54
(to FROM for Program)
AD[11]
001:A1;002:D2;003:A1;004:A1
2
53
D[15]
A[23-1]
C262
nLANOPT
0.1uF
25.0V
FX8C-100P-SV2
51 001:A3
A9
CN12 CN12
to LANB PCB
D[15-0] R442
001:A1;002:A2;003:A1;004:A3
A8
CN12 11
+5V
LAN Board I/F
1
CN12
+5V
CN12
GND
CN12
GND
CN12
GND
CN12
GND
CN12
NC
CN12
NC
CN12
NC
CN12
NC
CN12
NC
CN12
NC
CN12
NC
CN12
NC
1 34 35 68
GND
4
4
18 GND
43 52 54 55 56 58 61
Edition 1.0
338
Model
Drawing Name
DX-600 / 800
SC PC Board (14/14)
APR 2002
DX-600/800
10.3. PNL1 PC Board B
D
BAT
nLED[1-0]
SCN_DB[3]
8
SCN_DB[4]
9
SCN_DB[5]
10
SCN_DB[6]
11
SCN_DB[7]
GND
35
4.7K
P64/*RD
53
LCDE
P65/*WR
54
LCDRW
P66/*WAIT
55
LCDRS
P67/ASTB
56
P36/*SCK31
17
R13
100K
P35/SO31
16
R14
100K
R23 100K 1
100K
SCN_DB[1]
58
P41/AD1
P32
13
R17
100K
SCN_DB[2]
59
P42/AD2
P31
12
SCN_DB[3]
60
P43/AD3
P30
11
SCN_DB[4]
61
P44/AD4
SCN_DB[5]
62
47
P45/AD5
P70/TI00/TO0
TL4
SCN_DB[6]
63
P46/AD6
ENERGY SAVER LED1
P71/TI01
48
TL5
49
64
P47/AD7
P73/TI51/TO51
50
TL6 pBZCLK
KIN[0]
1
P50/A8
P74/PCL
51
CLKOUT
KIN[1]
2
P51/A9
P75/BUZ
52
TLCNT
KIN[2]
3
P52/A10
KIN[3]
4
33
P53/A11
P10/ANI0
KIN[4]
5
P11/ANI1
32
P54/A12
P12/ANI2
31
P13/ANI3
30
nPWSW
P14/ANI4
29
nAPNT
P15/ANI5
28
pSDOOR
P16/ANI6
27
nB4
P17/ANI7
26
nWAKUP
6
P55/A13
KIN[6]
7
P56/A14
KIN[7]
8
P57/A15
39
IC
34
(IC)
AVREF
GND
2 TP1
4.7k
002:A1
0.1W
To: SC PCB
Q6 DTC143ZKA
S11B-PH-K-M 1
+5VP
+5V 2
47k 1
+5VP
+5VP
GND
3
ENERGY SAVER SW1
R27
1
2
1K EVQ11L04M-1
TP2
4
GND
R36 C13
GND
1K
5
R30
1K
6 C18
C14
R31
1K
R32
1K
R33
1K
1
C15
R34
1K
+5V
+5V
GND
CN50
pPNLSD
CN50
pPNLRD
8
CN50
nPWSAVE
CN50
9
nWAKUP
R37
1K
C20
50.0V
10
CN50
pPNLRST
CN50
pBZCLK
CN50
nBPNT
3
47k
4
3
11
1K C21
50.0V
2
100K
*1
SNCMN2 1
3
1
2
RPI-352 PC4 4
GND
R21
100K
0.1W R20
R19 0.1W
RPI-352 PC1
Q2 DTC143ZKA
1 68
4.7k
*1
2
R35
0.01uF 100
100K
1
3 2
CN50
0.01uF
nBPNT
+5V
SNCMN1
4
R18
KIN[7-0]
R10
470 002:A1
+5VP
0.1W
+5VP
R9
SCN_DB[7-0]
+5VP
(Vpp)
GND
002:A1
50.0V 0.01uF
GND
0.125W 0
7
0.01uF
50.0V 0.01uF
JP2
50.0V
50.0V 0.01uF
470
LMP202C10-FR
+5V
CN50
100K
R29 50.0V 0.01uF
R11
16
GND
CN50
+5V
GND GND
C19
15
CN50
(for FG strap)
13 14
2
220
+5V
12
002:A1
pLEDCT0
+5VP R25
2 1 LN376GCPX-2UT
3
pLEDCT1
0.1uF
100K
R16
1
R15
14
25.0V
15
P33
2
2
P34/SI31
P40/AD0
4.7K
C23
P03/INTP3/ADTRG
KIN[5]
Q8 2SA1037AK 560.0 3
R43
TL3
P72/TI50/TO50
Q9 2SA1037AK 560.0 3
2
+5V
0.1uF
nPWSAVE
57
VSS0
7
23
1 R44
46
9
SCN_DB[2]
P25/ASCK0
0.1W
GND
6
PNLTXD
SCN_DB[0]
JP1 0
PNLRXD
22
AVSS
C9 V5
SCN_DB[1]
16.0V
VIN
SCN_DB[0]
5
21
P24/TxD0
100K
22.0uF
VDD
4
0.1uF
VSS
LCDE
P23/RxD0
+5V R24
GND
2
DB7
10
C8
DB6
R3
P22/*SCK30
20
10K
DB5
3
3
25.0V
DB4
LCDRW
C7
DB3
LCDRS
10
750
DB2
10
R2
R4
DB1
R1
2
19
1
P02/INTP2
P21/SO30
25.0V
45
100K
18
2
P01/INTP1
1 R12
P20/SI30
100K
44
R5
E DB0
1
IC1
SNSCT
SCN_DB[7]
RS
*RESET P00/INTP0
TL2
IC4
XT2
36 nPWDWN 43
TL1
LCD MODULE
uPD780022A
37
Q4 DTC143ZKA
R28
0
GND
R/W
XT1
4.7k
2
50.0V
R45
15pF
PST9339U
3 GND
25
2
2
X2
38
VSS1
GND
40
42
R6
3
AVDD
10 G 2
3 4.7K VOUT
50.0V
NC
50.0V
DT-26-32.768KHz-7.3PF 32.768KHz
100pF
25.0V 0.1uF C3
1
X1 C2
X1
2
50.0V 12pF
4
25.0V
47k
CST8.00MTW 8MHz
1
C1
24
VDD0
1
41
X2
VDD1
GND
1 nLED[0]
1
GND
GND
VCC
Q3 DTC143ZKA
47k
0.22F Gold Capacitor C11
4.7k
0.1uF 1
IC2
5.5V 2
22.0uF C16 16.0V
Q1 DTC143ZKA
2 C5 1
47k
+5VP
nLED[1]
1000pF
4.7k
002:A1
3
1
C12
0.01uF
50.0V
3 2
A
2
MA748
RN5VD20A
3
K
3 100
CD GND
C6
#
R8 50.0V
25.0V 0.1uF #
+5VP
D1 NC
1
OUT
5
C4
1
BAT
1000pF
VDD
C10
2
NC
R7
# IC3 4
10K
BAT
C17
#:Not Mounted
C
22.0uF C22 16.0V
A
4
3
*1 : table-1
2
RPI-352 PC2
RPI-352 PC3 4
3
4 A4 scanning
B4 scanning
PC2
Not Mounted
Mounted Sensor
R18
Mounted 68
Not Mounted
1 GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
A-POINT
Edition 1.0
B4
339
S-DOOR
B-POINT
Model
Drawing Name
DX-600 / 800
PNL1 PC Board (1/2)
APR 2002
DX-600/800
A
001:D2
pLEDCT1
001:D2
pLEDCT0
001:D1
nLED[1-0]
001:A4
SCN_DB[7-0]
001:A4
KIN[7-0]
B
C
D
SCN_DB[7] 3
MA786
1
D9
SCN_DB[6] 3
MA786
1
D8
SCN_DB[5] 3
MA786
1
D7
SCN_DB[4] 3
MA786
1
D6
SCN_DB[3] 3
MA786
1
D5
SCN_DB[2] 3
MA786
1
D4
3
MA786
1
D3
3
MA786
1
D2
SCN_DB[1]
1 SCN_DB[0]
1
*2 :
MEMORY
REDIAL/
INTERNET
FLASH
09/O
STAMP
06/Y
ON LINE
13/S
RESOLUTION
INTERNET
PAUSE
SW2
SW8
SW14
SW22
SW30
SW38
SW46
SW54
*2
LED2 1
: Not Mounted
DX-800 : Mounted
KSCN[7]
KSCN[6]
KSCN[5]
KSCN[4]
KSCN[3]
KSCN[2]
*2
KSCN[1]
KSCN[0]
UF-L7
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
R38
2 2
1
LN376GCPX-2UT EVQ11L04M-1
EVQ11L04M-1
EVQ11L04M-1
EVQ11L04M-1
EVQ11L04M-1
EVQ11L04M-1
EVQ11L04M-1
*2
LED4
0.1W 220
R40 2
1
0.1W 220
LN376GCPX-2UT
EVQ11L04M-1
KIN[0]
nLED[0]
ABBR
2 SW3
MONITOR
SW9
SW15
10/P
SW23
07/U
SW31
03/E
SW39
STAMP
02/W
SW47
ALARM
LED3 1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
LED21 R39
2 2
1
0.1W 220
R41 2
LN376GCPX-2UT EVQ11L04M-1
EVQ11L04M-1
EVQ11L04M-1
EVQ11L04M-1
EVQ11L04M-1
EVQ11L04M-1
2
SW55
EVQ11L04M-1
1
0.1W 220
LN28RPX
EVQ11L04M-1
KIN[1]
nLED[1]
20/L
SW16 1
SW24 2
1
EVQ11L04M-1
2
SW40
1
EVQ11L04M-1
05/T
17/H
SW32 2
1
EVQ11L04M-1
12/A
SW48 2
1
EVQ11L04M-1
SW56 2
1
EVQ11L04M-1
2
EVQ11L04M-1
KIN[2]
08/I
04/R
18/J
*3 : Jumper used net list
CONTRAST
net name SW17 1
SW25 2
1
SW33 2
SW41
1
2
1
SW49 2
1
Ref.No. of jumpers
net name
Ref.No. of jumpers
SW57 2
1
2
JW3
+5V
JW19
10mm
JW21
10mm
10mm
JW13
pSDOOR
JW44
0.125W 0
EVQ11L04M-1
EVQ11L04M-1
EVQ11L04M-1
EVQ11L04M-1
EVQ11L04M-1
EVQ11L04M-1
KIN[3]
nBPNT
19/K
16/G
15/F
SNCMN2
24/C
DIR.SEARCH
1
SW10 2
1
EVQ11L04M-1
+5VP
SW18 2
1
EVQ11L04M-1
SW26 2
1
EVQ11L04M-1
SW34 2
SW42
1
EVQ11L04M-1
2
1
EVQ11L04M-1
SW50 2
1
EVQ11L04M-1
JW22
10mm
JW23
10mm
JW28
10mm
SW58 2
1
EVQ11L04M-1
10mm
JW26
10mm
10mm
JW29
3
SW4
JW18
SW1_nPWSW
JW41
(E.SAVER)
2
JW42
0.125W 0
SCN[4]
EVQ11L04M-1
KIN[4]
3
JW31
10mm
JW30
10mm
JW25
10mm
JW24
10mm
JW20
10mm
JW27
10mm
JW32
10mm
JW34
10mm
JW35
10mm
JW33
10mm
JW14
10mm
0.125W 0
JW43
0.125W
SCN[5]
0
START
P2/-
14/D
27/N
23/X GND
SW5 1
SW11 2
1
EVQ11L04M-1
SW19 2
1
EVQ11L04M-1
SW27 2
1
EVQ11L04M-1
SW35 2
SW43
1
EVQ11L04M-1
2
1
EVQ11L04M-1
SW51 2
1
EVQ11L04M-1
JW12
10mm
JW15
10mm
JW16
10mm
SCN[6]
SW59 2
1
EVQ11L04M-1
2
SCN[7]
LED1_K
EVQ11L04M-1 10mm
JW17
(E.SAVER)
KIN[5] JW48
0.125W 0
COPY/ SET
21/@
P3/SPACE
28/M
22/Z
26/B
JW49
0.125W 0
SW6
SW12
SW20
SW28
SW36
SW44
SW52
JW50
SW60
(STAMP) 0.125W
0 1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
LED4_A
2
(MEMORY/
JW61 0 EVQ11L04M-1
EVQ11L04M-1
EVQ11L04M-1
EVQ11L04M-1
EVQ11L04M-1
EVQ11L04M-1
EVQ11L04M-1
INTERNET)
JW62
EVQ11L04M-1
LED3_A
nLED[0]
0 KIN[6]
4
JW1
nAPNT
STOP
11/SYMBOL
CLEAR
P4/SHIFT
P1/.
25/V
1
SW13 2
1
PC1_K
SW21 2
1
SW29 2
1
SW37 2
SW45
1
2
1
SW53 2
1
SW61
EVQ11L04M-1
EVQ11L04M-1
EVQ11L04M-1
EVQ11L04M-1
EVQ11L04M-1
2
EVQ11L04M-1
1
JW11
10mm
2
EVQ11L04M-1
pBZCLK
(A-POINT)
nB4
EVQ11L04M-1
4
01/Q
FUNCTION SW7
nLED[1]
PNLRXD
JW2
JW47
0.125W 0
PNLTXD
JW45
0.125W 0
JW46
0.125W 0
KIN[7]
Edition 1.0
340
Model
Drawing Name
DX-600 / 800
PNL1 PC Board (2/2)
APR 2002
DX-600/800
10.4. MJR PC Board A
B
C
#
D
# C107
Not Mounted
#
# L8
#
UF1717V282Y0R5 L4
5
FL05RD200A 6
ARG
1 2 RA-391M-C6-Y VA2
VA4
#
*1
ARG1
*1
#
*1
(VA4 or VA2)
#
*1
LHL08NB332J
2
3
(VA9 or VA8)
L2(T)
CN28
N.C.(No Pin)
CN28
L1(R)
1 +5VP1 JW11
+24V
8
2
CN29
+5VP
3
CN29
GND
CN29
pCMLD
CN29
pCTON
2
1
12
4
+V
3
+24V
CN29
+5VP
5
JW12
B6B-PH-K-S
+24V
9 10
2 0
CN28
to SC PCB (CN18)
FG
*1
L7
3 250.0V
2
4
0.033uF
1
RL1 ATXD20428
CN20
JW1
NF3
1
-V
T1
4
FL05RD200A
1
B2(3)B-PH-K-S
JW8
CN20
3
DSSA-P3100SB
CN20
to SC PCB (CN18)
L3
VA12
CN20
L1(R)
JW3
2
1 2 DSS-401M-S00B
CN20 L2(T)
0.033uF
LHL08NB272J
1 2 RA-391M-C6-Y VA8
CN20
JW2
VA9
T2
1
1 2 DSS-401M-S00B
1
R41-1396C
C106
LINE
250.0V
0.033uF C108 250.0V
GND
Table USA mode VA4,VA9 or VA2,VA8
RA-391M-C6-Y or DSS-401M-S00B
JP1
Not Mounted
JP2 JP3 JP4
1
RA-501M-C6-Y or DSS-601M-S00B
MA152A
3
3
Not Mounted
Mounted
Not Mounted
2
DTC143ZKA Q10
Mounted
Mounted Not Mounted
D3
EU mode
4
1
Mounted GND
5
#
*1 L2
JW4
*1
JP3 VA10 1
FL05RD200A
D6
2
3
3
RD3.6M
T2
CN21
T1
CN21 CN21
4 CN21
1 MA152A
+5VP1
3 4 5
#
* Not Mounted
#
# L12
1
4 PC1 PC814A
2
# R127
3 6
0.25W
Mounted *2 when moduler jack connector for Ext.TEL is mounted on CN21.
*4
pHKOF
+5VP1 +5VP2 7
#
Mounted *3 or *4 when the function, the hook-up detection of the handset in the saving energy mode. And *5 mounted jamper when not having this function.
1 2
VCC IN1 IN2
*4 complies with the standard of the insertion loss in a certain destinations.
OUT1
6
5 OUT2 4 AOUT TL1 GND IC20 THS-56F 3
GND1
#
+5VP1 JW10
2 1
4 IC22 TC7S00F
5 VCC GND 3
IC22 TC7S00F JW9
#
# * Not Mounted
GND1
DX-600 / 800
341
4
#
Model
Edition 1.0
CN29
18 * Not Mounted
*2
*3,*4,*5
FL05RD200A 6
#
220uF
C100 FL05RD200A
#
#
*3,*4
JW6
# L11
2
JW7
# 1
NV390D05
CN21
3
3.83V 2
R41-1396A CN21
5
*3
VA13
#
3
VR61SS
6
*2 EXT. TEL
2
2 RD3.6M
10K
*3,*4,*5
# JP4
0 D5
PC2 PC817B
3
10K 0.25W
D9
0.25W
R117
R131
R116 JP2
4
25.0V
4
*1
10V
CN23
FL05RD200A 3
1
0.1uF
CN23
# JP11
C183
CN23
# JP1
0.25W
T1
*1
270
3
CN23
JW5
R125
T2
L1
2
NV390D05
CN23
0
1uF 1
VA11
CN23
0.25W
R41-1396A
+5VP1
JW13
250V
4.7K
C103
EXT. TEL/Handset
GND
Drawing Name MJR PC Board (1/1)
APR 2002
DX-600/800
10.5. SNS1 PC Board A
B
C
D
1
1
B3B-PH-K-M 3 CN80
LDSC1
CN80
GND
CN80
nCCHK1
CN81
nCCHK1
CN81
GND
CN81
nRSEN
CN81
LDRE
2
2
to SNS2 2
1
1
2
3
1
to SNS4
4
3 CNA1003H01ME PC1
3
2
B4B-PH-K-M
4
3
4
Edition 1.0
4
342
Model
Drawing Name
DX-600 / 800
SNS1 PC Board (1/1)
APR 2002
DX-600/800
10.6. SNS2 PC Board A
B
C
D
1
2
1
1
2
3 CNA1003H01ME PC1
2
4
B3B-PH-K-M 1 CN82
nCCHK1
CN82
GND
CN82
LDSC1
2
3
Edition 1.0
to SNS1 (LPC)
3
3
4
4
343
Model
Drawing Name
DX-600 / 800
SNS2 PC Board (1/1)
APR 2002
DX-600/800
10.7. SNS3 PC Board A
B
C
D
1
1
to LPC
2
to TONER
CN83 CN83 CN83 CN83 CN83
5
+5V
4
TONER
3
GND
2
LDSP1
1
nPCHK1
+5V 3 TONER 2 GND
1
2
CN84 CN84 CN84
B3B-PH-K-S
B5B-PH-K-M
3
3
3
1
4
2
CNA1003H01ME PC1
4
Edition 1.0
4
344
Model
Drawing Name
DX-600 / 800
SNS3 PC Board (1/1)
APR 2002
DX-600/800
10.8. SNS4 PC Board A
B
C
D
1
1
B6B-PH-K-M
B2B-PH-K-S +5V
5
1
+5V
CN87
CN86
4
6
2
CN86
250mW 68 R1
To:
THERMISTOR
2
THERM
CN87
To:
1/4W
2
nESEN
CN87
PAPER EXIT SENSOR
SC PCB (CN58)
3
1
4
2
CNA1003H01ME PC1
B4B-PH-K-M
LDRE
4
nCCHK1
1
nRSEN
3
CN85
3 1
nCCHK1
3
nRSEN
CN87
CN85
CN87
GND
GND
CN87
To: TIMING SENSOR
CN85
2
3
(CN81)
2 CN85
GND
4
Edition 1.0
4
345
Model
Drawing Name
DX-600 / 800
SNS4 PC Board (1/1)
APR 2002
DX-600/800
10.9. CCD PC Board A
B
C
D
1
1
+5V
+5V 2
2
3
3
4
4
Model DX-600 / 800
Edition 1.0
346
Drawing Name CCD PC Board (1/1)
APR 2002
DX-600/800
10.10. ILS PC Board A
B
C
D
1
1
2
2
S2(3)B-PH-K-S 1
+24V
CN73
NC NC
COM
COM
NO NO
To: SC PCB
AVM3958
SW101
(CN57)
NC NC 3
3
+24VD
COM
COM
3
NO
CN73
NO AVM3958
SW102
4
4
Model DX-600 / 800
Edition 1.0
347
Drawing Name ILS PC Board (1/1)
APR 2002
DX-600/800
10.11. ACI PC Board A
B
C
D
1
1
AC Inlet 2
2
NC-179-L3A
Harness, ACI 1
FBS8701
AC (L)
CN1
ACH1 (Black)
1 CN2
FG (G)
2
ACH1 (White)
2 CN2
3
To: Power Supply Unit
CN1
(CN101)
AC (N)
CN1
FG Strap
3
3
FBS8702
FG1
1 CN3
FG
4
4
Model DX-600 / 800
Edition 1.0
348
Drawing Name ACI PC Board (1/1)
APR 2002
DX-600/800
10.12. Power Supply Unit A
B
C
D
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
Model DX-600 / 800
Edition 1.0
349
Drawing Name HVPS (1/4)
APR 2002
DX-600/800
A
B
C
D
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
Model DX-600 / 800
Edition 1.0
350
Drawing Name HVPS (2/4)
APR 2002
DX-600/800
A
B
C
D
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
Model DX-600 / 800
Edition 1.0
351
Drawing Name HVPS (3/4)
APR 2002
DX-600/800
A
B
C
D
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
Model DX-600 / 800
Edition 1.0
352
Drawing Name HVPS (4/4)
APR 2002
DX-600/800
A
B
C
D
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
Model DX-600 / 800
Edition 1.0
353
Drawing Name LVPS (1/1)
APR 2002
DX-600/800
10.13. LANB PC Board A
B
C D4 1
+3.3V
+3.3VA
D
+5V
2
+3.3VA
3 BAV99LT1
+3.3V
AGND
*SRDY
0 R15 50.0V
10pF C11
TX-
NC
NC2
RD+
RX+
RDC
RXC
RD-
RX-
NC1
NC3
8
12 11
7
13 7
6
5 6
5
9
11K
3
1
6
R23
7 8
+3.3V
R7
# R24
AGND
0.1W
CN97
NC
(No Pin)
75
0.1W 75
RX-
0.1W
24.9 +5V
2
2
BAV99LT1
47K 3
47K
CN97
2 GND
0
9
1
10 11
ACTIVITY
CN97
+5V
CN97
LINK
+3.3V
12
R19
+3.3V JP1
0.1W 6
100
R20
GND
7 TL30
+3.3V
1 3 2
GND
CS
VCC IC2 0.0
DI SK
AGND
# TP1
DO
FG
GND 5298T(molex)
4
GND 5 FM93C46LM8 AT93C46-10SC-2.7
1 TL31
C20
VDD OSC1 OUT CONT
74
NC
0.1uF 25V
25MHz 4 3
NC
0.1uF 25V
JP2 0
2
0
8
C10
#
1
21
CN97
1
GND
25 5
RX+
AGND R12
D1
TX-
CN97
#
GND
0.0625W
TX+
CN97
R18
R17 250.0V C14
C12 R22
4
CN97
1000pF
10pF
C8
24.9
0.01uF
R10
24.9
50.0V
0.1W
+3.3VA
0.1W
0.1W R9
X25OUT
TX25
RX25
MCLK
MDO
MDI
RX_ER
RX_DV
*CSOUT
TL29
0.0625W 0
24
15
*ADS
GND
2 AT93C46-10SC-2.7
GND DSO751SV(25.000MHz)
JP1
64wordX16bit
Mounted
128wordX8bit
Not Mounted
3
JP2 Not Mounted Mounted
GND
D31
D30
D29
51
52
50
TRANSMIT
TL8 TL11 TL14 TL16 TL18 TL22 TL24 TL10 TL13 TL15 TL17 TL20 TL23 TL25
TD+ 16
10 TX+
TDC 14
12 TXC
TD- 15
11 TX-
RECEIVE
RD+ 1
7 RX+
DD[15]
DD[14]
DD[13]
DD[12]
DD[11]
DD[10]
DD[9]
DD[8]
DD[7]
DD[6]
DD[5]
DD[4]
DD[3]
DD[2]
DD[1]
DD[0]
TL6
D28
AGND
TL4
002:C4
COL100
*VLBUS LCLK
109
GND
14
R6
TL28
110
D27
TL2
30
#
119
53
45
*CYCLE
D26
39
23
105
55
44
*RDYRTN
56
47K
22
95
D25
42
GND
D24
R3
*DATACS W/*R
TD-
10
20
69
57
37
19
59
D23
3
+3.3V
*LDEV
TXC
R11
17
54
58
48
8
3
16
41
D22
38
1
2
26
D21
47K
(RESET:High Active)
60
36
RESET
61
GND
TL1
(INTR0:High Active)
D20
R2
47
INTR0
62
25.0V 0.022uF
XTAL2
(ARDY:Low Active)
D19
32
1K C1
ARDY
D18
pLANRST
*WR
63
002:C4
R1
XTAL1
65
pLANINT
*RD
D17
002:C4
31
2
0
D16
40
nLANRDY
3 AGND
TX+
TDC
H1012
A15
66
002:A4
EESK EECS
A14
D15
34
002:C4nWRU_DQMU
LAN91C111-NC
A13
67
nRDD
EEDI
68
33
A12
D14
94
EEDO
70
93
AD[15]
A11
71
92
AD[14]
ENEEP
IC1
D13
AD[13]
A10
D12
91
IOSO2
D11
AD[12]
IOSO1
A9
72
90
A8
D10
AD[11]
IOSO
73
89
A7
75
88
AD[10]
LEDB
D9
AD[9]
(LEDB:LINK)
A6
D8
87
A5
77
AD[8]
LEDA
78
86
(LEDA:ACTIVITY)
76
85
AD[7]
A4
D7
AD[6]
A3
D6
84
RBAIS
101
83
AD[5]
*CNTRL
D4
82
AD[4]
A1 A2
D5
AD[3]
LBK
102
81
*LNK
(AEN:Low Active)
103
AD[2]
CRS100
TXEN100
TXD0
TXD1
TXD3
TXD2
RXD0
RXD1
RXD2
RXD3
AVDD
VDD 002:C4
80
TPI-
D3
2
AD[1]
AEN
D2
AD[15-1]
TPI+
104
nLANC
002:A4
106
002:A4
GND 43
*BE0
1
D2 BAV99LT1 +5V 2
AGND
TPO(BE1,0=L:word access)
107
96
4
TD+
50.0V
BAV99LT1
D3
TPO+
*BE2 *BE1
49.9
R14 3
*BE3
D1
97
108
98
D0
99
0.1W
#
1
+3.3V
49.9
TL26 TL27
15
24.9
27
128
127
TL19 TL21 114
121
118
113
115
117
116
125
126
124
123
18
13
122
79
112
100
64
3
46
35
TL3 TL5 TL7 TL9 TL12 GND
50.0V R13
GND
T1
16 14
C21
AGND
to LANC PCB S7(8-4)B-PH-K-S
4
0.1uF 25V
49
0.1uF 25V
C6
111
C5
47K
120
0.1uF 25V
R5
29
C4
25V
0.1uF
28
1
0.1uF 25V
10pF
C7 C3
R4
3.3
47K
0
0 R28
0 R27
0 R26
R25
R21
0.1W
0.1W
+3.3V
DD[15-0]
5 RXC
4
1CT:1
Edition 1.0
354
4
RD- 2
6 RX-
RDC 3
1CT:1CT
Model
Drawing Name
DX-600 / 800
LANB PC Board (1/2)
APR 2002
DX-600/800
A
B
C
D
+5V
SC I/F
+3.3V
55
D[7]
56
D[14]
57
D[6]
58
D[13]
59
D[5]
60
D[12]
61
D[4]
62 63
25V C18
2
0.1uF
64
002:C2
D[11]
65
D[3]
66
D[10]
67
D[2]
68
D[9]
69
D[1]
70
D[8]
71
D[0]
72 73
nRD
74 75 76 77
AD[15-1]
GND
3
78
AD[15] AD[14]
79
AD[13]
80
AD[12]
81
AD[11]
82
AD[10]
83
AD[9]
84
AD[8]
85
AD[7]
86
AD[6]
87
AD[5]
88
AD[4]
89
AD[3]
90
AD[2]
91
AD[1]
92 93
+3.3V
94
nLANRDY
96 97
22uF C9
98 99 100
CN96
GND
GND
CN96
CN96
GND
A16
CN96
CN96
D15
A15
CN96
CN96
D7
A14
CN96
CN96
D14
A13
CN96
CN96
D6
A12
CN96
CN96
D13
A11
CN96
CN96
D5
A10
CN96
CN96
D12
A9
CN96
CN96
D4
A21
CN96
CN96
Vcc
*WE
CN96
CN96
Vcc
*RESET
CN96
CN96
D11
A20
CN96
CN96
D3
A19
CN96
CN96
D10
A18
CN96
CN96
D2
A17
CN96
CN96
D9
A8
CN96
CN96
D1
A7
CN96
CN96
D8
A6
CN96
CN96
D0
A5
CN96
CN96
*OE
A4
CN96
CN96
GND
A3
CN96
CN96
GND
A2
CN96
CN96
Vdd
A1
CN96
CN96
Vdd
Vdd
CN96
CN96
A15
Vdd
CN96
CN96
A14
*CE
CN96
CN96
A13
D0
CN96
CN96
A12
D1
CN96
CN96
A11
D2
CN96
CN96
A10
D3
CN96
CN96
A9
D4
CN96
CN96
A8
D5
CN96
CN96
A7
D6
CN96
CN96
A6
D7
CN96
CN96
A5
D8
CN96
CN96
A4
D9
CN96
CN96
A3
D10
CN96
CN96
A2
D11
CN96
CN96
A1
D12
CN96
CN96
Vdd
D13
CN96
CN96
Vdd
D14
CN96
CN96
AEN
D15
CN96
CN96
ARDY
*WR
CN96
CN96
GND
*RD
CN96
CN96
GND
RESET
CN96
CN96
GND
INTR0
CN96
CN96
GND
GND
CN96
1
A[21-1]
2 3
A[21-1]
002:C3
GND
4
A[16]
5
A[15]
6
A[14]
7
A[13]
8
A[12]
9
A[11]
10
A[10]
11
A[9]
12
A[21]
13
+3.3V JW5 #
13
002:A2
28
nRD
11 R16
#1 A[20]
16
A[19]
17
A[18]
18
A[17]
19
A[8]
20
A[7]
21
A[6]
22
A[5]
23
A[4]
24
A[3]
25
A[2]
26
A[1]
1K
12
62.5mW
14 #1 C13
25.0V
0.022uF
GND
+3.3V
27
PROGRAM for LAN
28
FROM 16M
29 30
DD[0]
31
DD[1]
32
DD[2]
33
DD[3]
34
DD[4]
35
DD[5]
36
DD[6]
37
DD[7]
38
DD[8]
39
DD[9]
40
DD[10]
41
DD[11]
42
DD[12]
43
DD[13]
44
DD[14]
45
DD[15]
47 26
14 15
37
#1:Not mounted (Program FROM in SC Board) FROM JP4
16Mbit Not Mounted
32Mbit Mounted
A[1]
25
A[2]
24
A[3]
23
A[4]
22
A[5]
21
A[6]
20
A[7]
19
A[8]
18
A[9]
8
A[10]
7
A[11]
6
A[12]
5
A[13]
4
A[14]
3
A[15]
2
A[16]
1
A[17]
48
A[18]
17
A[19]
16
A[20]
9
A[21]
# JP4
10 0
VCC NC *BYTE
IC3
#1
90.0ns
#1
*CE *OE *WE
RY/BY
*RESET
DQ0
NC
DQ1
A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9
DQ2 DQ3 DQ4 DQ5 DQ6 DQ7 DQ8 DQ9 DQ10 DQ11
A10
DQ12
A11
DQ13
A12
DQ14
A13
DQ15
A14
15 29 TL32
D[0]
31
D[1]
33
D[2]
35
D[3]
38
D[4]
40
D[5]
42
D[6]
44
D[7]
30
D[8]
32
D[9]
34
D[10]
36
D[11]
39
D[12]
41
D[13]
43
D[14]
45
D[15]
2
A15 A16 A17 A18 A19
3 NC GND GND 46
002:C1
27
A[21-1] GND
002:A1
46
D[15-0]
nWRU_DQMU 001:A3
47 48 49 50
nRDD
001:A3
pLANRST
001:A3
pLANINT
001:A3
2
C2
25V
001:A3
95
0.1uF
nLANC
1 16V
001:A2
CN96
25V
D[15]
CN96
+5V
0.1uF
54
GND
D[15-0]
+5V
GND
C15
002:C3
*LAN
CN96
MBM29LV160B-90PFTN-SFKS
53
CN96
0
52
A[21-1]
51
1
JP3
C19
FX8C-100S-SV5
1
0.1uF 25V
to SC PCB
DD[15-0]
001:A4
GND GND
4 001:A2
Edition 1.0
4
AD[15-1]
355
Model
Drawing Name
DX-600 / 800
LANB PC Board (2/2)
APR 2002
DX-600/800
10.14. LANC PC Board A
B
C
D
1
1
To:LANB PCB(CN97)
RJ-45
B4B-PH-K-S
2
TM11R-5C-88 4
TX+
CN200
TX-
CN200
RX+
CN200
RX-
CN200
1
3
CN201
TX+
CN201
TX-
CN201
RX+
2
2
3
1
2
4 CN201
5 CN201
To:LANB PCB(CN97) 6
B3B-PH-K-S
CN201
3
ACTIVITY
3
K
A
7
CN202
CN201 BVH-410G1G
LED2
R2
270
0.25W
2
+5V
CN202
LINK
CN202
RX-
8 CN201
1
K
A 3
BVH-410G1G
LED1
R1
270
0.25W
TP1
TW-4BS-2K
FG
4
Edition 1.0
4
356
Model
Drawing Name
DX-600 / 800
LANC PC Board (1/1)
APR 2002
memo
DZZSM00184-0